Sony | KDL-32BX320 | Sony KDL-32BX320 Uputstva za rukovanje

4-270-479-12(1)
Digitalni LCD
TV prijemnik
Uputstvo za upotrebu
Uputstvo za brzi početak
Upotreba TV-a
Upotreba dodatne opreme
Upotreba Meni funkci�j a
Dodatne informacije
KDL-40BX420 / 32BX320 / 26BX320 / 22BX320
Uvod
Uvod
Zahvaljujemo se na odabiru Sony proizvoda.
he Favourite list you
want to
Zahvaljujmo
se namolimo
odabiruvas
Sony
Pre
upotrebe TV-a,
da proizvoda.
pažljivo pročitate
annel you want to
add
or
Pre
upotrebe
TV-a,
molimo
vas
da paupotrebu.
ljivo pro itate
ovo uputstvo i sačuvate ga za kasniju
ovo uputstvo i sa uvate ga za kasniju upotrebu.
he Favourite listIlustracije
you want to korišćene u ovom priručniku su za model
The illustrations
used
this manual
of the
KDL-32BX320
sem
akoindrugačije
nijeare
navedeno.
KDL-32BX320 unless otherwise stated.
ress
to confirm.
Informacije o zaštitnom znaku Trademark information
uide (EPG)•
*je registrovani zaštitni znak DVB Project.
a registered
of the DVB
Project.
• •HDMI, is
logotip
HDMItrademark
i High-Definition
Multiode, press GUIDE.
• asHDMI,
Logo,
and High-Definition
media
Interface
su zaštitni
znakovi
ili registrovani
desired operation
shown
in the HDMI
g table or displayed on
the
Multimedia
Interface
are trademarks
registered
zaštitni
znakovi HDMI
Licensing
LLC u or
Sjedinjenim
trademarks
of HDMI
Licensing
LLC in the United
Američkim
Državama
i drugim
zemljama.
States and other
countries.
• Proizvedeno
po licenci
kompanije Dolby Labora• Manufactured
under
license
Dolby
tories.
Dolby i simbol
duplo
D sufrom
zaštitni
znaci
Laboratories.
Dolby
and
the
double-D
symbol are
kompanije Dolby Laboratories.
trademarks
Dolby Laboratories.
• DivX®,
DivXofCertified®
i povezani logotipi su
®
®
hen press . zaštitni
, DivX
Certified
and
associated
• DivX
znaci
kompanije
DivX,
Inc.
i koriste logos
se sa are
trademarks
of
DivX,
Inc.
and are used under
licencom.
license.
O DIVX
VIDEO: DivX® je digitalni video format
de will appear on the screen. For details,
® is Ovaj
koji ABOUT
je osmislila
kompanija
uređaj
a digital
video
DIVX
VIDEO:DivX,
DivXInc.
ima format
službeni
DivX by
sertifikat
reprodukuje
created
DivX, iInc.
This is anDivX
official
® device that
video
zapise.
Više informacija
i softverske
za
plays DivXalate
video.
DivX
Certified
konvertovanje
datoteka
u
DivX
video
potražite
na
Visit divx.com for more information and software
www.divx.com.
tools to convert your files into DivX video.
O DIVX VIDEO-NA-ZAHTEV (VOD) : Uređaj sa
ABOUT
DIVX
VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This
oznakom
DivX
Certified®
je registrovati
® devicepotrebno
must
be
registered
in order
DivX
Certified
kako bi mogao da reprodukuje sadržaje DivX Videoto
play
purchased
DivX
Video-on-Demand
(VOD)
na-zahtev (VOD). Da biste dobili registracioni kod,
movies.
To obtain
registration
locate the
pronađite
odeljak
DivXyour
VOD
u meniju code,
za postavljaDivX VOD
device setup
nje uređaja.
Kodsection
unesiteinnayour
vod.divx.com
da menu.
biste Go
to
vod.divx.com
for
more
information
on
how to
završili postupak registracije i saznali više o DivX
complete your registration.
VOD.
“BRAVIA”
trademarks
of Sony
• •“BRAVIA”
i suand
zaštitni znaciare
Sony
korporacije.
Corporation.
2 SRP
2 GB
Položaj identifikacione nalepnice
Location of the identification label
Nalepnice
sa brojem
modela
i specifikacijom
Labels
for Model
No. and
Power
Supply rating napa(in
janja (u skladu
sa primenjivim
accordance
with applicable
safetysigurnosnim
regulation) propiare
sima) on
nalaze
se naofzadnjoj
located
the rear
the TV.strani TV-a.
VAŽNE INFORMACIJE
IMPORTANT
INFORMATION
Ako televizor nije
postavljen na dovoljno stabilnom
If mestu,
a television
notpotencijalno
positioned inopasan
a sufficiently
stable
možeisbiti
zbog mogućeg
location,
it
can
be
potentially
hazardous
due
to
falling.
pada. Mnoge povrede, posebno dece, mogu se izbeći
Many
injuries, particularly
to children, can
be što
avoided
jednostavnim
merama predostrožnosti
kao
su:
by• taking
simple
precautions
suchkoje
as: je preporučio
Upotreba
ormarića
ili stalaka
• proizvođač
Using cabinets
or stands recommended by the
televizora.
of the
television.
•manufacturer
Upotreba samo
onog
nameštaja koji sigurno
• podržava
Only using
furniture that can safely support the
televizor.
•television.
Osiguravanje da televizor ne viri preko ivice
• nameštaja
Ensuring the
television
is not overhanging the edge
na kojem
stoji.
•ofNe
televizora na visok nameštaj
thepostavljanje
supporting furniture.
ormariće
ili on
police
knjige)(for
bez
• (na
Notprimer,
placingnathe
television
tall za
furniture
pričvršćivanja
i nameštaja
i televizora
za stabilnu
example, cupboards
or bookcases)
without
podlogu.
anchoring both the furniture and the television to a
•suitable
Ne postavljanje
support. televizora na stolnjake ili druge
postavljene
izmeđuontelevizora
i nameštaja
• materijale
Not standing
the televisions
cloth or other
na
kojem stoji.
materials
placed between the television and
•supporting
Učenje dece
o opasnostima penjanja na nameštaj
furniture.
bi dohvatila
televizor
ili dangers
njegove of
kontrole.
• kako
Educating
children
about the
climbing
on furniture to reach the television or its controls.
1 Press the blue button.
2 Press the yellow button to select the Favourite list you want to
Add or remove channels in the
currently edited Favourite list
Sadržaj
To
Do this
Add or remove channels in the
currently edited Favourite list
1 Press the blue button. 3 Press F/f/G/g to select the channel you want to add or
remove,
presslist .you want to
2 Press the yellow button to select
thethen
Favourite
edit.
edit.
Remove all channels from the current
1 Press the blue button.
3 Press F/f/G/g to select2the
channel you want to add or
Favourite list
Press the yellow button to select the Favourite list you want to
remove, then press
.
edit.
1 Press the blue button. 3 Press the blue button.
funkcija
menija
PressUpotreba
G/ g
to selectlist
“Yes”,
then to
press
to confirm.
2 Press the yellow button to4select
the
Favourite
you want
Uputstvo za brzi početak
Remove all channels from the current
Favourite list
edit.
3 Press the blue
Prolaz kroz menije ................................................. 15
Provera pribora ........................................................
4 button.
Press G/g to select “Yes”, then press
to confirm.
Using4the
Programme
Guide (EPG)
*.................. 15
Upotreba
Digital Favourite
liste
1: Pričvrščćivanje postolja .................................
.Digital
..... 4 Electronic
Upotreba 1digitalnog
elektronskog
2: Priključivanje antene/kabla/videa ........................ 5
In digital mode,
press GUIDE. programskog
Using the
Digital........................5
Electronic Programme Guide
* desired operation as shown in
vodiča(EPG)
(EPG)
.................................................
16
3: Sprečavanje prevrtanja
televizora
2 Perform the
theslika/muzike/video
following table or displayedsnimaka
on the
4: Inicijalno postavljanje...........................................6 1 In digital Reprodukcija
mode, press GUIDE.
screen.
Gledanje TV-a ..........................................................6 2 Perform the
putem
USB-a
17
desired
operation.........................................................
as shown in
the following
table or displayed
on the
Odvajanje postolja od TV-a ..................................... 6
Upotreba
BRAVIA
Sync
sa
Control
for
HDMI
.....
20
screen.
Sigurnosne informacije ............................................7
Podešavanje postavki .............................................21
Digital Electronic Programme Guide (EPG)
Mere opreza .............................................................
8
Slika ....................................................................... 21
* This function may not be available
in some countries/regions.
Zvuk .......................................................................22
Do this
Digital Electronic ProgrammeTo
Guide (EPG)
Ekranto ......................................................................24
Watch
a programme
Press F/f/G/g
select the programme, then press .
* This function may not be available
in some
countries/regions.
Upotreba TV-aTo
Turn off theDo
EPG
Press GUIDE.
Podešavanje kanala ................................................26
this
Parental
.........................................................28
Watch a programme
Press F/f/G/g to select the programme,
then press Lock
.
~
Pregled daljinskog upravljača ..................................
9
• If an age restriction for programmes
has been selected, a message asking for a PIN code will appear on the screen. For details,
Turn off the EPG
PressLock”
GUIDE.
Podešavanje ........................................................... 29
see “Parental
on page 28.
Pregled tipki TV-a i indikatora................................ 11
Eko .........................................................................30
~
GUIDE
GUIDE
Fri 16 Mar
11: 30
001
BBC ONE
Homes Under the Hammer
12: 00
002
BBC TWO
Ready Steady Cook
11: 30
BBC ONE
Homes Under the Hammer
002
BBC TWO
Ready Steady Cook
003
ITV1
Dancing On Ice Exclusive
004
Channel 4
005
Five
Dancing On Ice Exclusive
Sign Zone: Ancient Rome: The Rise a...
Five
House
006
ITV2
Crime Hour: Midsomer Murders
Sign Zone: Ancient Rome: The Rise a...
Fri 16 Mar 11:35
House
Crime Hour: Midsomer Murders
BBC Learning Zone: Schools: World P...
007
BBC THREE
BBC Learning Zone: Schools: World P...
008
BBC FOUR
009
ITV3
010
SKY THREE
011
More 4
ITV3
Cracker
P
The Jeremy Kyle...
Law and Order: Special Victims U...
13: 00
Afterlife
010Jeremy
SKYKyle...
THREE
The
13: 00
Afterlife
CSI: Crime Scene Inv...
Cracker
006
12: 30ITV2
More
Law and Order: Special011
Victims
U... 4
12: 30
Neighbours
Extraordinary People: Britains Iden...
007
BBC THREE
Neighbours
009
ITV1
Channel 4
005
ER
12: 00
008 Iden...
BBC FOUR CSI: Crime Scene ER
Extraordinary People: Britains
Inv...
003
004
P
Fri 16 Mar 11:35
Fri 16 Mar
001
Real Crime: The Truth About the...
Everybody Loves Raymond
Homes UnderRacing
th... from Chepstow and Ascot
Homes Under th...
PartyPoker.com Worl...
Vodafone TBA: L...
A Picture of Brit...
Eastenders
This is BBC FOUR
The Sharon Osb...
Baseball Wedne...
Trans World Sport
Carry On Up The Khyber
PartyPoker.com Worl...
Vodafone TBA: L...
A Picture of Brit...
Real Crime: The Truth About the...
Eastenders
This is BBC FOUR
Everybody Loves Raymond
The Sharon Osb...
Racing from Chepstow and Ascot
Baseball Wedne...
Trans World Sport
Carry On Up The Khyber
• If an age restriction for programmes has been selected, a message asking for a PIN code will appear on the screen. For details,
see “Parental Lock” on page 28.
Upotreba dodatne opreme
Dodatne informacije
Spajanje dodatne opreme ....................................... 12
Gledanje slika sa spojene opreme ..........................13
Gledanje PIP (slika u slici)......................................14
Instaliranje pribora
(zidni nosač) .......................................................... 31
Tabela dimenzija za postavljanje TV-a .................. 32
Dijagram/tabela položaja vijaka i kuke ................. 33
Rešavanje problema ............................................... 34
Tehnički podaci ...................................................... 36
16 GB
16 GB
To
Do this
Add or remove channels in the
currently edited Favourite list
1 Press the blue button.
2 Press the yellow button to select the Favourite list you want to
edit.
3 Press F/f/G/g to select the channel you want to add or
remove, then press
Remove all channels from the current
Favourite list
.
1 Press the blue button.
2 Press the yellow button to select the Favourite list you want to
edit.
3 Press the blue button.
4 Press G/g to select “Yes”, then press
to confirm.
Using the Digital Electronic Programme Guide (EPG)
*: samo za digitalne kanale
1 In digital mode, press GUIDE.
Pre upotrebe TV-a, molimo pročitajte “Sigurnosne informacije”2(str.
7). Sačuvajte ovaj priručnik za buduću upotrebu.
Perform the desired operation as shown in
GUIDE
Fri 16 Mar 11:35
Fri 16 Mar
11: 30
001
BBC ONE
Homes Under the Hammer
002
12: 00
Ready Steady Cook
ITV1
Dancing On Ice Exclusive
004
Channel 4
Sign Zone: Ancient Rome: The Rise a...
005
Five
House
006
ITV2
Crime Hour: Midsomer Murders
007
BBC THREE
BBC Learning Zone: Schools: World P...
008
BBC FOUR
009
ITV3
010
SKY THREE
011
More 4
ER
P
12: 30
Neighbours
BBC TWO
003
Extraordinary People: Britains Iden...
Law and Order: Special Victims U...
Everybody Loves Raymond
Racing from Chepstow and Ascot
Homes Under th...
PartyPoker.com Worl...
Vodafone TBA: L...
A Picture of Brit...
Real Crime: The Truth About the...
Carry On Up The Khyber
13: 00
Afterlife
CSI: Crime Scene Inv...
Cracker
The Jeremy Kyle...
Eastenders
This is BBC FOUR
The Sharon Osb...
Baseball Wedne...
Trans World Sport
the following table or displayed on the
screen.
3 SRP
Uputstvo
za brzi početak
Start-up
Guide
Start-up
Guide
Start-up
Guide
Start-up
Guide
1: Pričvršćivanje postolja
Proverathe
pribora
Checking
accessories
1: Attaching the stand
Checking
thethe
accessories
the
stand
accessories
1:the
Attaching
stand
• Attaching
Pogledajte
isporučeni
prospekt
postolja za
Checking
accessories  Refer1:
1:
Attaching
the
stand

to
supplied
stand
leafletthe
for
proper
(1)
i vijci
StandPostolje
(1) andChecking
screws
(7) (7) the
Daljinski
upravljač
RM-ED046
Stand
(1)
and
(7)
Remote
RM-ED046
Stand
(1)(1)
and
screws
(7) (7)(1)
Stand
(1)screws
and
screws
AA
baterija
(tip
R6)
(2)
Remote
RM-ED046
(1)
Size Veličina
AA batteries
(R6
type)
(2)
Remote
RM-ED046
(1) (1)
Remote
RM-ED046
Size
AA
batteries
(R6
type)
(2)
Size Size
AA batteries
(R6 type)
(2) (2)
AA batteries
(R6 type)
Za umetanje
baterija
u daljinski
upravljač
To insert batteries into the remote
To
batteries
into
Toinsert
insert
batteries
intothe
theremote
remote
To insert
batteries
into
the
remote
Push
to
Pritisnite
open
da otvorite

attachmentispravno
for
some
TV
models stand
nekih
TVfor
modela.
Refer
totopričvršćivanje
the
supplied
leaflet
proper
 
Refer
theto
supplied
stand
leaflet
for
proper
 Refer
the supplied
stand
leaflet
for proper
attachment
for
TV
attachment
forsome
some
TVmodels
models
attachment
for
some
TV
models


B KDL-40BX420/KDL-32/26BX320

BB KDL-40BX420/KDL-32/26BX320
B
KDL-40BX420/KDL-32/26BX320
KDL-40BX420/KDL-32/26BX320


 


Push
toto to
PushPush
open
openopen
4 GB
B KDL-22BX320
BB KDL-22BX320
KDL-22BX320
B KDL-22BX320
 

 

TV za postolje prema oznakama
 
 • Pričvrstite



strelica
koje navode otvore za vijke pomoću
 




vijaka.
isporučenih
 

 
 

•
Ovaj
TV
je
veoma težak, pa je potrebno



dvoje
 

više ljudi da bi se TV postavio na
 ili
 




postolje.
 

 

• Ako
koristite
električni odvijač, podesite mo




ment
zatezanja
na oko 1.5 N•m (15 kgf•cm).

• Proverite da li je kabl napajanja udaljen od
otvora za vijke tokom instaliranja postolja
kako se kabl ne bi oštetio.
4 SRP
4 GB
GB
2:2:Priključivanje
antene/
Connecting an
antenna/
kabla/
videa
cable/VCR
Sprečavanje
3:3:Preventing
theprevrtanja
TV from
televizora
toppling over
•Connecting
Spojni kablovi
isporučeni.
cables nisu
are not
supplied.
 •

Priključivanje
antene/kabla
Connecting
an
antenna/cable

Start-up Guide
 

 

 


Antenna
cable
Kabl
anatene
Priključivanje
antene/kabla
i videa
Connecting an
antenna/cable
and VCR
a wood
(4mm
mmu in
diameter,
11 Install
Postavite
drveniscrew
vijak (4
promeru,
nijenot
supplied)nainpostolje
the TVzastand.
isporučen)
televizor.
2 Ugradite mašinski vijak (M4 × 16, nije isporučen)
Install a machine screw (M4 × 16, not
2u otvor
vijka na televizoru.
supplied) into the screw hole of the TV.
Zavežite
drveniscrew
i mašinski
vijakmachine
jakim užetom
the wood
and the
screw
33 Tie
(nije
isporučen).
with
a strong cord (not supplied).
z  
z • 
Možete koristiti i Sony pojas za učvršćivanje

TV-a.
Kontaktirajte najbliži Sony servisni centar

Antenna
cable
Kabl
anatene
kako biste kupili ovu opremu. Imajte spremno ime
modela vašeg TV-a.
AVKabl
cable
AV
Kabl
anatene
Antenna
cable
VCR
5 SRP
GB
5
1: Inicijalno
Attachingpostavljanje
the stand
4:
4: Performing
the initial
Refer to the supplied stand leaflet for proper
attachment for some TV models
set-up
B KDL-40BX420/KDL-32/26BX320
4: Performing the initial
set-up
Gledanje TV
TV-a
Watching
Pritisnite 1 na TV-u da uključite TV.
11 Press
1 on the TV to turn on the TV.
Pritisnite
DIGITAL/ANALOG
zaswitch
promenu
22 Press
DIGITAL/ANALOG
to
Watching
TV
između
digitalnih
modova.
between
digitali analognih
and analogue
modes.
1
1
the TVbuttons
to turnoronPROG
the TV.+/– to
33 Press
Press
theon
number
Pritisnite
brojčane
tipke ili PROG
+/– za odabir
select
a TV channel.
2TVPress
DIGITAL/ANALOG
to switch
kanala.
analogue
modes.
Pritisnite
2+/–
+/– to
daand
podesite
44 between
Press
2digital
adjust
theglasnoću.
volume.
3 Press the number buttons or PROG +/– to
select a TV channel.
select a TV channel.
Detaching
the stand from the
4Odvajanje
Press 2 +/– topostolja
adjust the volume.
od TV-a
TV
* The shapes of AC power plug and AC power outlet
* Oblici utikača naizmenične struje i utičnice se
differ depending on the region.
razlikuju
zavisnosti
od regiona.
**When uthe
TV is in standby
mode (the 1 (standby)
**Kada
je TV
pripravnom
stanju
(indikator
1 on
indicator
on uthe
TV front panel
is red),
press "/1
(standby)
na prednjoj
strani
TV-a
svetli
crveno),
the
remote
to
turn
on
the
TV.
** The
shapes
of
AC
power
plug
and
AC
power
outlet
The shapes of AC power plug and AC power outlet
pritisnite
“/1 na daljinskom
upravljaču da uključite
differ
differ depending
depending on
on the
the region.
region.
3
TV.
**When
the
TV
is
in
standby
**When the TV is in standby mode
mode (the
(the 1
1 (standby)
(standby)
B KDL-22BX320
indicator
indicator on
on the
the TV
TV front
front panel
panel is
is red),
red), press
press "/1
"/1 on
on
the
the remote
remote to
to turn
turn on
on the
the TV.
TV.
Doskidajte
not remove
the stand
forkog
any razloga
reason other
•• Ne
postolje
ni iz
osimthan
akoto
TV. stand from the
Detaching
ćete wall-mount
postavljati the
TVthe
na zid.
B KDL-40BX420/KDL-32/26BX320
TV
•• Do
Do not
not remove
remove the
the stand
stand for
for any
any reason
reason other
other than
than to
to
wall-mount
wall-mount the
the TV.
TV.
B
B KDL-40BX420/KDL-32/26BX320
KDL-40BX420/KDL-32/26BX320
3
Follow the instructions on the screen.
“Programme Sorting”: If you want to
change the order of analogue channels,
Follow
theuputstvo
instructions
on the screen.
Sledite
na ekranu.
follow
the
steps
in “Programme
Sorting”
(page 26).
“Programme
Sorting”:
If da
you
want to
“Redosled
programa”:
Ako želite
promenite
Press HOME
to exit.
change
the order
of sledite
analogue
channels,
redosled
analognih
kanala,
korake
u “Redos• You can(str.
tune channels manually (page 26).
led programa”
26).
follow
thealso
steps
in “Programme Sorting”
(page
26).
Pritisnite
HOME
za izlaz.
Press
HOME
to exit.
 
• Takođe možete podešavati kanale ručno
•• You
can
also

You
can26).
also tune
tune channels
channels manually
manually (page
(page 26).
26).
(str.

 

 

 


6 SRP
6 GB
B KDL-22BX320
B
B KDL-22BX320
KDL-22BX320
Sigurnosne
informacije
Safety
information
Safetyinformation
information
Safety
Instalacija/postavljanje
Safety
information
Postavite i koristite TV prijemnik u
Installation/Set-up
skladu
sa instrukcijama datim ispod kako
Installation/Set-up
Installation/Set-up
Installation/Set-up
biste
izbegli
rizik
odTVpožara,
električnogwith
Safety
information
Install
and
use
the
set
accordance
Installand
anduse
usethe
theTV
TVset
setinin
inaccordance
accordancewith
with
Install
the
instructions
below
in
order
avoid
any
udara
ili štete
i/ili
povreda.
Install
and
use the
TV
setinin
accordance
with
theinstructions
instructions
below
inorder
ordertoto
toavoid
avoid
any
the
below
any
risk
of
fire,
electrical
or
and/or
the
instructions
below shock
inshock
order
todamage
avoidand/or
any
risk
of
fire,
electrical
shock
or
damage
and/or
risk
of
fire,
electrical
or
damage
Instalacija
Installation/Set-up
injuries.
risk
of fire, electrical shock or damage and/or
injuries.
injuries.
•Install
TV prijemnik
treba
blizu lako
injuries.
and use the
TV postaviti
set in accordance
with
Installation
dostupne
utičnice.
the
instructions
below in order to avoid any
Installation
Installation
Installation
•
The
TV
set
should
be
installed
near
an
of
fire,
electrical
shock
or damage
and/or
•risk
prijemnik
na
stabilnu,
• The
The
TVTV
setshould
should
installed
near
•Postavite
TV
set
bebeinstalled
near
anan
easily
accessible
AC
power
•ravnu
The
TV accessible
set
should
be
near
an
injuries.
površinu
kakoAC
neinstalled
bi
paooutlet.
ioutlet.
izazvao
easily
accessible
AC
power
outlet.
easily
power
• Place
the
TV
set
on
a stable,
level
surface
accessible
AC
outlet.
Place
theTV
TV
set
onpower
stable,
levelsurface
surface
• •easily
Place
the
on
a astable,
level
ličnu
povredu
iliset
se
oštetio.
to
avoid
it
from
falling
down
and
cause
• Installation
Place
the TV
set
on
a stable,
level
surface
to
avoid
it
from
falling
down
and
cause
to
avoid
it
from
falling
down
and
cause
• Samo
kvalifikovano
servisnotoosoblje
personal
injury
or
damage
the
TV.
avoid
from
falling
down
cause
• topersonal
The
TVitset
should
be
installed
near
an
personal
injury
damage
tothe
the
TV.
injury
orordamage
toand
TV.
treba
da izvodi
zid.
••personal
Only
qualified
service
personnel
should
injurypostavljanje
orservice
damage
tonathe
TV.
easily
accessible
AC power
outlet.
Only
qualified
service
personnel
should
•Zbog
Only
qualified
personnel
should
•
sigurnosnih
razloga,
preporučuje
carry
out
wall
installations.
• • Only
qualified
service
should
Place
the
set
on a personnel
stable, level
surface
carry
outTV
wall
installations.
carry
out
wall
installations.
se ••carry
daFor
koristite
Sony
pribor,
uključujući:
safety
reasons,
it is strongly
out
wall
installations.
avoid
it reasons,
from
falling
and cause
For
safety
reasons,
strongly
• to
For
safety
ititisisdown
strongly
recommended
that
you
use
Sony
•– For
safety reasons,
itdamage
isyou
strongly
KDL-40BX420/32BX320:
personal
injurythat
or
to
the TV.
recommended
that
use
Sony
recommended
you
use
Sony
accessories,
including:
that
you use
Sony should
• recommended
Only
qualified
service
personnel
Zidni
nosač
SU-WL50B
accessories,
including:
accessories,
including:
–
KDL-40BX420/32BX320:
including:
carry
out wall
installations.
– accessories,
KDL-26BX320/22BX320:
KDL-40BX420/32BX320:
– – KDL-40BX420/32BX320:
Wall-mount
bracket
SU-WL50B
KDL-40BX420/32BX320:
• – For
safety
reasons,
it is SU-WL50B
strongly
Wall-mount
bracket
SU-WL50B
Wall-mount
bracket
Zidni
nosač
SU-WL100
–
KDL-26BX320/22BX320:
Wall-mount
bracket
SU-WL50B
recommended
that
you
use
Sony
–
KDL-26BX320/22BX320:
–
KDL-26BX320/22BX320:
• Obavezno
koristitebracket
vijke isporučene
Wall-mount
SU-WL100
– accessories,
KDL-26BX320/22BX320:
including:
Wall-mount
bracket
SU-WL100
Wall-mount
bracket
SU-WL100
sa •zidnim
nosačem
kada
postavljate
Be
sure
to
use
the
screws
supplied
with
Wall-mount
bracket
SU-WL100
KDL-40BX420/32BX320:
Be
suretotouse
use
thescrews
screws
suppliedwith
with
• • –Be
sure
the
supplied
kuke
TV
prijemnik.
the
Wall-mount
bracket
when
attaching
•montažne
Bethe
sure
to
use na
thebracket
screws
supplied
with
Wall-mount
SU-WL50B
the
Wall-mount
bracket
whenattaching
attaching
Wall-mount
bracket
when
Isporučeni
vijci
su
napravljeni
kako
je
the
mounting
hooks
to
the
TV
set.
The
the
Wall-mount
bracket
attaching
– the
KDL-26BX320/22BX320:
mountinghooks
hookstotowhen
theTV
TV
set.The
The
the
mounting
the
set.
supplied
screws
are
designed
as
indicated
the
mounting
hooks
todesigned
theSU-WL100
TV
The
prikazano
ilustracijom
kada
se set.
meri
od
Wall-mount
bracket
supplied
screws
are
designed
asindicated
indicated
supplied
screws
are
as
by
illustration
when
measured
from
the
screws
are
designed
as indicated
• supplied
Be
sure
to usemontažne
the
screws
supplied
with
spojne
površine
kuke.
Prečnik
byillustration
illustration
when
measured
from
the
by
when
measured
from
the
attaching
surface
of
the
mounting
hook.
bythe
illustration
when
from
the
Wall-mount
bracket
when
attaching
i dužina
vijaka
razlikuju
semounting
u zavisnosti
attaching
surface
ofthe
the
mounting
hook.
attaching
surface
ofmeasured
hook.
The
diameter
and
length
of
the
screws
surface
oflength
the
hook.
the
mounting
hooks
tomounting
theofof
TV
set.
The
The
diameter
and
length
the
screws
The
diameter
and
the
screws
odattaching
modela
zidnog
nosača.
differ
depending
on
the
Wall-mount
The
diameter
and are
length
of
the as
screws
supplied
screws
designed
indicated
differ
depending
the
Wall-mount
differ
depending
the
Wall-mount
Upotreba
vijaka
kojionon
nisu
isporučeni
bracket
model.
differ
depending
on themeasured
Wall-mount
by
illustration
when
from the
bracket
model.
bracket
model.
može
rezultirati
unutrašnjim
oštećenjem
Use
screws
other
than
those
supplied
bracket
model.
attaching
surface
of the
mounting
hook.
Useofof
of
screws
other
than
thosesupplied
supplied
Use
screws
other
than
those
TVUse
prijemnika
ili
izazvati
njegov
pad,
may
result
in
internal
damage
to
the
TV
ofdiameter
screws
other
thandamage
those
The
and
length
of thesupplied
may
resultinin
internal
damage
tothe
theTV
TV
may
result
internal
toscrews
i sl.
set
or
cause
it
to
fall,
etc.
may
in internal
damage
to the TV
differ
depending
on
the
Wall-mount
setresult
cause
fall,
etc.
set
ororcause
itittotofall,
etc.
set
or ~
cause
it to6.5
fall,~etc.
bracket
model.
Min.
26
TV:
10mm
Min.
~ ~26
TV:
6.56.5
~ 10mm
Min.
~
26
TV:
6.5
10mm
Min.
26
TV:
~~10mm
Use
of
screws
than
those supplied
32
~
Max.:
8
~
12mm
Min.
~TV
26
TV:
6.58other
~
10mm
32
TV
~
Max.:
8
~
12mm
TV
~
Max.:
~
12mm
3232
TV
~
Max.:
8
~
12mm
may~ result
damage to the TV
32 TV
Max.:in8internal
~ 12mm
set or cause it to fall, etc.
Min. ~ 26 TV:Screw
6.5 ~ 10mm
Screw
(supplied with
with the
the
(supplied
Screw (supplied
with the
Vijak
(isporučen
sa
32 TV ~ Max.:
8 ~(supplied
12mm bracket)
Wall-mount
Screw
with the
Wall-mount
bracket)
Wall-mount
bracket)
nosačem
za
zid)
Wall-mount
bracket)
Mounting
Hook
Mounting
Hook
Montažna kuka
Mounting
Hook
Mounting
Hook
Hook
attachment
on
rear
Učvršćenje
kuke
na zadnHookattachment
attachment
onrear
rearofof
of
Hook
on
Screw
(supplied
with
the
TV
set
joj strani
Hook
attachment
on
rear
of
TV
set TV prijemnika
TV
set
Wall-mount
bracket)
TV set
Prenošenje
Mounting Hook
Transporting
•Transporting
Pre
prenošenja TV prijemnika,
Transporting
Hook attachment
on rear of
Transporting
•• Before
transporting
odspojite
sve
kablove.
Before transporting the
the TV
TV set,
set,
• Before transporting
the TV set,
TV
disconnect
allset
cables.
•• Potrebno
Before
transporting
the TV
set, za
je dve
ili
više
osoba
disconnect
cables.
disconnect
allallcables.
••disconnect
Two
or
more
people
are
needed
all
cables.
Twoorormore
morepeople
people
areneeded
neededtoto
to
prenošenje
velikog
TV are
prijemnika.
• Two
transport
apeople
large
TV
set.
• Transporting
Two
or more
are
needed to
transport
largeTV
TV
set.
transport
a alarge
set.
• Kod
nošenja
držite
TV
prijemnik
kao
When
transporting
the
TV
set
by
hand,
a
large
TV
set.
•• ••transport
Before
transporting
the
TV
set,
When
transporting
the
TVset
setLCD
hand,
When
transporting
the
TV
bybyhand,
je
prikazano
ispod.
Zaštitite
hold
it
as
shown
below.
Do
not
put
stress
•štoWhen
transporting
the
TV
set
by
hand,
disconnect
all
cables.
hold
itasasshown
shownbelow.
below.Do
Donot
notput
putstress
stress
hold
itudaraca.
ekran
od
on
the
LCD
panel.
it
as
shown
below.
Do
not
put
stress
• hold
Two
or
more
people
are
needed
to
theLCD
LCDpanel.
panel.
ononthe
ontransport
the LCDa panel.
large TV set.
• When transporting the TV set by hand,
hold it as shown below. Do not put stress
on the LCD panel.
KDL-26BX320/
KDL-26BX320/
KDL-26BX320/
KDL-22BX320
KDL-26BX320/
KDL-22BX320
KDL-22BX320
KDL-22BX320
KDL-26BX320/
KDL-22BX320
KDL-40BX420/
KDL-40BX420/
KDL-40BX420/
KDL-32BX320
KDL-40BX420/
KDL-32BX320
KDL-32BX320
KDL-32BX320
KDL-40BX420/
KDL-32BX320
• Prilikom podizanja ili pomeranja TV
prijemnika, držite ga čvrsto sa donje
••strane.
When
lifting
or moving
the
TV
set,
hold
Whenlifting
lifting
moving
the
TVset,
set,hold
holditit
it
• Prilikom
When
orormoving
the
TV
prenošenja
TV
prijemnika,
firmly
from
the
bottom.
• •When
lifting
orthe
moving
the
TV
set, hold it
firmly
from
the
bottom.
firmly
from
bottom.
ga
od
udaraca
i
vibracija.
••zaštitite
When
transporting
the
TV
set,
do
not
firmly
from
the
bottom.
Whentransporting
transportingthe
theTV
TVset,
set,dodonot
not
• When
subject
itprenošenja
to
jolts
or
excessive
vibration.
Prilikom
TVset,
prijemnika
• •When
transporting
the
TV
do
not na
subject
tojolts
joltsor
orexcessive
excessive
vibration.
subject
ititto
vibration.
When
transporting
the
TV
set
for
repairs
subject
it
to
jolts
or
excessive
vibration.
•• ••popravak
When
lifting
or
moving
the
TV
set,
hold
it
ili
kod
preseljenja,
zapakujte
Whentransporting
transportingthe
theTV
TVset
setfor
forrepairs
repairs
When
or
when
moving,
pack
it set
using
the
original
• ga
When
transporting
the
TV
for
repairs
firmly
from
theambalažu.
bottom.
uwhen
originalnu
when
moving,
pack
using
the
original
oror
moving,
pack
ititusing
the
original
carton
and
packing
when
moving,
packthe
itmaterial.
using
thedo
original
• orWhen
TV set,
not
cartontransporting
andpacking
packing
material.
carton
and
material.
carton
andit packing
material.
Ventilacija
subject
to jolts or
excessive vibration.
Ventilation
• Ventilation
When transporting
the TV setventilacione
for repairs
Ventilation
• Nikada
nemojte prekrivati
Ventilation
• orNever
cover
the
ventilation
holes
or
insert
when
moving,
pack
it using
the
original
Never
cover
theventilation
ventilation
holes
orinsert
insert
icover
ne
stavljajte
nikakve
predmete
• •otvore
Never
the
holes
or
anything
the
cabinet.
• Never
cover
the
ventilation
holes or insert
carton
andinin
packing
material.
anything
in
the
cabinet.
anything
the
cabinet.
unutra.
••anything
Leave
space
around
the
TV
set
as
shown
in
the
cabinet.
Leavespace
spacearound
around
theTV
TVset
setasTV
asshown
shown
• • Ostavite
Leave
the
prostor
below.
• Ventilation
Leave
spaceslobodan
around the
TV setoko
as shown
below.
below.
kao
što
je prikazano
ispod.
It
is
strongly
recommended
that
you
use
below.
•• ••prijemnika
Never
cover
the
ventilation
holes
or
insert
stronglyrecommended
recommendedthat
thatyou
youuse
usea aa
ItItisisstrongly
secabinet.
da bracket
koristite
Sony
zidni
wall-mount
in
order
to
• •It Preporučuje
isSony
strongly
that
you to
use
anything
inrecommended
the
Sony
wall-mount
bracketin
inorder
order
to a
Sony
wall-mount
bracket
provide
adequate
air-circulation.
kako
biaround
se bracket
obezbedila
adekvatna
Sony
wall-mount
in order
• nosač
Leave
space
the TV
set
astoshown
provide
adequate
air-circulation.
provide
adequate
air-circulation.
provide
air-circulation.
cirkulacija
vazduha.
below.adequate
Installed
on
the
wall
• It
is strongly recommended
that you use a
Installed
onzid
thewall
wall
Installed
on
the
Postavljanje
Installed
onnathe
wall
30
cm
Sony wall-mount
bracket
order to
30in
cm
30
cm
provide adequate air-circulation.
30 cm
10 cm
cm
10 cm
cm
10
10
10
cm
10
cm
Installed
on the wall
10 cm
10 cm
30 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
cm
10
10
cm
Leave
least
this
space
cm around
Leaveatat
atleast
leastthis
this10
space
around
Leave
space
around
Ostavite
ovoliko
prostora
oko prijemthe
set.
Leave
atbar
least
this space
around
theset.
set.
the
nika.
the set.
Installed
with
stand
10
cm
Installedwith
withstand
stand
Installed
Installed
with
Leave at least
thisstand
space around
Instalacija
sa
postoljem
the set.
30
cm
30cm
cm
30
30 cm
10
cm
Installed
with
stand
cm
10
cm
10cm
cm
6cm
cm
10cm
cm 66
10
10
10 cm
6 cm
10 cm
30 cm
10 cm
6 cm
10 cm
Leave
at
least
this
space
around
the
Leaveat
atleast
least
thisprostora
spacearound
around
the
Leave
this
space
the
Ostavite
bar
ovoliko
oko prijemset.
Leave
set. at least this space around the
set.
nika.
•set.To
ensure
proper
ventilation
and
prevent
Toensure
ensureproper
proper
ventilation
andprevent
prevent
• • To
ventilation
and
ispravnu
ventilaciju
i sprečavanje
the
collection
of
dirt
dust:
• •ToZa
ensure
proper
ventilation
and prevent
the
collection
dirtoror
ordust:
dust:
the
collection
ofof
dirt
nakupljanja
prašine
i space
prljavštine:
Leave
at
least
thisTV
around
the
––collection
Do
not
lay
the
set
flat,
install
the
of
dirt
or
dust:
Donot
notlay
laythe
theTV
TVset
setflat,
flat,install
install
– Do
upside
down,
backwards,
or sideways.
–– set.
Ne
postavljajte
uređaj
površinom
Do
not lay
the TV
set flat,
install
upside
down,
backwards,
sideways.
upside
down,
backwards,
ororsideways.
– ensure
Do
not
place
the
TV
set
on
aane
shelf,
rug,
down,
backwards,
or
okrenut
prema
podlozi,
insta• ekrana
To
proper
ventilation
and
prevent
Do
not
place
the
TV
seton
on
shelf,
rug,
– –upside
Do
not
place
the
TV
set
asideways.
shelf,
rug,
bed
or
closet.
– the
Do
not
place
the
TV
on a shelf,
collection
dirt
dust:
lirajte
gaornaopako,
naorset
zadnju
stranurug,
ili
bed
orinin
ina aaof
closet.
bed
closet.
–
Do
not
cover
the
TV
set
with
a
cloth,
bed
or
in
a
closet.
–
Do
not
lay
the
TV
set
flat,
install
Do
notcover
coverthe
theTV
TVset
setwith
witha acloth,
cloth,
bočnu
stranu.
– – Do
not
such
as
curtains,
orsetitems
as
Do
notas
cover
thebackwards,
TV
with
asideways.
cloth,
upside
down,
orsuch
such
as
curtains,
items
such
such
curtains,
oror
items
such
asas
–– Ne
stavljajte
uređaj
na
policu,
tepih,
newspapers,
etc.
as
curtains,
or
items
such
as
– such
Do
not
place
the
TV
set
on
a
shelf,
rug,
newspapers,
etc.
newspapers,
etc.
krevet
ili not
u vitrinu.
––newspapers,
Do
install
the
TV
set
shown
etc.the
bed
ornot
in
a closet.
Donot
install
thepokrivačima
TVset
setasas
asshown
shown
Do
install
TV
–– ––Ne
prekrivajte
TV
poput
below.
Do
not
shown
Do
notinstall
coverthe
theTV
TVset
setaswith
a cloth,
below.
below.
zavesa
iliasnovina
i sl.or items such as
below.
such
curtains,
Air
circulation
is
blocked.
– Nenewspapers,
postavljajte
TV
prijemnik
Aircirculation
circulation
blocked.kao što je
Air
isis
blocked.
etc.
Air circulation is blocked.
prikazano
– Do notispod.
install the TV set as shown
below.
Protok
je blokiran.
Airvazduha
circulation
is blocked.
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Kabl napajanja
S kablom i strujnom utičnicom postupajte
kaopower
što je opisano,
kako biste sprečili
AC
cord
AC
power
cord
AC
power
cord
opasnost
odcord
požara,
električnog
udara
AC
power
Handle
the AC
AC
power cord
cord
and outlet
outlet
as ili
Handle
the
power
and
Handle the AC power cord and
outlet asas
štete
povreda:
follows
in
order
to avoid
avoid
anyoutlet
risk of
of fire,
fire,
Handle
theini/ili
AC
power
cordany
and
follows
in
order
any
risk
follows
order
totoavoid
risk
ofjeas
fire,
– Oblik
strujne
utičnice,
koja
ispoelectrical
shock
or damage
damage
and/or
injuries:
follows
in
order
anyand/or
risk
ofinjuries:
fire,
electrical
shock
or
and/or
injuries:
electrical shocktooravoid
damage
ručena
sa
TV
prijemnikom,
razlikuje
– The
The
shapeor
ofdamage
AC power
power plug,
plug, which
which isse
AC
power
cord
electrical
shock
shape
AC
– – The
shape
ofofAC
powerand/or
plug, injuries:
which isis
supplied
with
the
TV
set,
varies
usupplied
zavisnosti
odthe
regije.
Obavezno
spojite
– Handle
The
shape
of
AC
power
plug,
which
is
the
AC
power
cord
and
outlet
with
TV
set,
varies
supplied with the TV set, varies as
depending
on
the
regions.
Be of
sure
to
odgovarajući
isporučeni
mrežni
kabl
supplied
the
TV
set,any
varies
follows
in with
order
to
avoid
risk
fire,
depending
the
regions.
Be
sure
depending
onon
the
regions.
Be
sure
toto sa
connect
the
appropriate
supplied
AC
depending
on
the
regions.supplied
Be
sureinjuries:
to
utikačem
koji
odgovara
struj-noj
utičnici.
electrical
shock
or
damage
and/or
connect
the
appropriate
supplied
AC
connect
the
appropriate
AC
power
cord
with
the plug
plug
thatwhich
fits
into
the
the
appropriate
supplied
AC
– connect
The
shape
ofwith
ACthe
power
plug,
isthe
–power
Koristite
isključivo
isporučene
Sony
cord
with
the
that
fits
into
the
power
cord
plug
that
fits
into
AC cord
power
outlet.
power
with
theTV
plug
that
fits into
the
supplied
with
the
set,
varies
kablove
napajanja,
ne
kablove
drugih
AC
power
outlet.
AC
power
outlet.
– depending
Use
onlyoutlet.
Sony
supplied
AC
power
cords,
power
on the
regions.
Bepower
sure to
proizvođača.
–
Use
only
Sony
supplied
AC
power
cords,
– AC
Use
only
Sony
supplied
AC
cords,
not
those
of supplied
other brands.
brands.
– Use
only
Sony
power
cords,
connect
the
supplied
AC
those
other
not
those
ofofappropriate
other
brands.
–not
Umetnite
utikač
doAC
kraja
u utičnicu.
Insert
the
plug
fully
into
the
ACfits
power
outlet.
those
ofplug
other
brands.
power
cord
with
the
plug
that
into
the
–– Insert
the
plug
fully
into
the
AC
power
outlet.
– not
fully
into
the
AC
outlet.
–Insert
TVthe
koristite
napower
napajanju
– AC
Operate
the
TVisključivo
set the
on a 110-240
110-240
V AC
AC
– – Insert
the plug
fully
into
powerVoutlet.
power
outlet.
–
Operate
the
TV
set
V
Operate
the
TV
set
onona aAC
110-240
AC
110-240
V.
supply
only.
– – Operate
the
TV set
on a 110-240
V AC
Use
only
Sony
supplied
AC power
cords,
only.
supply
only.
–supply
Prilikom
povezivanja
kablova,
oba-the
– not
When
wiring
cables,
be sure
sure
to unplug
unplug
only.
those
of other
brands.
–
When
wiring
cables,
the
– supply
When
wiring
cables,
bebe
sure totounplug
the
vezno
odspojite
kabl
napajanja
i
pazite
ACwiring
power
cord
for
your
safety
andoutlet.
take da
– – When
cables,
be
sure
to
unplug
the
Insert
the
plug
fully
into
the
AC
power
AC
power
cord
for
your
safety
and
take
AC
power
cord
for your
safety and
take
nogom
ne
zapnete
i
povučete
kabl.
care
notthe
to TV
catch
your
feet
on the
thetake
cables.
power
forset
your
– AC
Operate
on feet
asafety
110-240
AC
care
not
to
catch
your
feet
cables.
care
not
tocord
catch
your
ononand
the V
cables.
–Disconnect
Odspojite
kabl
napajanja
precables.
preme– supply
Disconnect
the
AC
power
cord
from
the
not
to
catch
your
feet
oncord
the
only.
–
the
AC
power
cord
from
the
– care
Disconnect
the
AC
power
from
the
AC power
power
outlet
before
working
on
or
štanja
ili rada
nabefore
TV-u.
– – Disconnect
the
AC
power
cord
the
When
wiring
cables,
be sure
tofrom
unplug
the
AC
outlet
before
working
AC
power
outlet
working
onon
oror
moving
the
TVnapajanja
set.your
AC
power
outlet
before
working
on
–moving
Držite
kabl
dalje and
od or
izvo-ra
AC
power
cord
for
safety
take
the
TV
set.
moving
the
TV
set.
– care
Keep
the
AC
power
cord
away
from
heat
the
TV
set.
not
toAC
catch
your
feetaway
on
the
cables.
toplote.
–
Keep
the
AC
power
cord
away
from
heat
– moving
Keep
the
power
cord
from
heat
sources.
– – Keep
the AC the
power
heat
Disconnect
ACcord
power
cordfrom
from
the
–sources.
Redovno
odspojite
iaway
očistite
utikač
sources.
– AC
Unplug
the
AC power
power
plug
and
clean
it
power
outlet
before
working
on or
napajanja.
Utikač
pokriven
prašinom
–
Unplug
the
AC
plug
and
clean
– sources.
Unplug
the
AC
power
plug
and
clean
ititmože
regularly.
If the
the
plugplug
is covered
covered
with
dust
– Unplug
thethe
AC
power
and
clean
itdust
moving
set.
regularly.
plug
is
with
dust
nakupiti
vlagu
zbog
može
doći
do
regularly.
IfIfTV
the
plug
isčega
covered
with
and it
itthe
picks
up
moisture,
its
insulation
may
IfAC
the
plug
iscord
with
dust
– regularly.
Keep
power
away
from
heat
and
picks
moisture,
may
and
it picks
upup
moisture,
itsits
insulation
may
oštećenja
izolacije,
acovered
time
iinsulation
do
opasnosti
deteriorate,
which could
could
result in
in amay
fire.
and
it picks upwhich
moisture,
itsresult
insulation
sources.
deteriorate,
result
fire.
deteriorate,
in a afire.
od
požara. whichcould
could plug
resultand
in aclean
fire. it
– deteriorate,
Unplug thewhich
AC power
Notes
Napomene
regularly.
If the plug is covered with dust
Notes
Notes
Notes
• •Do
Doitnot
not
useup
themoisture,
suppliedits
AC
power
cord
on
koristite
isporučeni
kabl
napaja-nja
insulation
may
use
the
supplied
AC
power
cord
• • and
DoNe
notpicks
use
the
supplied
AC
power
cord
onon
any
other
equipment.
• Do
notdrugoj
use
the
supplied
ACresult
power
on
deteriorate,
which
could
incord
a fire.
na
opremi.
any
other
equipment.
any
other
equipment.
Do
not equipment.
pinch,
bend, or
or savijati
twist the
theili
AC
power
other
•Do
Nemojte
prelamati,
uvrtati
•• Do
not
pinch,
bend,
twist
AC
power
• any
not
pinch,
bend,
or twist
the AC
power
cord
excessively.
The
core
conductors
• Notes
Do
notexcessively.
pinch,
bend,
or
twist
the
AC
power oko
kabl.
Može
doći The
do
oštećenja
izolacije
cord
excessively.
The
core
conductors
cord
core
conductors
may
be
exposed
or core
broken.
excessively.
The
conductors
• cord
Do
not
use
theilisupplied
AC
power cord on
may
exposed
broken.
provodnika
prekida
provodnika.
may
bebe
exposed
ororbroken.
Dobe
not
modify
the
AC power
power cord.
cord.
exposed
or
broken.
other
equipment.
•• any
not
modify
the
AC
• may
Do
not
modify
the
AC
power cord.
•Do
Nemojte
praviti
prepravke
na kablu
Do
not
put anything
anything
heavy
onAC
thepower
AC
• •• Do
not
modify
the
ACorheavy
power
cord.
not
pinch,
bend,
twist on
the
•• Do
Do
not
put
heavy
on
the
AC
Do
not
put
anything
the
AC
napajanja.
power
cord.
• Do
notexcessively.
put
anythingThe
heavy
the AC
cord
coreonconductors
power
cord.
power
cord.
•
Nemojte
stavljati
teške
predmete
na kabl
Do be
not
pull on
on the
the
AC power
power cord
cord itself
itself
cord.
exposed
orAC
broken.
•• may
Do
not
pull
AC
• power
Do
not
pull
on the
power cord
itself
napajanja.
when
disconnecting
the
ACcord
power
cord.
• • Do
not
pull
on
the
AC
power
itself
Do
not
modify
the
AC
power
cord.
when
disconnecting
the
AC
power
cord.
when
disconnecting
theuhvatite
AC power
cord.
•Do
Ne
vucite
kabl,
već
not
connect
too
many
appliances
to
disconnecting
the
ACappliances
power
cord.
•• when
put
anything
heavy
on
theutikač
ACtoto
•• Do
Donot
not
connect
too
many
appliances
Do
not
connect
too
many
prilikom
odspajanja
iz appliances
utičnice. to
the
same
ACtoo
power
outlet.
• Do
not
connect
many
power
cord.
the
same
AC
power
outlet.
the same AC power outlet.
Do
not
usepower
poor
fitting
AC cord
power
outlet.
•Do
Ne
spajajte
previše
uređaja
na istu
same
AC
outlet.
•• the
not
pull
thefitting
AC
power
itself
•• Do
not
use
aapoor
poor
fitting
AC
power
outlet.
Do
not
use
aon
AC
power
outlet.
utičnicu.
• Do
not use
a poor fitting
when
disconnecting
theAC
ACpower
poweroutlet.
cord.
• Ne
strujne
utičnice.
• Prohibited
Do
notkoristite
connect labave
too
many
appliances
to
Usage
Prohibited
Usage
Prohibited
Usage
the
same AC power
outlet.
Prohibited
Usage
Zabranjena
upotreba
Do
not
install/use
the
TV
set
in
locations,
Do
not
install/use
the
TVset
set
locations,
•Do
Do
not
use a poor
fitting
AC
outlet.
not
install/use
the
TV
ininpower
locations,
Neinstall/use
instalirajte/ne
koristite
TVasprijem-nik
environments
or situations
those
Do
not
TV
set such
insuch
locations,
environments
situations
such
those
environments
ororthe
situations
asasthose
listed
below,
or
the
TV
set
may
malfunction
na
mestima,
u
okruženjima
ili
okolnostima
environments
or
situations
such
as
those
listedbelow,
below,ororthe
theTV
TVset
setmay
maymalfunction
malfunction
listed
Prohibited
Usage
and
cause
aa fire,
electrical
shock,
damage
poput
opisanih,
biste
sprečili
listed
below,
the
TV
set kako
may
malfunction
and
causedole
fire,
electrical
shock,
damage
and
cause
a or
fire,
electrical
shock,
damage
and/or
injuries.
and
cause
a
fire,
electrical
shock,
damage
nepravilnosti
u
radu
TV
prijemnika,
Do
not injuries.
install/use
and/or
injuries. the TV set in locations,požar,
and/or
and/or
injuries. udar,
environments
or situations
such
as those
električni
štetu i/ili
povrede.
Location:
listed
below,: or the TV set may malfunction
Location:
Location:
Mesta
Location:
• cause
Outdoors
(in
direct
sunlight),
at
the
and
a fire,
electrical
shock,
(indirect
direct
sunlight),
atthe
the
• • Outdoors
(in
sunlight),
•Outdoors
Na otvorenim
mestima
(naatdamage
direktnom
seashore,
on
a ship
or
other
inside
• and/or
Outdoors
(in
direct
sunlight),
atvessel,
the inside
injuries.
seashore,
ship
orother
other
vessel,
seashore,
onon
a aship
or
vessel,
uticaju
sunca),
na
obali,
na
brodu
iinside
ostalim
aa vehicle,
in
medical
institutions,
unstable
seashore,
on
a
ship
or
other
vessel,
inside
vehicle,inin
medical
institutions,
unstable
aplovilima,
vehicle,
medical
institutions,
unstable
u
vozilima,
u
me-dicinskim
Location:
locations,
near
water,
rain,
moisture
a vehicle,
in
medical
institutions,
unstable
locations,near
near
water,
rain,izloženim
moistureoror
or
locations,
water,
rain,
moisture
ustanovama,
na
mestima
smoke.
near
water,
rain, moisture
• locations,
Outdoors
(in direct
sunlight),
at theor
smoke.
smoke.
mehaničkim
vibracijama,
blizu
vode,
kiše,
•• seashore,
If
the
TV
is
placed
in
the
changing
room
smoke.
aplaced
ship or
other
vessel, inside
theTV
TVon
thechanging
changing
room
• IfIfthe
isisplaced
ininthe
room
vlage
iliisdima.
of
aTV
public
bath
hot
spring,
the
TV
may
• Ifaof
the
in
the
changing
room
vehicle,
inplaced
medical
institutions,
of
public
bathoror
or
hot
spring,
theunstable
TVmay
may
a apublic
bath
hot
spring,
the
TV
damaged
airborne
sulfur,
etc.
•abe
Ako
jebath
TV by
smešten
u svlačionicu
oflocations,
or
hot
spring,
the TV
may
near
water,
rain,
moisture
orjavnog
bepublic
damaged
airborne
sulfur,
etc.
be
damaged
byby
airborne
sulfur,
etc.
kupatila
izvora,
TVetc.
može biti
besmoke.
damagedilibyvrućeg
airborne
sulfur,
vazduha,
itd.room
• Environment:
Ifoštećen
the TVsumporom
is placed inizthe
changing
Environment:
Environment:
Environment:
• Okruženje
Places
that
are
hot,
humid,
or excessively
a public
or
hot
spring,
TV may
Places
thatbath
are:hot,
hot,
humid,
excessively
• • of
Places
that
are
humid,
ororthe
excessively
where
insects
may
enter;
where
it
• Places
that
are
hot,
humid,
or
excessively
be
damaged
by
airborne
sulfur,
etc.
dusty;
where
insects
may
enter;
where
•dusty;
Mesta
koja
su
vrela,
vlažna
ili
veoma
dusty;
where
insects
may
enter;
where
itit
might
be exposed
to
mechanical
dusty;
where
insects
enter; where
it
might
exposed
to
mechanical
might
bebegde
exposed
mechanical
prljava;
mogutomay
ući
insekti;
gde može
Environment:
vibration,
near
flammable
objects
might
be exposed
to mechanical
vibration,
near
flammable
objects
vibration,
near
flammable
objects
biti
izložen
mehaničkim
vibracijama,
(candles,
etc).
The
TV
set
not
be
near
objects
• vibration,
Places
that
areflammable
hot,
humid,
orshall
excessively
(candles,
etc).
The
TVset
set
shall
notitd).
(candles,
etc).
The
TV
shall
not
bebe TV
blizu
zapaljivih
predmeta
(sveća,
exposed
to
dripping
or
splashing
and
no
(candles,
etc).
The
TV
set
shall
not
be
dusty;
where
insects or
may
enter;
where
exposed
to
dripping
or
splashing
and
no
exposed
to
dripping
splashing
and
noit
prijemnik
se ne
sme
izlagati
kapanju
ili
objects
filled
with
such
as
vases,
exposed
to
dripping
orliquids,
splashing
and
no
might
be
exposed
to
mechanical
objects
filled
with
liquids,
such
as
vases,
objects
filled
with
liquids,
such
as
vases,
prskanju.
Ne
stavljajte
posude
napunjene
shall
be
placed
on
the
TV.
objects
filled
with
liquids,
such
as
vases,
vibration,
near flammable
shallbebeplaced
placed
theTV.
TV.objects
shall
ononthe
vodom
(npr.
vaze)
na
TV
prijemnik.
•• (candles,
Do
place
the
TV
in
a shall
humid
orbe
dusty
benot
placed
on
TV.
etc).the
The
TV
set
not
Donot
not
place
thethe
TV
humid
dusty
• shall
Do
place
TV
inin
a ahumid
orordusty
or
a room
with
oily
smoke
or
•space,
Neplace
postavljajte
vlažan
ili
praš-njav
• Do
not
the
TV TV
in
ausplashing
humid
or
dusty
exposed
toinin
dripping
or
and
space,
in
room
with
oilysmoke
smoke
or
space,
oror
a aroom
with
oily
orno
steam
(near
cooking
tables
or
prostor,
ili
u
prostoriju
sa
uljanim
dimom
space,
or
in
a
room
with
oily
smoke
or
objects
filled
with
liquids,
such
steam(near
(nearcooking
cooking
tables
steam
tables
oror as vases,
humidifiers).
Fire,
electric
shock,
or
steam
(near
cooking
tables
or
ili
parom
(blizu
radnih
stolova
u
kuhinji
shall
be placedFire,
on the
TV. shock,
humidifiers).
Fire,
electric
shock,oror
humidifiers).
electric
warping
may
result.
Fire,
electric
• humidifiers).
Do
not place
the
TV
in a shock,
humid
dusty
ili
osveživača
prostorija).
Možeordoći
do
warping
may
result.
warping
may
result.
warping
may
result.
space,
orelektričnog
in a room with
oilyilismoke
or
požara,
udara
uvijanja.
steam (near cooking tables or
Nastavlja
seshock, or SRP
humidifiers).
Fire, electric
Continued
warping may result.Continued
Continued
Continued
7
GB
7
7GBGB
7GB
Okolnosti:
• Ne rukujte uređajem mokrim rukama, kad je otvoreno kućište uređaja
ili sa priključcima koje nije preporučio
proizvođač. Odspojite TV prijemnik
iz strujne utičnice i antene tokom
olujnog nevremena.
• Ne postavljajte televizor tako da viri
u otvorenom prostoru. Može doći do
povrede lica ili štete objekta koji se
sudare sa televizorom.
Slomljeni delovi:
• Ne bacajte stvari na TV prijemnik.
Staklo ekrana bi se moglo razbiti i
uzrokovati ozbiljne povrede.
• Ukoliko površina TV ekrana pukne,
ne dodirujte je dok ne odspojite kabl
napajanja. U suprotnom bi moglo doći
do električnog udara.
Kad se ne koristi
• Ukoliko ne planirate da koristite TV
prijemnik nekoliko dana, odspojite ga
iz napajanja radi očuvanja okoline i iz
sigurnosnih razloga.
• TV prijemnik je odspojen iz
napajanja tek nakon odspajanja kabla
napajanja.
• Međutim, neki TV prijemnici su
možda opremljeni funkcijom koja
zahteva da budu u pripravnom stanju
kako bi pravilno funkcionisali.
Za decu
• Ne dozvolite deci da se penju na TV
prijemnik.
• Sitne delove čuvajte van domašaja
dece, kako ih ne bi slučajno progutala.
U slučaju problema...
Isključite TV prijemnik i odmah ga
odspojite iz napajanja u slučajevima
opisanim u nastavku.
Obratite se Sony ovlašćenom servisu
kako bi uređaj proverio kvalifikovani
tehničar.
Kad:
– je oštećen kabl napajanja.
– je loš kontakt sa strujnom
utičnicom.
– je TV prijemnik oštećen, budući
da je pao, udaren ili je nešto bačeno
na njega.
– tečnost ili neki predmet dospe u
otvore uređaja.
O temperaturi LCD monitora
Kad se LCD monitor koristi duže
vreme, prostor oko ekrana postaje
topao. Možda ćete osetiti vruće kad
pipnete rukom.
8 SRP
Mere opreza
Praćenje TV prijema
• Pratite program na TV-u pri umerenom svetlu, jer gledanje duže vreme pri
slaboj rasveti opterećuje oči.
• Kod korišćenja slušalica, podesite
glasnoću kako biste sprečili preterane
promene u glasnoći i tako sprečili
oštećenje sluha.
LCD ekran
• Iako je LCD ekran izrađen uz upotrebu visokoprecizne tehnologije i ima
99.99% ili više aktivnih piksela, može
doći do trajne pojave crnih ili tačkica u
boji (crvenih, plavih ili zelenih). To je
karakteristika LCD ekrana i ne predstavlja kvar.
• Nemojte pritiskati ili ogrepsti prednji
filter i ne stavljajte nikakve predmete na
TV prijemnik. Slika u tom slučaju može
biti neujednačena ili se LCD ekran može
oštetiti.
• Ako koristite TV prijemnik na hladnom mestu, slika može biti razmazana
ili previše tamna, no to ne predstavlja
kvar. Ovaj fenomen nestaje zajedno sa
porastom temperature.
• Ako na ekranu duže vreme stoje mirne
slike, može doći do pojave dvostrukih
slika. To može nestati nakon nekoliko
trenutaka.
• Ekran i kućište TV prijemnika se
zagrevaju tokom upotrebe. Ovo ne predstavlja kvar.
• LCD ekran sadrži malu količinu tečnog
kristala. Neke fluorescentne sijalice
ugrađene u ovaj TV prijemnik takođe
sadrže živu. Poštujte lokalne propise o
odlaganju otpada.
Rukovanje i čišćenje površine
ekrana/kućišta TV-a
Pre čišćenja, odspojite TV prijemnik iz
napajanja.
Kako biste sprečili propadanje materijala
ili premaza ekrana, uzmite u obzir
sledeće.
• Prašinu sa površine ekrana/ kućišta
obrišite mekom tkaninom. Tvrdokornu
nečistoću uklonite mekom krpom
umočenom u rastvor blagog deterdženta.
• Ne prskajte TV direktno vodom ili
deterdžentom. Mogli bi da iscure u donji
deo ekrana ili spoljne delove i uzrokuju
kvar.
• Nikada nemojte upotrebljavati abrazivne sunđere, kisela ili alkalna sredstva za
čišćenje, erozivni prašak ili zapaljiv rastvor poput alkohola, benzina, razređivača
ili insekticida. Upotreba takvih sredstava
ili duži kontakt sa gumom ili vinilom
može oštetiti površinu ekrana i kućište.
• Kako bi se osigurala pravilna ventilacija, preporučujemo da usisivačem povremeno očistite ventilacione otvore.
• Ukoliko je moguće podesiti nagib TV
prijemnika, budite pažljivi kako se ne bi
prevrnuo sa postolja.
Dodatna oprema
Držite dodatne komponente i svu
opremu koja emituje elektromagnetno
zračenje dalje od TV prijemnika. U
suprotnom može doći do deformacije
slike ili zvuka.
(Upozorenje o rukovanju daljinskim
upravljačem)
Napomene
• Prilikom umetanja baterija obratite
pažnju na ispravan polaritet.
• Ne koristite različite vrste baterija
istovremeno i ne mešajte stare i nove
baterije.
• Iskorišćene baterije odložite na
ekološki prihvatljiv način. Neke regije
imaju zakonski uređeno odlaganje
baterija. Upoznajte se sa lokalnim
propisima.
• Pažljivo rukujte daljinskim
upravljačem. Ne ispuštajte i ne gazite
po njemu i ne prolivajte nikakvu
tečnost po njemu.
• Ne ostavljajte daljinski upravljač
na mesta blizu izvora toplote, na
direktnu sunčevu svetlost ili u vlažnoj
prostoriji.
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating the TV
Operating
Operating
the
the
TV
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Upotreba
TV-a
Operating
Operating
the
Operating
the TV
TV the TV
Overview
of
the
remote
Overview
ofof
the
remote
Overview
the
remoteOverview of the remote
Overview
Overview
of
of
the
the
remote
remote
Overview
of
the
remote
Overview
of
the
remote
Pregled
daljinskog
upravljača
Overview
of
the
remote
Overview of Overview
the remote
1
// /the
––Input
select
//Text
hold
remote
1 1 of
Input
select
Text
hold
– Input
select
/ Text
hold 1
/
– Input select / Text hold
Overview
of
the
remote
•• Displays
connected
list
and
selects
the
source
(page
13).
Overview of the remote
Displays
connected
list
and
selects
theinput
input
source
(page
13).13). list and select
Odabir
ulaza
/equipment
Zadržavanje
teksta
•1
the
connected
list
and
• selects
Displays
the
the
input
connected
source
(page
equipment
/ /–––Input
–the
–
Input
Input
select
select
/ equipment
Text
/ Text
hold
hold
1
// Displays
/equipment
hold
/the
–select
Input
select
/hold
Text
hold
111
1
Input
select
/ Text
Text
1 •• In
–mode:
Input
select
/current
Text
Holds
the
page.
In
Text
mode:
Holds
the
page.
•/•Text
In
mode:
Holds
the
current
page.
• and
Text
mode:
Holds
the(page
current
1
/current
–i hold
Input
select
/InText
hold
•Displays
Displays
Displays
the
the
connected
connected
equipment
equipment
list
list
and
and
selects
selects
the
the
input
input
source
source
(page
13).
13).page.
•••• Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
the
input
source
(page
13).
•Text
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
selects
the
input
source
(page
13).
Prikazuje
listu
spojene
opreme
bira
izvor
ulaza
(str.
13).
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
the
input
source
(page
13).
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
the
input
source
(page
13).
1
/•/In
––Text
Input
select
/Displays
Text
hold
2
SYNC
MENU
2
MENU
•In
In
Text
mode:
mode:
Holds
Holds
the
the
current
current
page.
page.
•
the
connected
equipment
list and selects the input source (page
•••SYNC
In
Text
mode:
Holds
the
current
page.
12
Input
select
/
Text
hold
•
In
Text
mode:
Holds
the
current
page.
SYNC
MENU
2
SYNC
MENU
•
In
Text
mode:
Holds
the
current
page.
U teletekst
modu:
Zaustavljanje
odabrane
stranice
teleteksta.
Text
mode:
Holds
the
current
page.
•Press
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
the
input
source
(page
13).
totodisplay
the
Sync
Menu
and
then
select
connected
HDMI
Press
display
theBRAVIA
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu
andand
then
select
connected
HDMI
•BRAVIA
In
Text
mode:
Holds
the
current
page.
• SYNC
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
the
input
source
(page
13).
Press
toMENU
display
the
Sync
Menu
Press
then
toselect
display
connected
the BRAVIA
HDMI
Sync Menu and then
2
SYNC
MENU
2
MENU
2
SYNC
MENU
22
SYNC
MENU
2
SYNC
MENU
•SYNC
Text
mode:
Holds
the
current
page.
2
SYNC
MENU
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
• In
In
Text
mode:
Holds
the
current
page.
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
Press
Press
to
to
display
display
the
the
BRAVIA
BRAVIA
Sync
Sync
Menu
Menu
and
and
then
then
select
select
connected
connected
HDMI
HDMI
Press
to
display
the
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu
and
then
select
connected
HDMI
Press
to
display
the
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu
and
then
select
connected
HDMI
2
SYNC
MENU
Press
to
display
the
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu
and
then
select
connected
HDMI
Pritisnite
za prikaz
menija
BRAVIA
Sync,
aand
onda
izaberite
spojenu
HDMI
opremu iz
Press
toMENU
display
theoptions
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu
then
connected
HDMI
The
following
options
can
be
selected
from
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu:
2
The
following
options
can
be
selected
from
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu:
The
following
can
bedisplay
selected
from
BRAVIA
Theselect
following
Sync
options
Menu:
can be
selected
from BRAV
equipment
equipment
from
from
“HDMI
“HDMI
Device
Device
Selection”.
Selection”.
Press
to
the
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu
and then
select
connected
HDMI
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
2 SYNC
SYNC
MENU
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
Operating the TV
Operating
the
Operating
the
TVTV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
thethe
TVthe
Operating
the
TVTV
Operating
TV
Operating
Operating
the
TV
equipment
fromSelection”.
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
menu
totooperate
equipment
that
isis is Control” menu
“HDMI
Device
Press
toto
display
the
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu
and
then
select
connected
HDMI
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
menu
operate
equipment
that
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
“Device
menu
to
Control”:
operate
equipment
Use
the
“Device
that
The
The
following
following
options
options
can
can
be
be
selected
selected
from
from
BRAVIA
BRAVIA
Sync
Sync
Menu:
Menu:
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
The
following
options
can
be
selected
from
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu:
The
following
options
can
be
selected
from
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu:
Press
display
the
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu
and
then
select
connected
HDMI
The
following
options
can
be
selected
from
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu:
The
following
options
can
be
selected
from
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu:
compatible
with
Control
for
HDMI.
Select
options
from
“Home
(Menu)”,
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
compatible
with
Control
for
HDMI.
Select
options
from
“Home
(Menu)”,
Sledeće
opcije
mogu
biti
izabrane
iz
menija
BRAVIA
Sync:
compatible
with
Control
for
HDMI.
Select
options
compatible
from
with
“Home
Control
(Menu)”,
for
HDMI.
Select
“Device
“Device
Control”:
Control”:
Use
Use
the
the
“Device
“Device
Control”
Control”
menu
menu
to
to
operate
operate
equipment
equipment
that
that
isMenu:
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
menu
to
operate
equipment
that
is
The
following
options
can
be
selected
from
BRAVIA
Sync
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
menu
to
operate
equipment
is options
equipment
from
“HDMI
Device
Selection”.
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
menu
to
operate
equipment
that
isisthat
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
menu
to
operate
equipment
thatje
is
“Options”
and
“Content
List”
toto
operate
the
equipment.
The
following
options
can
be
selected
from
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu:
“Options”
and
“Content
List”
operate
theoptions
equipment.
“Device
Control”:
Koristite
“Device
meni
da
upravljate
opremom
koja
kom“Options”
and
“Content
List”
toControl”
operate
the
“Options”
equipment.
and
“Content
List”
operate
the equipm
compatible
compatible
with
with
Control
Control
for
for
HDMI.
HDMI.
Select
Select
options
options
from
from
“Home
“Home
(Menu)”,
(Menu)”,
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
menu
toto
operate
equipment
th
compatible
with
Control
for
HDMI.
Select
from
“Home
(Menu)”,
compatible
with
Control
for
HDMI.
Select
options
from
“Home
(Menu)”,
The
following
options
can
be
selected
from
BRAVIA
Sync
Menu:
compatible
with
Control
for
HDMI.
Select
options
from
“Home
(Menu)”,
compatible
with
Control
for
HDMI.
Select
options
from
“Home
(Menu)”,
“Speakers”:
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
or
“Audio
System”
to
output
the
TV’s
sound
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
menu
to
operate
equipment
that
is
“Speakers”:
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
or
“Audio
System”
to output
the“TV
TV’s
sound
“Speakers”:
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
or
“Audio
“Speakers”:
System”
toSelects
output
the
TV’s
Speakers”
sound
“Options”
“Options”
and
and
“Content
“Content
List”
List”
to
to
operate
operate
the
the
equipment.
“Options”
and
“Content
List”
to
operate
the
equipment.
“Options”
and
“Content
List”
toopcije
operate
the
equipment.
“Device
Control”:
Use
the
“Device
Control”
menu
to operate
equipment
that
is or “Audio Sys
patibilna
sa
Control
for
HDMI.
Izaberite
izequipment.
“Home
(Menu)”,
“Options”
and
“Content
List”
to
operate
the
equipment.
“Options”
and
“Content
List”
to
operate
the
equipment.
from
the
TV
speakers
or
connected
audio
equipment.
compatible
with
Control
for
HDMI.
Select
options
from
“Home
(Menu)”,
from
the“Speakers”:
TV
speakers
or“TV
connected
audio
equipment.
from
the
TV
speakers
or
connected
audio
from
the
TV
speakers
orTV’s
connected
audio equipmen
“Speakers”:
“Speakers”:
Selects
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
Speakers”
or
or
“Audio
“Audio
System”
System”
to
to
output
output
the
the
TV’s
sound
sound
“Options”
and
“Content
List”
toSystem”
operate
the
equipment.
“Speakers”:
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
or
“Audio
System”
to
output
the
TV’s
sound
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
orequipment.
“Audio
to
output
the
TV’s
sound
compatible
with
Control
for
HDMI.
Select
options
from
“Home
(Menu)”,
“Options”
iand
“Content
List”
za
upravljanje
opremom.
“Speakers”:
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
ormenu
“Audio
System”
to
output
the
TV’s
sound
“Speakers”:
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
or
“Audio
System”
to
output
the
TV’s
sound
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
to
operate
the
TV
from
the
“HOME
“Options”
“Content
List”
to
operate
the
equipment.
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
menu
toequipment.
operate
the
TV
from
the
“HOME
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
menu
“TV
toSpeakers”
operate
Control”:
the
TV
Use
from
the
the
“TV
“HOME
Control”
menu
to opes
from
from
the
the
TV
TV
speakers
speakers
or
or
connected
connected
audio
audio
equipment.
“Speakers”:
Selects
“TV
or
“Audio
System”
to
output
the TV’s
from
the
TV
speakers
or
connected
audio
equipment.
from
the
TV
speakers
or
connected
audio
equipment.
“Options”
and
“Content
List”
to
operate
the
equipment.
from
the
TV
speakers
or
connected
audio
equipment.
“Speakers”:
Bira
“TV
Speakers”
ili
“Audio
System”
za
izlaz
zvuka
TV-a
iz
zvučnika
TV-a
from
the or
TV
speakers
or
connected
audio
equipment.
(Menu)”
“Options”
menu.
“Speakers”:
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
or
“Audio
System”
toto
output
the
TV’s
sound
(Menu)”
or
“Options”
menu.
(Menu)”
or
“Options”
menu.
(Menu)”
orthe
“Options”
menu.
“TV
“TV
Control”:
Control”:
Use
Use
the
the
“TV
“TV
Control”
Control”
menu
menu
to
to
operate
operate
the
TV
TV
from
from
the
the
“HOME
“HOME
from
the
TV
speakers
or
connected
audio
equipment.
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
menu
to
operate
the
TV
from
the
“HOME
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
menu
to
operate
the
TV
from
the
“HOME
“Speakers”:
Selects
“TV
Speakers”
or
“Audio
System”
output
the
TV’s
sound
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
menu
to
operate
the
TV
from
the
“HOME
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
tototooperate
the
from
the “HOME
“Return
to
TV”:
Selects
this
option
totomenu
return
TV
ili
spojene
audio
opreme.
from
the
TV
speakers
or
connected
audio
equipment.
“Return
to
TV”:
this
option
return
TV
programme.
“Return
to
TV”:
Selects
this
option
to
return
“Return
to programme.
TV
programme.
toTV
TV”:
Selects
this option
return
TV
(Menu)”
(Menu)”
or
or
“Options”
“Options”
menu.
menu.
(Menu)”
or
“Options”
menu.
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
menu
to operate
the TVtofrom
theto“H
orSelects
“Options”
menu.
from
the(Menu)”
TV
speakers
or
connected
audio
equipment.
(Menu)”
or
“Options”
menu.
(Menu)”
or
“Options”
menu.
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
menu
to
operate
the
TV
from
the
3
N/X/x/m/M/./>
“TV
Control”:
Koristite
meni
“TV
Control”
za
upravljanje
TV-om
sa “HOME
33
N/X/x/m/M/./>
“Return
“Return
to
to
TV”:
TV”:
Selects
Selects
this
this
option
option
to
to
return
return
to
to
TV
TV
programme.
programme.
(Menu)”
or
“Options”
menu.
“Return
to
TV”:
Selects
this
option
to
return
to
TV
programme.
“Return
to
TV”:
Selects
this
option
to
return
to
TV
programme.
“TV
Control”:
Use
the
“TV
Control”
menu
to
operate
the
TV
from
the“HOME
“HOME
N/X/x/m/M/./>
3
N/X/x/m/M/./>
“Return
to
TV”:
Selects
this
option
to
return
to
TV
programme.
“Return
to
TV”:
Selects
this
option
to
return
to
TV
programme.
(Menu)”
or
“Options”
menu.
You
can
operate
the
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
equipment
that
is
connected
to
the
(Menijem)”
“Options”
menijem.
You
canN/X/x/m/M/./>
operate
the the
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
equipment
that
isreturn
connected
the
“Return
to
TV”: Selects
this
option
tothat
to TVtoprogramme.
(Menu)”
orili
“Options”
menu.
You
can
operate
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
You
equipment
can
operate
the
isBRAVIA
connected
Sync-compatible
to the
equ
3
N/X/x/m/M/./>
N/X/x/m/M/./>
3
N/X/x/m/M/./>
3
33
N/X/x/m/M/./>
“Return
toto
TV”:
Selects
this
toto
return
TV
programme.
3
N/X/x/m/M/./>
TV.
Some
other
buttons
on
the
remote
control
may
also
operate
BRAVIA
Sync
TV.
Some
other
buttons
on
the
remote
control
may
also
operate
BRAVIA
Sync
“Return
to
TV”:
Bira
ovu
opciju
za
povratak
na to
TV
program.
“Return
TV”:
Selects
this
option
return
to
TV
programme.
TV.
Some
other
buttons
onoption
the
remote
control
TV.
may
Some
also
other
operate
buttons
BRAVIA
the
Sync
remote
control may
You
You
can
can
operate
operate
the
the
BRAVIA
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
Sync-compatible
equipment
equipment
that
that
is
is
connected
connected
to
to
thethe
You
can
operate
the
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
equipment
that
is
connected
to
the
You
can
operate
the
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
equipment
that
is on
connected
to the
3
N/X/x/m/M/./>
You
can
operate
the
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
equipment
that
is
connected
to
the
You
can
operate
the
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
equipment
that
is
connected
to
the
equipment.
3
equipment.
equipment.
equipment.
TV.
TV.
Some
Some
other
other
buttons
buttons
on
the
the
remote
remote
control
control
may
may
also
also
operate
operate
BRAVIA
BRAVIA
Sync
Sync
3 N/X/x/m/M/./>
You
can
operate
the
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
equipment
that
TV.
Some
other
buttons
on
the
remote
control
may
also
operate
BRAVIA
Sync
TV.
Some
other
buttons
on
the
remote
control
may
also
operate
BRAVIA
Syncis connected
3
N/X/x/m/M/./>
TV.
Some
other
buttons
onon
the
remote
control
may
also
operate
BRAVIA
Sync
TV.
Some
other
buttons
on
the
remote
control
may
also
operate
BRAVIA
Sync
You
can
operate
the
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
equipment
that
to
4
DIGITAL/ANALOG
44
DIGITAL/ANALOG
equipment.
equipment.
TV.
Some
other
buttons
on the remote
control
may
also
operate BRAVIA S
equipment.
equipment.
You
can
operate
the
BRAVIA
Sync-compatible
equipment
thatis
isconnected
connected
tothe
the
DIGITAL/ANALOG
4
DIGITAL/ANALOG
Možete
upravljati
BRAVIA
Sync
kompatibilnom
opremom
koja
je
spojena
naSync
TV.
Neke
equipment.
equipment.
TV.
Some
other
buttons
on
the
remote
control
may
also
operate
BRAVIA
Press
to
switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode.
Press
toDIGITAL/ANALOG
switch
between
digital
analogue
mode.
equipment.
TV.
Some
other
buttons
on
the and
remote
control
may
also
operate
BRAVIA
Syncand analogue mode
Press
tona
switch
between
digital
and
analogue
Press
mode.
to switch
between
4
DIGITAL/ANALOG
DIGITAL/ANALOG
4
DIGITAL/ANALOG
4
44
DIGITAL/ANALOG
druge
tipke
daljinskom
upravljaču
mogu
takođe
upravljati
BRAVIA
Syncdigital
opremom.
equipment.
4
DIGITAL/ANALOG
5
––Press
Wide
Mode
equipment.
5
Wide
Mode
4
DIGITAL/ANALOG
Press
to
to
switch
switch
between
between
digital
digital
and
and
analogue
analogue
mode.
mode.
Press
to
switch
digital
and
analogue
mode.
Press
tobetween
switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode.
5
–
Wide
Mode
5
–
Wide
Mode
Press
to
switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode.
4
DIGITAL/ANALOG
Press
to
switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode.
4
DIGITAL/ANALOG
Changes
the
size.
Press
totoselect
the
wide
mode
Changes
the–picture
picture
size.
Press
repeatedly
select
thedesired
desired
wide
mode
Press
torepeatedly
switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode.
45
DIGITAL/ANALOG
Changes
the
picture
size.
Press
repeatedly
toChanges
select
the
the
desired
picture
wide
size.
mode
Press repeatedly to select
5
–Wide
–Wide
Mode
Mode
5
–––to
Wide
Mode
5
Wide
Mode
5
Mode
Pritisnite
zaWide
promenu
između
digitalnog
i analognog
moda.
Press
switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode.
5
Wide
Mode
(page
10).
(page
10).
Press
toChanges
switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode.
(page
10).
(page
10).
5
–
Wide
Mode
Changes
Changes
the
the
picture
picture
size.
size.
Press
Press
repeatedly
repeatedly
to
to
select
select
the
the
desired
desired
wide
wide
mode
mode
Changes
the
picture
size.
Press
repeatedly
to
select
the
desired
wide
mode
the
picture
size.
Press
repeatedly
to
select
the
desired
wide
mode
Changes
the
picture
size.
Press
repeatedly
to
select
the
desired
wide
mode
Changes
the
picture
size.
Press
repeatedly
to
select
the
desired
wide
mode
–
Wide
Mode
5
–
Wide
Mode
5
6
SCENE
–
Scene
Select
mode
6
SCENE
–10).
Scene
Select
mode
(page
(page
10).
Changes
the picture 6
size.SCENE
Press repeatedly
to Select
select themode
desired wide mode
(page
56
–10).
Wide
(page
10).
SCENE
–Mode
Scene
Select
mode
– Scene
(page
10).
(page
10).
Changes
the
picture
size.
Press
repeatedly
to
select
the
desired
wide
mode
Menja
veličinu
slike.
Pritisnite
više
puta
za
odabir
željenog
moda
širokog
prikaza
(str. 10).
Press
totoSCENE
display
the
“Scene
Select”
menu.
When
you
select
the
scene
Press
display
the
“Scene
Select”
menu.
When
youthe
select
thedesired
desired
scene
(page
10).
Changes
the
picture
size.
Press
repeatedly
to select
wide
mode
Press
to
display
the
“Scene
Select”
menu.
When
Press
you
todesired
display
select
the
thedesired
“Scene
scene
Select”
menu. When yo
6
6
SCENE
SCENE
–
–
Scene
Scene
Select
Select
mode
mode
6
SCENE
–
Scene
Select
mode
6
–
Scene
Select
mode
6
SCENE
–
Scene
Select
mode
(page
10).
6
SCENE
–
Scene
Select
mode
6 option,
the
optimum
sound
and
picture
quality
for
selected
scene
are
automatically
SCENE
–
Mod
odabira
scene
option,
the
optimum
sound
and
picture
quality
for
selected
scene
are
automatically
(page
10).
option,
the
optimum
sound
and
picture
quality
option,
for
selected
the
optimum
scene
are
sound
automatically
and
picture
quality for se
6
SCENE
–
Scene
Select
mode
Press
Press
to
to
display
display
the
the
“Scene
“Scene
Select”
Select”
menu.
menu.
When
When
you
you
select
select
the
the
desired
desired
scene
scene
Press
to
display
the
“Scene
Select”
menu.
When
you
select
the
desired
scene
Press
to
display
the
“Scene
Select”
menu.
When
you
select
the
desired
scene
Press
to
display
the
“Scene
Select”
menu.
When
you
select
the
desired
scene
Press
toThe
display
the
“Scene
Select”
menu.
When
youThe
select
theare
desired
scene
The
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
options
greyed
out.
6
SCENE
–the
Scene
Select
mode
set.
The
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
options
are
greyed
out.
Pritisnite
za
prikaz
menija
“Scene
Select”.
Kad
izaberete
željenu
opciju
scene,
optimalni
set.
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
set.
options
options
you
are
can
greyed
select
out.
maythe
vary.
Unavaila
option,
option,
the
optimum
optimum
sound
sound
and
and
picture
picture
quality
quality
for
for
selected
selected
scene
scene
are
are
automatically
automatically
Press
to
display
the
“Scene
Select”
menu.
When
you
select
desired
scen
option,
the
sound
and
picture
quality
for
selected
scene
are
automatically
6 set.
SCENE
–optimum
Scene
Select
mode
option,
the
optimum
sound
and
picture
quality
for
selected
scene
are
automatically
option,
the
optimum
sound
and
picture
quality
for
selected
scene
are
automatically
option,
the
optimum
sound
and
picture
quality
for
selected
scene
are
automatically
“Auto”:
Delivers
optimum
picture
and
sound
quality
which
is
automatically
set
Press
to
display
the
“Scene
Select”
menu.
When
you
select
the
desired
scene
“Auto”:
Delivers
optimum
picture
and
sound
quality
which
is
automatically
set
zvuk
i The
kvalitet
slike
za“Scene
odabranu
scenu
su
automatski
podešeni.
Opcije
koje
možete
“Auto”:
Delivers
optimum
picture
and
sound
“Auto”:
quality
Delivers
which
isare
optimum
automatically
picture
and sound
quali
set.
set.
The
options
options
you
you
can
can
select
select
may
may
vary.
vary.
Unavailable
Unavailable
options
options
are
greyed
greyed
out.
out.set
option,
the
optimum
sound
and
picture
quality
for
selected
scene
are automa
set.
The
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
options
are
greyed
out.
The
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
options
are
greyed
out.
Press
toset.
display
the
Select”
menu.
When
you
select
the
desired
scene
set.
The
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
options
are
greyed
out.
set.
The
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
options
are
greyed
out.
according
to
input
source.
There
may
not
be
any
effect
depending
on
the
connected
option,
the
optimum
sound
and
picture
quality
for
selected
scene
are
automatically
according
to
input
source.
There
may
not
be
any
effect
depending
on
the
connected
according
to input
source.
There
may
not
be
any
according
effect
depending
to
input
source.
on
theThere
connected
may
any effe
“Auto”:
“Auto”:
Delivers
Delivers
optimum
optimum
picture
picture
and
and
sound
sound
quality
quality
which
which
isautomatically
is
automatically
automatically
set
set not
set.optimum
The
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
options
arebegreyed
ou
“Auto”:
Delivers
optimum
picture
and
sound
quality
which
is
automatically
set
“Auto”:
Delivers
picture
and
sound
quality
is automatically
set
option,
the
optimum
sound
and
picture
quality
for
scene
are
automatically
izabrati
mogu
se
razlikovati.
Nedostupne
opcije
su
uselected
sivoj
boji.
“Auto”:
Delivers
optimum
picture
and
sound
quality
which
set
“Auto”:
Delivers
optimum
picture
and
sound
quality
which
isiswhich
automatically
set
equipments.
set.
The
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
options
are
greyed
out.
equipments.
equipments.
equipments.
according
according
to
to
input
input
source.
source.
There
There
may
may
not
not
be
be
any
any
effect
effect
depending
depending
on
the
the
connected
connected
“Auto”:
Delivers
optimum
picture
and
sound
quality
is automaticall
according
to
input
source.
There
not
be
any
effect
depending
on
the
connected
to
input
source.
There
may
not
be
any
effect
depending
on
thewhich
connected
set.
Theaccording
options
you
can
select
may
vary.
Unavailable
options
are
greyed
out.
according
toCurrent
input
source.
There
may
be
any
effect
depending
onon
the
connected
“Auto”:
Pruža
optimalan
kvalitet
slike
inot
zvuka
koji
se
automatski
podešava
prema
izvoru
according
to
input
source.
There
may
not
be
any
effect
depending
on
the
connected
“General”:
user
settings.
“Auto”:
Delivers
optimum
picture
and
sound
quality
which
is
automatically
set
“General”:
Current
useruser
settings.
“General”:
Current
settings.
“General”:
Current
user
settings.
equipments.
equipments.
equipments.
to and
inputsound
There
may
not
beopreme.
any
effect
depending
on the conn
equipments.
“Auto”:
Delivers
optimum
picture
quality
which
is automatically
set
equipments.
signala.
Možda
neće
biti according
nikakvih
efekata
usource.
zavisnosti
od
povezane
equipments.
“Photo”:
Delivers
picture
that
reproduces
the
texture
and
colour
of
aaof
printed
according
to
input
source.
There
may
not
be
any
effect
depending
on
connected
“Photo”:
Delivers
picture
that
reproduces
the
texture
and
colour
ofthe
printed
“Photo”:
Delivers
picture
that
reproduces
the
“Photo”:
texture
and
Delivers
colour
picture
a printed
that reproduces the textu
“General”:
“General”:
Current
Current
user
user
settings.
settings.
equipments.
“General”:
Current
user
settings.
“General”:
Current
user
settings.
according
to
input
source.
There
may
not
be
any
effect
depending
on
the
connected
“General”:
Current
user
settings.
“General”:
Current
user
settings.
photo.
“General”:
Podešenja
trenutnog
korisnika.
equipments.
z
•• The
number
5,
photo.
zz
The
number
5,N,
N,
photo.
photo.
“Photo”:
“Photo”:
Delivers
picture
picture
that
that
reproduces
reproduces
the
the
texture
texture
and
and
colour
colour
of
of
a printed
aofprinted
“General”:
Current
user
settings.
“Photo”:
Delivers
picture
that
reproduces
the
texture
and
colour
of
aaaprinted
“Photo”:
picture
that
reproduces
the
texture
and
colour
a printed
equipments.
• The
number
5, N,
z
•Delivers
TheDelivers
number
5,
N,
“Photo”:
Delivers
picture
that
reproduces
the
texture
and
colour
of
printed
“Photo”:
picture
that
reproduces
the
and
colour
of
printed
“Music”:
Delivers
and
clear
sound
effects
like
atatDelivers
aaat
concert.
“General”:
Current
user
settings.
PROG
++and
AUDIO
“Photo”:
Pruža
slikudynamic
koja
reprodukuje
teksturu
i texture
boju
štampane
fotografije.
“Music”:
Delivers
dynamic
and
clear
sound
effects
like
concert.
PROG
and
AUDIO
“Music”:
Delivers
dynamic
and
clear
sound
“Music”:
effects
like
a concert.
dynamic
sound
photo.
photo.
“Photo”:
Delivers
picture
that
reproduces
the
textureand
andclear
colour
of a effect
printe
photo.
PROG
+5,
and
AUDIO
PROG
+
and
AUDIO
••The
Brojčana
tipka
5,5,
tipke,
photo.
“General”:
Current
user
settings.
z•z
•buttons
The
number
number
5,
N,
N,
z
The
number
N,
z
•
The
number
5,
N,
z
•
The
number
5,
N,
photo.
photo.
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
picture
and
dynamic
sound.
have
tactile
dots.
Use
“Photo”:
Delivers
picture
that
reproduces
the
texture
and
colour
of
a
printed
z • The
number
5,
N,
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
picture
and
dynamic
sound.
buttons
have
tactile
dots.
Use
“Music”:
Pruža
dinamičan
i tactile
jasan
zvuk
efekata
kao
na like
koncertu.
Delivers
theatre-like
picture
and
“Cinema”:
dynamic
sound.
theatre-like
picture and dynam
buttons
have
dots.
buttons
have
dots.
Use
“Music”:
“Music”:
Delivers
Delivers
dynamic
dynamic
and
and
clear
clear
sound
sound
effects
effects
like
like
at
a concert.
aatconcert.
photo.
“Music”:
Delivers
dynamic
and
clear
sound
effects
at
aat
concert.
“Music”:
Delivers
dynamic
and
clear
sound
effects
like
“Photo”:
Delivers
picture
that
reproduces
the
texture
and
colour
ofa aconcert.
printed
PROG
PROG
++
and
+i AUDIO
and
AUDIO
AUDIO
PROG
+PROG
and
+tactile
and
z
•AUDIO
TheUse
number
5,“Cinema”:
N,
PROG
+dots
and
AUDIO
“Music”:
Delivers
dynamic
and
clear
sound
effects
like
at
aDelivers
concert.
PROG
AUDIO
“Music”:
Delivers
dynamic
and
clear
sound
effects
like
at
a
concert.
the
tactile
as
references
“Game”:
Delivers
the
best
picture
and
sound
quality
for
fullest
game
playing
PROG
+
and
AUDIO
photo.
the
tactile
dots
as
references
z
•
The
number
5,
N,
“Game”:
Delivers
the
best
picture
and
sound
quality
for
fullest
game
playing
the
tactile
dots
as
references
theDelivers
tactile
dots
as
references
“Game”:
Delivers
best
picture
and
sound
“Game”:
quality
for
Delivers
fullest
the
game
bestplaying
picture
sound quali
“Cinema”:
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
theatre-like
picture
picture
and
and
dynamic
dynamic
sound.
sound.
“Music”:
Delivers
dynamic
and
clear
sound
effects
like at aand
concert.
buttons
buttons
have
have
tactile
tactile
dots.
dots.
Use
UseUse
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
picture
and
dynamic
sound.
buttons
have
tactile
dots.
Use
“Cinema”:
Pruža
sliku
i the
dinamičan
zvuk
nalik
pozorišnom.
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
picture
and
dynamic
sound.
photo.
buttons
have
tactile
dots.
PROG
+enjoyment.
and
AUDIO
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
picture
and
dynamic
sound.
buttons
have
tactile
dots.
Use
z • when
The
number
5,
N,
imaju
ispupčenja.
Ova
operating
the
TV.
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
picture
and
dynamic
sound.
buttons
have
tactile
dots.
Use
“Music”:
Delivers
dynamic
and
clear
sound
effects
like
atpicture
afullest
when
operating
the
TV.
PROG
+
AUDIO
enjoyment.
when
operating
the
TV.
when
operating
the
TV.
enjoyment.
enjoyment.
the
the
tactile
tactile
dots
dots
as
as
references
references
the
tactile
dots
as
references
the
tactile
dots
as
references
“Game”:
“Game”:
Delivers
Delivers
the
the
best
best
picture
picture
and
and
sound
sound
quality
quality
for
fullest
game
game
playing
playing
“Game”:
Delivers
the
best
picture
and
sound
quality
for
fullest
game
playing
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
and
dynamic
sound.
buttons
have
tactile
dots.
Use
“Game”:
Delivers
the
best
picture
and
sound
quality
for
fullest
game
playing
“Music”:
dynamic
and
clear
sound
effects
like
at
aconcert.
concert.
the
tactile
dots
as
references
“Game”:
Delivers
the
best
picture
and
sound
quality
for
fullest
game
playing
PROG
+and
and
AUDIO
“Game”:
Pruža
najbolji
kvalitet
slike
i zvuka
za
uživanje
ufor
igranju
igrica.
ispupčenja
služe
kao
referthe
tactile
dots
as
references
“Game”:
Delivers
the
best
picture
and
sound
quality
for
fullest
game
playing
“Graphics”:
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
to
reduce
fatigue
for
prolonged
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
picture
and
dynamic
sound.
buttons
have
tactile
dots.
Use
“Graphics”:
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
to
reduce
fatigue
for for
prolonged
when
when
operating
operating
the
the
TV.
TV.
when
operating
the
TV.
when
operating
the
“Graphics”:
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
“Graphics”:
to
reduce
fatigue
Delivers
clearer
prolonged
detailed
to r
the
tactile enjoyment.
dots
as references
enjoyment.
enjoyment.
“Game”:
Delivers
thedynamic
best
picture
and
sound
quality
for
fullestpictures
game playi
when
operating
the
TV.
enjoyment.
“Cinema”:
Delivers
theatre-like
picture
and
sound.
buttons
have
tactile
dots.
UseTV.
enjoyment.
entne
tačke
tokom
upotrebe
“Graphics”:
Pruža
jasnije
detaljne
slike
da
smanji
zamor
od
dužeg
gledanja.
when
operating
the
TV.
enjoyment.
viewing.
the
tactile
“Game”:
Delivers
the
best
picture
and
sound
quality
for
game
playing
viewing.
when operating
the“Graphics”:
TV.
viewing.
viewing.
“Graphics”:
“Graphics”:
Delivers
Delivers
clearer
clearer
detailed
detailed
pictures
pictures
to
to
reduce
reduce
fatigue
fatigue
for
for
prolonged
prolonged
the
tactiledots
dotsasasreferences
references
enjoyment.
“Graphics”:
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
to
reduce
fatigue
for
prolonged
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
tofullest
reduce
fatigue
for
prolonged
“Game”:
Delivers
the
best
picture
and
sound
quality
for
fullest
game
playing
TV-a.
“Graphics”:
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
to
reduce
fatigue
for
prolonged
“Graphics”:
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
to
reduce
fatigue
for
prolonged
when
operating
the
TV.
“Sports”:
Pruža
realnu
sliku
sa
surround
zvukom
kao
na
stadionu.
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
surround
sound
like
in
a
stadium.
enjoyment.
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
surround
sound
like
in
ainstadium.
when operating the TV.
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
surround
“Sports”:
sound
Delivers
like
realistic
a stadium.
picture
with for
surround
s
viewing.
viewing.
“Graphics”:
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
to reduce
fatigue
prolong
viewing.
viewing.
enjoyment.
viewing.
viewing.
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
totosurround
reduce
fatigue
for
prolonged
GUIDE
(EPG)
7 “Graphics”:
7
GUIDE
(EPG)
7
GUIDE
(EPG)
“Sports”:
“Sports”:
Delivers
Delivers
realistic
realistic
picture
picture
with
with
surround
surround
sound
sound
like
like
in
in
a
stadium.
a
stadium.
viewing.
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
surround
sound
like
in
a
stadium.
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
sound
like
in
a
stadium.
“Graphics”:
Delivers
clearer
detailed
pictures
reduce
fatigue
for
prolonged
7
GUIDE
(EPG)
7
GUIDE
(EPG)
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
surround
sound
like
in
a
stadium.
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
surround
sound
like
in(EPG)
a(page
stadium.
viewing.
Press
totoGUIDE
display
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
(page
16).
Pritisnite
za
prikaz
digitalnog
elektronskog
programskog
vodiča
(str.
16).
Press
display
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
16).
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
surround
sound
like inProgramme
a stadium.
viewing.
Press
to
display
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Press
to
Guide
display
(EPG)
Digital
(page
16).
Electronic
7
GUIDE
(EPG)
(EPG)
7
(EPG)
7GUIDE
GUIDE
(EPG)
77
GUIDE
(EPG)
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
surround
sound
like
ininathe
stadium.
7
GUIDE
(EPG)
8
RETURN
8 8
RETURN
“Sports”:
Delivers
realistic
picture
with
surround
sound
like
a(page
stadium.
8
RETURN
7
GUIDE
(EPG)
Press
Press
to
to
display
display
the
the
Digital
Digital
Electronic
Electronic
Programme
Programme
Guide
Guide
(EPG)
(EPG)
(page
(page
16).
16).16).
Press
to
display
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
(page
16).
Press
to
display
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
(page
RETURN
8
RETURN
Press
to
display
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
16).
Press
to
display
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
(page
16).
7
GUIDE
(EPG)
•RETURN
the
previous
screen
of
displayed
• Returns
Returns
the
previous
screen
ofany
any
displayed
menu.
•8
Vraća
natoto
prethodnu
stranicu
prikazanog
menija.
Press
to
display
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide (EPG)
16). m
78
GUIDE
(EPG)
•8
Returns
to
the
previous
screen
ofProgramme
any
displayed
• menu.
Returns
menu.
to the
previous
screen
of any (page
displayed
RETURN
RETURN
8
RETURN
8
RETURN
to
display
the
Digital
Electronic
Guide
(EPG)
(page
16).
8
RETURN
•Press
When
playing
athe
photo/music/video
file:
Press
stop
the
playback
(the
display
When
playing
athe
photo/music/video
file:
Press
toWhen
stop
the
playback
(the
display
to
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
16).
Kod
reprodukcije
fotografije/muzike/video
snimka:
Pritisnite
zaplayback
zaustavljanje
re••Returns
When
playing
athe
photo/music/video
file:
Press
•to
to
stop
playing
the
a(page
photo/music/video
(the
display
file: Press to
8
RETURN
•Returns
Returns
to
to
the
previous
previous
screen
screen
of
of
any
any
displayed
displayed
menu.
menu.
•••••Press
Returns
to
the
previous
screen
of
any
displayed
menu.
• display
Returns
to
previous
screen
of
any
displayed
menu.
Returns
to
the
previous
screen
of
any
displayed
menu.
tothe
the
previous
screen
of
any
displayed returns
menu. to
returns
toto
view).
8
returns
the
file
or
thumbnail
view).
returns
to file
the
file
thumbnail
view).
fileplayback
or
thumbnail
view).
•When
•When
When
playing
playing
aor
photo/music/video
athumbnail
photo/music/video
file:
file:
Press
Press
to
to
stop
stop
the
playback
playback
(the
(the
display
display
•oraReturns
to the
previous
screen
ofthe
any
displayed
menu.
••RETURN
When
aaase
photo/music/video
file:
Press
stop
the
playback
(the
display
8 RETURN
• playing
When
playing
photo/music/video
file:
Press
to
stop
the
(the
display
(prikaz
vraća
na
datoteke
ili
prikaz
uto
sličicama).
• Returns
When
playing
photo/music/video
file:
Press
to
stop
the
playback
(the
display
playing
photo/music/video
file:
Press
to
stop
the
playback
(the
display
•produkcije
to
the
previous
screen
of
any
displayed
menu.
9
HOME
9
HOME
returns
returns
to
to
the
the
file
file
or
or
thumbnail
thumbnail
view).
view).
•
When
playing
a
photo/music/video
file: Press to stop the playback (the di
returns
to
the
file
or
thumbnail
view).
returns
to
the
file
or
thumbnail
view).
•
Returns
to
the
previous
screen
of
any
displayed
menu.
HOME
9
HOME
returns
to
the
file
or
thumbnail
view).
9 9
HOME
returns
to
the
file
or
thumbnail
view).
•Displays
When
playing
a
photo/music/video
file:
Press
to
stop
the
playback
(the
display
or
cancels
the
Displays
or
cancels
themenu.
menu.
returns
to thefile:
filePress
or thumbnail
view).
• HOME
When
playing
a photo/music/video
to stop the
playbackthe
(the
display
Displays
or cancels
the
menu.view).
Displays
or
cancels
menu.
9
HOME
9
HOME
9
HOME
Prikazuje
ili
otkazuje
meni.
99
HOME
returns
to
the
file
oror
thumbnail
9
HOME
q;
Number
buttons
returns
to
the
file
thumbnail
view). q; Number buttons
q; q;
Number
buttons
9
HOME
Displays
Displays
or
or
cancels
cancels
the
the
menu.
menu.
Displays
or
cancels
the
menu.
Displays
or
cancels
the
menu.
Number
buttons
Displays
or
cancels
the
menu.
10 •HOME
Displays
or
cancels For
the
menu.
Brojčane
tipke
9
Selects
channels.
channel
numbers
10
and
above,
enter
the
digit
•HOME
Selects
channels.
ForDisplays
channel
numbers
10the
and
above,
enter
thenext
next
digit
or cancels
9
•q;
Selects
channels.
For
channel
numbers
10menu.
•and
Selects
above,
channels.
enter
the
For
next
channel
digit numbers 10 and ab
q;
Number
Number
buttons
buttons
q;
Number
buttons
Number
buttons
q;q;Displays
Number
buttons
orkanala.
cancels
the
menu.
q;
buttons
•Number
Odabir
Za
kanale
preko 10, unesite drugu quickly.
i treću cifru vrlo brzo.
quickly.
quickly.
or
cancels
the
menu.
quickly.
q;
Number
buttons
•Selects
•
Selects
Selects
channels.
channels.
For
For
channel
channel
numbers
numbers
10
10
and
and
above,
above,
enter
enter
the
the
next
next
digit
digitdigit
•••Displays
Selects
channels.
For
channel
numbers
10
and
above,
enter
the
next
digit
•
Selects
channels.
For
channel
numbers
10
and
above,
enter
the
next
Selects
channels.
For
channel
numbers
10
and
above,
enter
the
next
digit
channels.
For
channel
numbers
10
and
above,
enter
the
next
digit
•
In
Text
mode:
Enters
the
three
digit
page
number
to
select
the
page.
q;
buttons
••Number
U
teletekst
modu:
Unos
trocifrenog
broja
stranice
zato
odabir
stranice.
In• quickly.
Text
mode:
Enters
three
digitdigit
page
number
select
the the
page.
In
Text
mode:
Enters
the
three
page
number
•channel
In
Text
to
mode:
select
Enters
threeenter
digitthe
page
numbe
quickly.
•the
Selects
channels.
For
numbers
10 page.
andthe
above,
next
digit
quickly.
q; Number
buttons
quickly.
quickly.
quickly.
••/
Selects
channels.
For
channel
numbers
10
and
above,
enter
the
next
digit
qa
/
–/
Text
11 qa
Teletekst
qa
–•–In
Text
•
In
Text
Text
mode:
mode:
Enters
Enters
the
the
three
three
digit
digit
page
page
number
number
to
to
select
select
the
the
page.
page.
quickly.
In
Text
mode:
Enters
the
three
digit
page
number
to
select
the
page.
•
In
Text
mode:
Enters
the
three
digit
page
number
to
select
the
page.
•
Selects
channels.
For
channel
numbers
10
and
above,
enter
the
next
digit
–
Text
qa
/
–
Text
•
In
Text
mode:
Enters
the
three
digit
page
number
to
select
the
page.
•Inquickly.
In
Text
mode:
Enters
the
three
digit
page number to select the page.
In
Text
mode:
Displays
broadcast.
Text
mode:
Displays
Text
broadcast.
U
teletekst
modu:
Prikaz
emitovanja
teleteksta.
•Text
InText
Text
mode:
Enters the
threemode:
digit page
number
select the page.
quickly.
In
mode:
Displays
broadcast.
In Text
Displays
Texttobroadcast.
qa
/
/
–Text
–
Text
Text
qa
–
Text
qa
/
– Text
qaqa
/
Text
•/
Text
mode:
Enters
the
three
digit
page
number
totoselect
the
page.
qa
/
––
Text
Each
time
you
press
/,
the
display
as
Each
time
you
press
/,
the
display
changes
cyclically
asfollows:
follows:
•InIn
In
Text
mode:
Enters
the
three
digit
page
number
select
the
page.
Svaki
put
kad
pritisnete
prikaz
sechanges
menja
nacyclically
sledeći
način:
qa
/
–
Text
In
In
Text
Text
mode:
mode:
Displays
Displays
Text
Text
broadcast.
broadcast.
Each
time
you
press
/,
the
display
changes
Each
cyclically
time
you
as follows:
press
/, the display changes cyclic
In
Text
mode:
Displays
Text
broadcast.
In
Text
mode:
Displays
Text
broadcast.
Text
mode:
Displays
Text
broadcast.
In
Text
mode:
Displays
Text
broadcast.
qa
/
–
Text
t
Text
over
the
TV
picture
(mix
mode)
t
No
Text
(exit
the
Text
service)
Text
t
Text
over
the
TV
picture
(mix
mode)
t
Nobroadcast.
Text
(exit
the
Text
service)
Inthe
Text
mode:
Displays
Text
qa Text
/Each
–
Text
Each
time
time
you
you
press
press
/,
/,
the
the
display
display
changes
changes
cyclically
cyclically
as
as
follows:
follows:
Text
t
Text
over
the
TV
picture
(mix
mode)
t
t
No
Text
Text
over
(exit
the
the
TV
Text
picture
service)
(mix mode) t N
Each
time
you
press
/,
display
changes
cyclically
as
follows:
Each
time
you
press
/,
the
display
changes
cyclically
as
follows:
Teletekst
Teletekst
preko
slike
na
TV-u
(mix
mode)
Bez
teleteksta
(izlaz
iz
teletekst
Each
time
you
press
/,
the
display
changes
cyclically
as
follows:
Each
time
you
press
/,
the
display
changes
cyclically
as
follows:
In
mode:
Displays
Text
broadcast.
qs
2
+/–
–mode:
Volume
InText
Text
Displays
Text
broadcast.
Each
time
you
press
/,
the
display
changes
cyclically
asservice)
follows:
qs qs
2
+/–
–Text
Volume
Text
Text
t
t
Text
Text
over
over
the
the
TV
TV
picture
picture
(mix
(mix
mode)
mode)
t
t
No
No
Text
Text
(exit
(exit
the
the
Text
Text
service)
service)
Text
t
Text
over
the
TV
picture
(mix
mode)
t
No
Text
(exit
the
Text
service)
Text
t
Text
over
the
TV
picture
(mix
mode)
t
No
Text
(exit
the
Text
usluge)
2
+/–
–
Volume
qs
2
+/–
–
Volume
Text
t
over
the
TV
picture
(mix
mode)
t
No
Text
(exit
the
Text
service)
Text
tvolume.
Text
over
the
TV
picture (mix
mode) t No Text
(exit the Text service)
Each
time
you
press
/,
the
asasfollows:
Adjusts
Adjusts
volume.
Each
time
you
press
/,
thedisplay
display
changes
cyclically
follows:
Text
t
Textchanges
over thecyclically
TV
picture
(mix
mode) t No Text (exit the Text se
Adjusts
volume.
Adjusts
volume.
qs
2
2
+/–
+/–
–Volume
–Volume
Volume
qs
2
+/–
–
Volume
qs
2
+/–
– Volume
12qs
Glasnoća
qs
2
+/–
Text
t
Text
over
the
TV
picture
(mix
mode)
t
No
Text
(exit
qs
2
+/–
––Text
Volume
qd
%
––
Mute
Text
t
over
the
TV
picture
(mix
mode)
t
No
Text
(exitthe
theText
Textservice)
service)
qd qd
%
Mute
qs
2
+/–
–
Volume
Adjusts
Adjusts
volume.
volume.
Adjusts
volume.
Adjusts
volume.
%
–
Mute
qd
%
–
Mute
Podešavanje
glasnoće.
Adjusts
volume.
Adjusts
volume.
qs
2
+/–
–
Volume
Press
to
mute
the
sound.
Press
again
to
restore
the
sound.
Press
to
mute
the
sound.
Press
again
to
restore
the
sound.
Adjusts
volume.
qs
2
+/–
–to
Volume
Press
mute
the
sound.
Press
again
to
restore
Press
the
to
sound.
mute
the
sound.
Press
again to restore the s
qd
qd
%
%
–
–
Mute
Mute
qd
%
–
Mute
qd
%
–
Mute
–
Isključenje
zvuka
13
qd
%
–
Mute
Adjusts
volume.
qd
%
– –Mute
qf
"/1
TV
standby
Adjusts
volume.
qf qf
"/1
–
TV
standby
qd
%
–Press
Mute
Press
Press
to
to
mute
mute
the
the
sound.
sound.
Press
again
again
to
to
restore
restore
the
the
sound.
sound.
Press
to
mute
the
sound.
Press
again
to
restore
the
sound.
Press
to
mute
the
sound.
Press
touključenje
restore
sound.
"/1
–
TV
standby
qf
"/1
– the
TV
standby
Press
to
mute
the
sound.
Press
again
toagain
restore
the
sound.
Pritisnite
za
isključenje
zvuka.
Pritisnite
opet
za
zvuka.
Press
to
mute
the
sound.
Press
again
to
restore
the
sound.
qd
%
–
Mute
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
toto
totothe
standby
mode.
Press
toTV
turn
the
TVstandby
onor
or
switch
standby
mode.
Press
totomute
Press
qd
%"/1
–"/1
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
orswitch
switch
tosound.
standby
Press
mode.
toagain
turn to
therestore
TV onthe
or sound.
to switch to standby mod
qf
–
–
TV
TV
standby
standby
qf
"/1
–
standby
qf
"/1
–
TV
qf
"/1
–Mute
TV
standby
14qf
Pripravno
stanje
TV-a
Press
to
mute
the
sound.
Press
again
totorestore
the
sound.
qf
"/1
–
standby
qg
AUDIO
–mute
Dual
Sound
(page
23)
Press
toTV
the
sound.
Press
again
restore
the
sound.
qg qg
AUDIO
–to
Dual
Sound
(page
23)
qf
"/1
–
TV
standby
Press
Press
to
turn
turn
the
the
TV
TV
on
on
or
or
to
to
switch
switch
to
to
standby
standby
mode.
mode.
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
AUDIO
–
Dual
Sound
(page
23)
qg
AUDIO
–
Dual
Sound
(page 23)
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
Press–toTV
turn
the TV onTV-a
or toi switch
to standby
mode.
Pritisnite
zastandby
uključenje
isključenje
u pripravno
stanje.
qf
"/1
Press
to(page
turn
the
TV23)
on or to switch to standby
mode.
qf
"/1
– AUDIO
TV
standby
Continued
qg
AUDIO
AUDIO
–Dual
–
Dual
Dual
Sound
Sound
(page
23)
23)
qg
AUDIO
–––Dual
Dual
(page
23)
qg
–Sound
Dual
Sound
(page
qgqgPress
AUDIO
Sound
(page
23)
Continued
Continued
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
qg
AUDIO
Dual
Sound
(page
23)
15
AUDIO
–
Sound
(str.
23)
Press to turn the TV
or to switch
to standby
mode.
qgonAUDIO
– Dual
Sound
(page 23)
qg
qg AUDIO
AUDIO––Dual
DualSound
Sound(page
(page23)
23)
Continued
Continued
Continued
Continued
Continued
GBSRP
99GB
Continued
9GBGB
9
Continued
GB
GB
Continued 9 9GB
9 GB GB
Continued
Nastavlja
se
99GB 9
99GBGB
– Info
teksta
16
qh
// ––
Info
qh
Info/ /Otkrivanje
/ Text
Text reveal
reveal
information.
Press
the
••• Displays
Prikaz
informacija.
Pritisnite
jednom
za
prikazinformation
informacijaabout
o programu/
Displays
information.
Press once
once to
to display
display
information
about
the programme/
programme/
qh
/input
Info
Text
reveal
are
viewing.
Press
to
the
display
from
qh
//input
––––you
Info
////Text
reveal
gledate.
opetagain
za skidanje
prikaza
ekrana.
qhqhulazu
/ /koji
Text
reveal
–Info
Info
/ Pritisnite
Text
reveal
qh
Info
Text
reveal
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
to remove
remove
thesa
display
from the
the screen.
screen.
••• Displays
Displays
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
the
programme/
In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
a
quiz).
/
–
Info
/
Text
reveal
••qh
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
the
programme/
teletekst
modu:
Otkrivanje
skrivenih
informacija
(npr. odgovori
uthe
kvizu).
Displays
information.
Press
once
information
about
the
programme/
•U
information.
Press
once
todisplay
display
information
programme/
InDisplays
Text mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
toabout
a quiz).
Displays
information.
Press
once
totodisplay
information
about
the
programme/
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
to
remove
the
display
from
the
screen.
•
Displays
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
the
programme/
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
to
remove
the
display
from
the
screen.
qj
//input
f
//G
/you
//are
–––viewing.
Item
Enter
are
Press
again
the
display
from
the
screen.
are
viewing.
Press
toremove
remove
the
display
from
the
screen.
viewing.
Press
again
totoremove
the
display
from
the
screen.
Odabir
stavke
///again
Enter
17
qj F
/g
Item select
select
Enter
Finput
finput
Gyou
gyou
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
aaquiz).
quiz).
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again to remove
the
display
from
the screen.
••••• In
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
InText
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
toaato
•In
In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
aquiz).
quiz).
In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
quiz).
Selects
or adjusts
items.
••• /Confirms
Bira
podešava
stavke.
•/G
Inili
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to a quiz).
qj
/G
/g
//selected
Item
select
Enter
F
f
items.
qj
///g
///g
select
////qh
Enter
F
/ – Info
/ Text
reveal
F
f
G
g
qjqj
/Confirms
/G
/g
select
Enter
//f
/ ––––Item
–Item
Item
select
/ Enter
F
G
F
f
qj
Item
select
Enter
• //f
selected
items.
Potvrđuje
odabranu
stavku.
••• Selects
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
When
playing
a
photo
file:
Press
to
select
previous
Press
g
F
f
G
g
/
/
/
/
–
Item
select
/•Enter
••qj
or
adjusts
items.
information.
Press
once
toselect
display information ab
adjusts
items.
•Selects
Selects
adjusts
items.
When
playing
a photo
file:
Press G
G
toDisplays
select the
the
previous file.
file.
Press
g to
to
select
Selects
ororor
adjusts
items.
Pri
reprodukciji
datoteke
sa fotografijama:
za odabir
prethodne
selected
items.
the
next
•Confirms
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
••••• Confirms
selected
items.
inputPritisnite
you are G
viewing.
Press
again todatoteke.
remove the display fr
Confirms
selected
items.
•Confirms
selected
items.
the
next file.
file.
Confirms
selected
items.
playing
photo
file:
Press
G
to
select
the
previous
file.
Press
g
to
select
music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and
gplaying
za
odabir
datoteke.
•When
Confirms
items.
•••Pritisnite
playing
aselected
file:
Press
GG
previous
file.
Press
gg
•to
In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
• When
When
photo
file:
Press
Gto
select
the
previous
file.
Press
gto
select
•When
playing
a naredne
photo
file:
Press
Gtoselect
to
select
the
previous
file.
Press
gtoselect
to
select
music/video
file:
Press
tothe
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and (e.g. answers to
When
playing
aaaaphoto
photo
file:
Press
select
the
previous
file.
Press
to
select
the
next
file.
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at
the
point
•the
When
playing
a photo file:
Press
to
file.
gwhere
to select
the
next
file.
Pri
reprodukciji
muzičke/video
datoteke:
za
pauzu/pokretanje
reprodukcije.
qj
/GPritisnite
/Gselect
/g/ the
–previous
Item
select
/ Enter
F
f
the
next
file.
next
file.
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at
thePress
point
where
the
next
file.
When
playing
music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and
you
want
to
playback.
the
next
file.
When
playing
aaaamusic/video
Press
to
playback.
Press
and
•Press
Selects
orpause/start
adjusts the
items.
Pritisnite
iplaying
zadržite
G/g
za
brzofile:
premotavanje
unapred/unazad,
zatim
otpustite
dugme
When
music/video
file:
Press
topause/start
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and
When
playing
a music/video
file:
to
the
playback.
Press
andna
you
want
to resume
resume
playback.
When
playing
music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
atatthe
the
point
where
When
playing
aforward/fast
music/video
file:
Press
toselected
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
release
the
button
at
point
where
qk
OPTIONS
• then
Confirms
items.
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
the
point
where
hold
G/g
to
fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at
the
point
where
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at
the
point
where
odakle
želite
da
nastavite
reprodukciju.
qk mestu
OPTIONS
you
want
to
resume
playback.
hold
G/g
to
fastplayback.
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the button
the G
point
wherethe previous fi
you
want
to
Press
to
display
aaresume
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
• When
playing
a photo
file: at
Press
to select
you
want
toresume
resume
playback.
you
want
to
playback.
you
want
to
resume
playback.
Press
to
display
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
18 OPTIONS
you want to vary
resume
playback.
qk
OPTIONS
The
listed
depending
on
input
and
content.
qk
OPTIONS
thecurrent
next
file.
qkqk
OPTIONS
OPTIONS
qk
OPTIONS
The
listedzaoptions
options
varykoja
depending
on the
the
current
input
andpodešenja.
content.
Pritisnite
prikaz
liste
sadrži shortcuts
prečice
dototo
nekih
menija
Press
to
display
list
that
contains
shortcuts
some
setting
menus.
qk
OPTIONS
Press
to
display
aaaalist
that
contains
some
setting
menus.
When
playing
a
music/video
file: Press
to pause/start the
ql
Coloured
buttons
Press
to
display
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
Press
to
display
a
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
Press
to
display
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
qlThe
Coloured
buttons
Navedene
opcije
se
razlikuju
u
zavisnosti
od
trenutnog
ulaza
i
sadržaja.
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
Press
to
display
a
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then release the butto
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
19
Brojčane
tipke
The
listed
options
vary depending on
thewant
current
input and
content.
you
to resume
playback.
ql
Coloured
buttons
ql
Coloured
buttons
w;
–– Subtitle
setting
ql
Coloured
buttons
Coloured
buttons
ql
Coloured
buttons
w;ql
Subtitle
setting
Kad
su
brojčane
tipke
dostupne,
naqk
ekranu
seoperation
pojavljuje
vodič
za upotrebu.
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
ql
Coloured
buttons
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
guide
appears
on
screen.
OPTIONS
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
onthe
the
screen.
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
Press
to
change
theprevoda
subtitle
language
(page 27)
(in digitalguide
modeappears
only).
When
the+/–/
coloured
buttons
are available,
an
operation
on
the screen.
–Subtitle
Podešenje
Press
to
display
a
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to some setting m
w;
–
Subtitle
setting
20
w;
–
setting
wa
PROG/CH
/
w;
setting
–Subtitle
Subtitle
setting
w;
––Subtitle
setting
waw;
PROG/CH
+/–/
/
The
listed
options
vary
depending
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
w;
–change
Subtitle
setting
Pritisnite
zathe
promenu
jezika
prevoda
(str.
27)
(samo
udigital
digitalnom
modu).
Press
to
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
•Press
Selects
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
tochange
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in(in
digital
mode
only).
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
digital
mode
only).on the current input and co
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in
mode
only).
• Press
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
Press to
change
language
(page 27)
(in digital mode only).
ql Coloured
buttons
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
// / subtitle
•PROG/CH
In
Selects
the
21
PROG/CH
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
//the
wawa
+/–/
+/–/
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
• PROG/CH
In Text
Text mode:
mode:
Selects
the next
next (( )) or
or previous
previous (( )) page.
page.
When
the coloured buttons are available, an operation guide ap
••• Selects
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
PROG/CH
+/–/
/or
••wa
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
ws
–
Previous
channel
Odabir
sledećeg
(+)
ili
prethodnog
(–)
kanala.
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
previous
(–)
channel.
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
ws•• InIn•–Text
Previous
channel
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
or
previous
page.
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
Selects
the
next
(w;
((for
–
Subtitle
setting
tomode:
the
previous
channel
or
watched
than
teletekst
modu:
Odabir
sledeće
ili
prethodne
stranice.
• In
InIn
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
or
previous
)page.
page.
•U
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
())))or
) previous
or
previous
) page.
••Returns
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
((( input
or
previous
((( ()))more
page.
Returns
the
previous
channel
or
input
(for
more
than 15
15 seconds).
seconds).
• Prethodni
In to
Text
mode:
Selects
the next
( watched
) or
( subtitle
) page.
Press
to previous
change the
language (page 27) (in digital mo
ws
Previous
channel
ws
channel
kanal
wsws –––––Previous
channel
–Previous
Previous
channel
22
ws
Previous
channel
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
than
15
seconds).
ws
–
Previous
channel
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
than
15
seconds).
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
/
Returns
previous
channel
input
watched
(for
more
than
1515
seconds).
Returns
tothe
the
previous
channel
watched
(for
more
than
seconds).
Returns
toto
previous
channel
ororor
input
watched
more
than
15
seconds).
To
Povratak
nathe
prethodni
gledani
kanal
iliinput
ulaz
(na
više(for
od
15
sekundi).
To change
change the
the Wide
Wide Mode
Mode
Returns to the previous channel or• input
watched
(for
than 15 (–)
seconds).
Selects
the next
(+)more
or previous
channel.
•
In
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
(
) or previous ( ) page.
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
To
change
the Wide
Mode or HDMI (except
For
TV, Video,
Component
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
PC or ws
HDMI–PC
Input (PC
timing)
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
Previous
channel
PC
input)
change moda
the Wide
Mode
ZaTo
promenu
širokog
prikaza slike
PC
input)
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
Returns
to
the
previous
channel or input watched (for more th
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
For
TV,
Video,
Component
oror
HDMI
(except
For
TV,
Video,
Component
HDMI
(except
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
PC
oror
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
PC
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
Za
TV,
Video,
Component
ili
HDMI
(sem
za PC
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in its
its original
original
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
PC
input)
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
PC
input)
PC
input)
PC
input)
PC
input)
pixel
Bars
are
shown
at
ulaz)
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
PC ili HDMI
PCsize.
ulaz
(PC
timing)
PC
input)
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
at the
the top,
top,
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
change
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
its
original
WideZoom*
Zoom* Enlarges
Enlargesthe
thecentre
centreTo
portion
ofthe
thethe Wide Mode
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
its
original
Wide
portion
of
Normal
Displays
the
picture
original
Normal
Displays
the
picture
initsits
original
Normal
Displays
the
picture
ininits
original
bottom,
and
both
sides
for
small
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
ofofthe
Wide
Zoom* Enlarges
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
the
Wide
Zoom*
the
centre
portion
of
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
bottom,
and
both
sides
for
small
the Uvećava
picture
are
to
fillthe
the
Normal
Displays
the
picture
inatat
its
original
centralni
deo
slike.
Ivice
sa
leve i
Wide Zoom*
Enlarges
thestretched
centre
portion
of
the
Prikaz
slike
uare
svojoj
originalnoj
veličini
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
the
top,
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
size.
Bars
shown
top,
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
For
TV,
Video,
(except
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
atthe
the
top,
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
at
the
top,i Input (PC tim
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
atna
the
top,
picture.
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
ofofComponent or HDMI pixel
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
16:9
screen.
PC
or
HDMI
PC
desne
strane
slike
su
razvučene
da
popune
piksela.
Linije
su
prikazane
vrhu,
dnutop,
picture.
16:9
screen.
pixel
size.
Bars
arefor
shown
at the
picture.
The
left andtoto
right
edges
of
bottom,
and
both
sides
for
small
the
picture
are
stretched
fill
the
bottom,
and
both
sides
small
the
picture
are
stretched
fill
the
PC
input)
bottom,
and
both
sides
forfor
small
bottom,
and
both
sides
small
bottom,
and
both
sides
for
small
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
ekran
obe
strane
male
slike.
16:9
formata.
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
bottom,
and both sides
for small
the
picture
are
stretched
fill the
picture.
16:9
screen.
picture.
16:9
screen.
Full
11
Stretches
the
picture
Normal
Displays
the 4:3
4:3
picture
in its
itstooriginal
original
picture.
picture.
16:9
screen.
16:9
screen.
16:9
screen.
Full
Stretches
the original
original
picture to
to fill
fill Displays the pict
Normal
Wide Zoom*
Enlarges the
centre
portion picture.
of
the
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
picture.
16:9
screen.
size. Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
its
original
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
its
original
the screen
vertically,
keeping
its
pixel size. Bars a
picture. The
left
and right edges
of the
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
inits
original
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
initsits
original
Full
1
Stretches
the
original
picture
to
fill
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
original
16:9
screen.
Full
1
Stretches
original
picture
to
fill
Full
Stretches
the
original
picture
Full
Stretches
the
original
picture
tofillfill
Full
11 1
Stretches
the
original
picture
toto
fill
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
16:9
screen.
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
its
original
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
Prikazuje
slike
formata
4:3to
ufill
svojoj
originalsize.
Side
bars
are
shown
the
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
bottom, and both
stretched
to the
fill
the
1
Stretches
the original
picture
to
fill
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fillfill
the
Razvlači
originalnu
sliku
da
popuni
ekran
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
the the picture areFull
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
itsits
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
ratio.
noj
veličini.
sa strane
su prikazane
da
size.
Side Linije
bars are
shown
to fill the
16:9
screen.
16:9
screen.
ratio.
picture.
vertikalno,
zadržavajući
njen
originalni
16:9
screen.
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
16:9
screen.
16:9
screen.
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
16:9
screen.
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
popune16:9
ekran.
Full
Stretches
the
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
16:9 screen.
razmer
horizontalno-do-vertikalnog.
Full
Stretches
the 4:3
4:3 picture
picture horizontally
horizontally
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
ratio.
ratio.
Full
2
Stretches
the
Full
1
picture
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
its
original
to
16:9
screen.
ratio.
ratio. the Full 1Full
ratio.
Full 2
Stretches
picture
1
Stretches the orig
to fill
fill the
thethe
16:9
screen.
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
Full
Stretches
4:3
picture
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
size. Side bars are shown to horizontally
fill ratio.
the
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
the screen vertica
Full
Stretches
the
Full
picture
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
Full
2222 2
Stretches
the
Full
1111picture
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
to
the
16:9
screen.
Razvlači
sliku
4:3
formata
horizontalno
kako
Full
Stretches
the
Full
Full
Stretches
the
Full
1picture
picture
Full
Stretches
the
Full
picture
16:9 screen.
tofill
fill
the
16:9
screen.
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
original horizont
Full 2
Stretches
the
Full
116:9
picture
horizontally
to
fill
the
screen.
topopunio
fill the16:9
16:9ekran.
screen.
bi
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
Razvlači
Full
1
sliku
horizontalno
da
popuni
horizontally
the
16:9
screen.
horizontally
tofillfill
the
16:9
screen.
horizontally
totofill
the
16:9
screen.
ratio.
horizontally
to fill the 16:9 screen.
16:9 ekran.
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
Zoom*
Displays cinemascopic
Full (letter box Stretches the 4:3 picture horizontally
format)
in
correct
format) broadcasts
broadcasts
in the
the
correct
Full
2
• Some
depending
on
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
Some options
options may
may not
not be
be available
available
depending
on the
theStretches the Ful
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box to fill the 16:9• screen.
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
proportions.
PC
proportions.
horizontally to fi
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
boxslike
PC input
input signal.
signal.
format)
broadcasts
in
the
correct
format)
broadcasts
in
the
correct
Prikaz
cinemascopic
(letter
box
format)
format)
broadcasts
correct
format)
broadcasts
inthe
the
correct
format)
broadcasts
ininthe
correct
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
on
the
•••• Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
on
the
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
on
the
•
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
on
the
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
on
the
format)
broadcasts
in
the
correct
u
ispravnim
proporcijama.
proportions.
proportions.
PC
input
signal.
Neke
opcije
biti dostupne
PC
input
signal.
•PC
Some
options
may notneće
be available
depending on the
proportions.
proportions.
proportions.
PC
input
signal.
input
signal.možda
PC
input
signal.
14:9*
Displays
14:9
in
proportions.
input signal.
14:9*
Displays
14:9 broadcasts
broadcasts
in the
the
uPC
zavisnosti
od PC ulaznog signala.
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
correct
As
result,
black
correct proportions.
proportions.
As aain
result,
blackformat) broadcasts in the correct
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
the
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
inthe
the
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
border
areas
are
visible
on
screen.
• Some options may not be availa
border
areas
are
visible
on
the
screen.
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
Prikaz
slike
formata
14:9
u
ispravnim
correct
proportions.
As
result,
black
proportions.
correct
proportions.
As
aaaaresult,
black
PC input signal.
correct
proportions.
AsAs
result,
black
correct
proportions.
a vide
result,
black
correct
proportions.
As
result,
black
proporcijama.
Na
ekranu
se
i
crne
correct
proportions.
Asthe
a result,
black
border
areas
are
visible
on
the
screen.
border
areas
are
visible
on
screen.
border
areas
are
visible
on
the
screen.
border
areas
are
visible
on
the
screen.
border
areas
are
visible
on
the
screen.
pruge.
border areas are visible on the screen.
** Parts
14:9* may
Parts of
of the
the top
top and
and bottom
bottom of
of the
the picture
picture
may be
be cut
cut Displays 14:9 broadcasts in the
off.
correct proportions. As a result, black
off.
of
the
top
and
bottom
of
the
picture
may
be
cut
••Parts
You
cannot
select
“Normal”
or
“14:9”
for
HD
signal
****Parts
of
top
and
bottom
of
picture
may
be
cut
Parts
ofthe
the
top
and
bottom
ofthe
the
picture
may
be
cut
*Parts
of
the
top
and
bottom
of
the
picture
may
be
cutborder areas are visible on the screen.
Parts
of
the
top
and
bottom
of
the
picture
may
be
cut
You
cannot
select
“Normal”
or
“14:9”
HD
signal
Gornji
ithe
donji
slike
mogu
dafor
budu
isečeni.
sourceofpictures.
** Parts
topdelovi
and bottom
of
the picture
may
be cut
off.
off.
off.
off.source pictures.
off.
You
cannot
select
“Normal”
or or
“14:9”
for
HD
signal
•••• You
cannot
select
“Normal”
or
for
HD
signal
You
cannot
select
“Normal”
“14:9”
forfor
HD
signal
•off.
You
cannot
select
“Normal”
“14:9”
HD
signal
You
cannot
select
“Normal”
oror“14:9”
“14:9”
for
HD
signal
source
pictures.
source
pictures.
•source
You
cannot
select “Normal”
or “14:9”
for HD
Ne
možete
izabrati
“Normal”
ili “14:9”
zasignal
source
pictures.
pictures.
source
pictures.
source
pictures.
HD signal izvornih slika. * Parts of the top and bottom of the picture may be cut
off.
• You cannot select “Normal” or “14:9” for HD signal
source pictures.
GB SRP
10
GB
1010
GB
GB
10
GB
GB
10
GB
10
10
10
10 GB
Overview
Overviewofofthe
theTV
TVbuttons
buttonsand
andindicators
indicators
Pregled
tipki
TV-a
i
indikatora
Overview
of
the
TV
buttons
and
indicators
Overview
of
the
buttons
and
indicators
Overview
ofthe
the
TVTV
buttons
and
indicators
11
11
– Power
– Power
Overview
of
the
TV
buttons
and
indicators
Overview
of the
TV
buttons
and
indicators
Overview
of
and
indicators
Overview
of
the
TV
buttons
and
indicators
Overview
ofthe
theTV
TVbuttons
buttons
and
indicators
Overview
of
TV
buttons
and
indicators
turn
to turn
thethe
TVTV
on on
or to
or switch
to switch
to standby
to standby
mode.
mode.
1 1Press
–Press
Napajanje
Overview
of
the
TV
buttons
and
indicators
Overview
of
the
TV
buttons
and
indicators
1
–1
Power
1
–toPower
1
1
–
Power
1
1
––Power
Power
• turn
To
•to
To
disconnect
disconnect
the
TV
TV
from
from
the
AC
AC
power
power
1 1
–1
Power
Press
to
the
TV
onthe
or
toili
switch
tothe
standby
mode.
Pritisnite
da
uključite
TV
da
prebacite
na
pripravno
1
–
1
1
Power
Press
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
1
1
–
Power
1
1
–––
Press
toturn
turn
the
TVto
on
or
tofrom
switch
tostandby
standby
mode.
Overview
indicators
Press
to
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
mode.
1
1
Power
1Press
1
Power
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
switch
to
standby
mode.
completely,
completely,
pull
pull
the
the
plug
plug
from
from
the
the
ACpower
AC
power
power
•Power
To
disconnect
the
TV
the
AC
power
Overview of
of the
the TV
TV buttons
buttons and
and Press
indicators
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
to
standby
mode.
Press
to
the
TV
on
or
toswitch
switch
to
standby
mode.
•turn
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
AC
stanje.
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
AC
power
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
• •to
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
AC
power
outlet.
outlet.
• Press
To
disconnect
TV
from
the
AC
power
completely, pull the plug from the AC power
Overview
Overview of
Operating the TV
Operating the TV
Operating the TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
theTV
TV
Operating
the
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating
the
TV
Operating the TV
• •To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
AC
power
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
AC
power
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
•completely,
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
AC
power
Kako
biste
uthe
potpunosti
isključili
TV
prijem1
1
Power
disconnect
TV
from
the
AC
power
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
AC
power
••To
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
AC
power
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
outlet.
1 completely,
1 •––•completely,
Power
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
outlet.
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
2
2
CH
CH
+/–/
+/–/
/
/
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
outlet.
nik,
odspojite
utikač
iz
utičnice.
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
outlet.
outlet.
Pressoutlet.
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
outlet.
outlet.
• •CH
Selects
•To
Selects
next
(+)
orfrom
previous
or previous
(–)power
(–)
channel.
channel.
disconnect
the(+)
TV
the AC
outlet.
2
CH
/thethe
outlet.
outlet.
2 PROG
2
+/–/
/next
• +/–/
To
the TV from the AC power
2
+/–/
2
CH
+/–/
/// next
•Selects
In
TV
Indisconnect
TV
menu:
menu:
Moves
Moves
through
through
the
options
options
up (up () or) or
pull
the
plug
fromthe
the
AC
power
2 CH
+/–/
/•completely,
•CH
the
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
2
CH
+/–/
/
2
CH
+/–/
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC power
2CH
CH
+/–/
/next
••CH
Bira
sledeći
(+)
ili
(–)
kanal.
+/–/
/((+)
Selects
the
next
(+)prethodni
orprevious
previous
(–)
channel.
down
down
(
).
).
2
+/–/
/
Selects
the
(+)
or
(–)
channel.
2
+/–/
/
•2
Selects
the
next
or
previous
(–)
channel.
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(up )( or ) or
outlet.
•••••CH
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
• TV
In TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
outlet.
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
In
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
)or
or dole
U
TV
meniju:
Kreće
se
kroz
opcije
gore
ili
•••••In
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
((( ) )or
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
••Selects
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
• In TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(channel.
)up
or
down
(the
).
•
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
down
(
).
3
3
2
2
+/–/
+/–/
/
/
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
( ) )or
)or
or
down
(
).
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(
2
CH
+/–/
/
down
(
).
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(
)
or
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(
)
or
down
(
).
2
CH
+/–/
down
).).
down
( (the
•down
Increases
• ((Increases
(+)
(+)
or decreases
or
decreases
(–)(–)
(–)
thechannel.
the
volume.
volume.
down
3 •3
2
+/–/
//).).).).
down
Selects
next
(+)
or
previous
(
down
(
2
+/–/
/
••2
Selects
the
next
(+)
or previous
(–)volume.
channel.
+/–/
/ (+)
33
•Increases
In
• Increases
TV
In
menu:
Moves
through
through
the
the
options
options
right
( () )
3
2
+/–/
//menu:
3 2
+/–/
or
decreases
(–)
the
••2
In
menu:
through
the
options
up
((right
) or
3
2
+/–/
//TV
3
+/–/
•/TV
(+)
orMoves
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
3
2
+/–/
/(+)(Moves
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
2
+/–/
•2
Increases
or).
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
or
left
or
left
).
Increases
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
3
+/–/
/((+)
3
+/–/
/(+)
•3
Increases
(+)
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
() or)( )
Povećava
ili
smanjuje
(–)
glasnoću.
down
(
).
••••••2
Increases
(+)
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
Increases
(+)
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
Increases
(+)
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
down
(Moves
).(+)
orthrough
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
In
TVmenu:
menu:
Moves
through
options
right
•••••In
In
TV
Moves
through
the
options
Increases
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
••Increases
Increases
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
• In TV
menu:
thekroz
options
right
( right
) ( ((( ) )))
or
left
(/ –(+)
).((+)
•4
TV
Moves
through
options
right
U
TV
meniju:
Kreće
se
opcije
desno
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
or
left
).
/menu:
Input
select
select
/ the
Enter
/the
Enter
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
•2
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
( ((( ) )))
or
left
(menu:
).–
3
+/–/
// ).Input
or
left
(
•or
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
options
right
••4
In
TV
Moves
through
the
options
right
or
left
(or
).
3
2
+/–/
left
(Displays
).).(+)
left
).).the
•levo
•left
the
connected
connected
equipment
equipment
listlist
andand
selects
selects
or
left
4 •ili
/Displays
select
/ Enter
or
left
(–((((Input
Increases
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
or
).
or
left
).
4
/
–
Input
select
/
Enter
Increases
(+)source
orselect
decreases
(–)13).
the volume.
4
/TV
–Input
Input
select
/equipment
Enter
the
input
input
source
(page
(page
13).
4
/Input
–the
/Enter
Enter
4 4
/ ••• –In
select
/connected
Enter
Displays
the
connected
list and
selects
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
(
))
44
–
Odabir
ulaza
/
Enter
/
–
Input
select
/
4
/
–
Input
select
/
Enter
•
Displays
the
equipment
list
and
selects
/•input
–TV
Input
select
Enter
In
menu:
Moves
through
themenu
options
right
( and
/ /left
–TV
select
/13).
Enter
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
•the
In
In
menu:
menu:
Selects
Selects
the
the
menu
or
option,
or
option,
and
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
4
–connected
Input
select
/equipment
4• ••••Displays
/TV
Input
select
//Enter
Enter
•4
Displays
the
equipment
list
and
selects
source
(page
or
((–Input
).
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
Displays
the
connected
list
and
selects
the
input
source
(page
13).
•
Prikazuje
listu
spojene
opreme
i
bira
izvor
ulaza
•
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
or
left
).
•
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
the
input
source
(page
13).
confirms
confirms
the
the
setting.
setting.
input
source
(page
13).
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
• the
Displays
the
connected
equipment
listoption,
and
selects (str.
the input
source
(page
13).
•the
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or option,
and
source
(page
13).
the
input
source
(page
13).
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
the
input
source
(page
13).
input
source
(page
13).
• the
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
oroption,
option,
andand
//•input
––menu:
Input
select
//13).
Enter
•13).
In
TV
Selects
the
menu
or
and
the
input
source
(page
13).
the
input
source
(page
• 4
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
option,
and
confirms
the
setting.
4•5
Input
select
Enter
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
option,
and
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
option,
and
confirms
the
setting.
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
option,
and
•••••••5
In
TV
menu:
the
menu
oror
option,
and
confirms
theSelects
setting.
Displays
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
confirms
the
setting.
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
option,
and
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
option,
and
confirms
the
setting.
U
TV
meniju:
Bira
meni
ili
opciju
i potvrđuje
•confirms
Displays
the
connected
equipment
the
setting.
confirms
setting.
Displays
Displays
or
cancels
or
cancels
the13).
the
menu.
menu. list and selects
confirms
the
setting.
55
confirms
the
setting.
the
input
source
(page
confirms
the
setting.
confirms
the
setting.
the input
source
(page
13).
5 •podešenje.
5
5 5
Displays
orRemote
cancels
the
menu.
In
TV
menu:
the
menu
or
and
5
Displays
or Selects
cancels
the
menu.
6
6
– Remote
–
sensor
sensor
/ Light
/ Light
sensor
sensor
5
•Displays
In
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or option,
option,
and
5
orcancels
cancels
the
menu.
5
Displays
or
the
menu.
5
5
Displays
or TV
cancels
thesetting.
menu.
confirms
the
Displays
or
cancels
the
menu.
Displays
or
cancels
the
menu.
Receives
Receives
IR
IR
signals
signals
from
from
the
the
remote.
remote.
Displays
or
cancels
the
menu.
confirms
the
setting.
6Displays
–
Remote
sensor
/
Light
sensor
or
cancels
the
menu.
Displays
cancels
the
menu.
Displays
or
cancels
theprikaz
menu.
6
– or
Remote
sensor
/menija.
Light
sensor
Prikazuje
ili
otkazuje
6
–
Remote
sensor
/
Light
sensor
Senses
Senses
room
room
light
level
and
and
adjusts
adjusts
thethe
screen
screen
6
––Remote
Remote
sensor
/Light
Light
sensor
6 6
– Remote
sensor
/light
Light
sensor
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
5
––
sensor
/level
sensor
6
Remote
sensor
/Light
Light
sensor
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
6Receives
–brightness
Remote
sensor
Light
sensor
5
6
sensor
/the
sensor
Receives
IRcancels
signals
from
the
remote.
6
–
Senzor
daljinskog
upravljača
/ Senzor
brightness
accordingly.
accordingly.
Do
not
not
put
put
anything
anything
over
over
thethe
6
–Senses
Remote
sensor
/Do
sensor
IR
signals
from
remote.
6
–Remote
Remote
sensor
//Light
Light
sensor
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
Displays
or
the
menu.
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
Displays
or
cancels
the
menu.
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
sensor,
sensor,
doing
doing
so
may
so
may
affect
affect
its
its
function.
function.
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
overover
the the
svetla
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
putsensor
anything
overthe
the
6
– Remote
sensor
// Light
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
over
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
brightness
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
6brightness
Remote
sensor
Light
sensor
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
Prima
signal
sa
daljinskog
upravljača.
7
7–accordingly.
/ infracrveni
/accordingly.
–may
Picture
–so
Picture
Off
Off
/not
Timer
/remote.
Timer
indicator
indicator
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
brightness
accordingly.
Do
put
anything
over
the
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
sensor,
doing
may
affect
its
function.
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
sensor,
doing
so
affect
its
function.
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
Lights
up
in
green
in
green
when
you
you
select
select
“Picture
Off”
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
Opaža
nivo
osvetljenosti
prostorije
i“Picture
uscreen
skladu
saOff”
tim
7sensor,
/ Lights
Picture
Off
/when
Timer
indicator
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
Senses
room
light
level
and
the
sensor,
so
may
affect
its
function.
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
7
/––doing
–up
Picture
Off
/adjusts
Timer
indicator
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
7
/
Picture
Off
/
Timer
indicator
(page
30).
30).
7
//Lights
–up
Picture
Off
/Do
Timer
indicator
7 7
/ brightness
–/ (page
Picture
Off
/Off
Timer
indicator
Lights
in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
accordingly.
not
put
anything
over
the
prilagođava
svetlinu
ekrana.
Ne
pokrivajte
senzor
–
Picture
/
Timer
indicator
7
–
Picture
Off
/
Timer
indicator
up
in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
7
/
–
Picture
Off
/
Timer
indicator
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
7
/ in
–30).
Picture
Off
/ /Timer
indicator
Lights
up
inwhen
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off” jer
7
/(page
––in
Picture
Off
Timer
indicator
Lights
up
in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
7Lights
/ up
Picture
Off
/you
Timer
indicator
Lights
up
you
select
“Picture
Off” Off”
(page
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Lights
up
in
green
when
select
“Picture
Off”
30).
8
8
1time
1
–green
Standby
–in
Standby
indicator
indicator
mu
možete
poremetiti
funkciju.
Lights
up
in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
(page
30).
Lights
up
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
(page
30).
Lights
up
in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
Lights
up
in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
(page(page
30).
30).
(page
30).
Lights
Lights
up up
in red
inindicator
red
when
when
thethe
TV
TV
is
in
is standby
in standby
mode.
mode.
(page
30).
8
1
–1
Standby
30).
7
/
–
Picture
Off
/
Timer
indicator
7 (page
–
Isključenje
slike
/
Indikator
tajmera
(page
30).
(page
30).
8
–
Standby
indicator
7
–
Picture
Offthe
/ Timer
indicator
8
1–/–Standby
Standby
indicator
of the TV buttons and
indicators
8
1
indicator
8 1
–
Standby
indicator
Lights
up
in
red
when
TV
is
in
standby
mode.
Lights
up
in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
8
1
–
Standby
indicator
8
1
indicator
Lights
upgreen
inindicator
red
when
the
TV
in standby
mode.
Zasvetli
kada
izaberete
“Picture
Off”
(str.
30).
9
9
"Standby
Power
–upzeleno
Power
8
1
–Standby
Standby
indicator
Lights
up
in
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
8
1
–"–
indicator
Lights
in
red
when
the
TV
isin
inis
standby
mode.
Lights
up
in
red
when
the
TV
standby
mode.
8
1
––
indicator
8
1
–Standby
Standby
indicator
Lights
up
in
red
when
the
TV
isTV
in
standby
mode.mode.
(page
30).
Lights
up
in
red
when
the
isisis
standby
Lights
up
red
when
the
TV
isin
in
standby
mode.
Lights
•–
Lights
up
up
in
green
in green
when
when
the
the
TV
TV
is turned
is mode.
turned
on.on.
Lights
up
in
red
when
the
TV
is
in
standby
mode.
(page
30).
9
"Lights
–• –
indicator
Indikator
pripravnog
up
inin
red
when
the
TV
instanja
standby
81Lights
1
–Power
Power
up
in
red
when
the
TV
is
in
standby
mode.
Lights
up
in
red
when
the
TV
is
in
standby
mode.
9
"
Power
indicator
9
"––•Lights
Power
indicator
Flashes
•indicator
Flashes
while
while
the
the
remote
remote
isTV
being
isTV
operated.
operated.
Power
indicator
9 "9
–9
Power
up
in
green
when
isbeing
on.mode.
Press
to
turn
the
TVje
on
orwhen
tothe
switch
to
standby
8
––
Standby
indicator
"""1
–
indicator
9
"•–
–Power
Power
indicator
Svetli
crveno
kad
TV
prijemnik
uturned
pripravnom
•Power
Lights
up
in
green
the
is turned
9
–
indicator
8
1
Standby
indicator
Power
indicator
Lights
up
in
green
when
the
TV
isAC
turned
on. on. stanju.
•Lights
up
in
green
when
the
TV
is
turned
on.
9
Power
indicator
9
""–Lights
–
Power
indicator
•9
Lights
up
in
green
when
the
TV
isTV
turned
on.
•"•Lights
Flashes
while
thewhen
remote
being
operated.
up
in
red
when
the
TV
is
in
standby
mode.
•
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
power
•
up
in
green
the
is
turned
on.
•
Lights
up
in
green
when
the
TV
is
turned
on.
•
Flashes
while
the
remote
is
being
operated.
9 ••ILights
–
Indikator
napajanja
•
Lights
up
in
green
when
the
TV
is
turned
on.
up
in
red
when
the
TV
is
in
standby
mode.
Lights
up
in
green
when
the
TV
is
turned
on.
•
Flashes
while
the
remote
is
being
operated.
while
the
remote
being
operated.
Lights
up
in
green
the
TV
is
turned
on.
• Flashes
Lights
up
in
green
when
the
TVoperated.
is
turned
on.
• Flashes
while
the
remote
iswhen
being
operated.
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC power
•• ••Flashes
while
the
remote
isis
being
Flashes
while
the
remote
is
being
operated.
•Flashes
Flashes
while
the
remote
is
being
operated.
while
the
remote
being
operated.
9
Power
indicator
•Flashes
Make
• outlet.
Make
sure
sure
that
that
the
the
TV
isis
completely
completely
turned
turned
off off
before
before
Svetli
zeleno
dok
je
TVTV
prijemnik
uključen.
while
the
remote
isis
being
operated.
Flashes
while
the
remote
being
operated.
9 "•"••––
Power
indicator
•••• Treperi
Lights
up
in
green
when
the
TV
is
turned
on.
unplugging
unplugging
the
the
AC
AC
power
power
cord.
cord.
Unplugging
Unplugging
the the
ACAC
the TV buttons and indicators
Make
sure
that
the
TV
is
completely
turned
off
before
dok
se
koristi
daljinski
upravljač.
Lights
up
in
green
when
the
TV
is
turned
on.
•
Make
sure
that
the
TV
is
completely
turned
off
before
•
Make
sure
that
the
TV
is
completely
turned
off
before
power
power
cord
cord
while
while
the completely
the
TVis
TV
is
turned
isUnplugging
turned
onbefore
may
onoff
may
cause
cause
the the
Flashes
while
the
remote
being
operated.
Make
sure
that
the
TV
turned
before
unplugging
the
power
cord.
the
AC
• Make
sure
that
the
TV
isAC
completely
turned
off
2• •••CH
+/–/
/that
sure
that
the
TV
isisislit
completely
turned
before
Flashes
while
the
remote
is
being
operated.
unplugging
the
AC
cord.
Unplugging
the
Make
sure
the
TV
is
completely
turned
off
before
•Make
Make
sure
that
the
TV
ispower
completely
turned
off
before
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
AC
• •Make
sure
that
the
TV
completely
turned
off
before
indicator
indicator
to
remain
to
remain
or
lit
may
or
may
cause
cause
theoff
the
TV
TV
to
to AC
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
AC
power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
cause
the
1 1
–
Make
sure
that
the
TV
isis
completely
turned
off
before
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
•Power
Make
sure
that
the
TV
completely
turned
off
before
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
power
cord
while
the
TV
isUnplugging
turned
onAC
may
cause
the
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
the
AC
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
AC
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
AC
power
cord
while
the
TV
iscord.
turned
on
may
cause
the
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
AC
malfunction.
malfunction.
power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
cause
the
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
power•power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
cause
the
unplugging
the
AC
power
Unplugging
the
AC
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
AC
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(the
)athe
or
cord
while
the
TV
is
on
may
cause
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
power
cord
while
the
TV
isturned
on
may
cause
the
power
cord
while
the
TV
isturned
turned
on
may
cause
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
cause
the
TV
to
power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
cause
the
z
z
•malfunction.
The
• indicator
The
CH
CH
+while
button
+
button
has
has
amay
tactile
aturned
tactile
dot.
dot.
Use
Use
itoff
asitbefore
athe
as
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
Make
sure
that
the
TV
is
completely
turned
power
cord
the
TV
is
on
may
cause
the
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
cause
the pre
Proverite
da
li
je
TV
prijemnik
potpuno
isključen
•••• indicator
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
the
AC
power
down
(
).
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
malfunction.
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
Make
sure
that
the
TV
is
completely
turned
off
before
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
malfunction.
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
reference
reference
when
when
operating
operating
the the
TV.TV.
down ( ).
• Displays the connected equipment list and selects
source (page 13).
3 2 +/–/the input
/
Operating the TV
• In TV(+)
menu:
Selects the
or option, and
• Increases
or decreases
(–) menu
the volume.
the setting.
• In TVconfirms
menu: Moves
through the options right ( )
5or left ( ).
4
or cancels
menu.
/Displays
– Input
selectthe
/ Enter
•6Displays
the
connected
equipment
and selects
– Remote sensor / Lightlistsensor
the input source (page 13).
Receives IR signals from the remote.
• In Senses
TV menu:
Selects
the menu
or option,
room
light level
and adjusts
the and
screen
confirms
the accordingly.
setting.
brightness
Do not put anything over the
5
sensor, doing so may affect its function.
Displays
the menu.
7
/ or cancels
– Picture
Off / Timer indicator
6
up insensor
green when
you select
“Picture Off”
–Lights
Remote
/ Light
sensor
(pageIR30).
Receives
signals from the remote.
Senses
light level
and adjusts the screen
8 1room
– Standby
indicator
brightness accordingly. Do not put anything over the
Lights up in red when the TV is in standby mode.
sensor, doing so may affect its function.
7
Operating the TV
malfunction.
z z
•malfunction.
The
CH CH
+to
button
has
dot.
Use
itTV
asit
atoas AC
unplugging
the
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
indicator
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
to
malfunction.
indicator
topull
remain
litahas
ortactile
may
cause
the
TV
• The
+ AC
button
a tactile
dot.
Use
anapajanja
completely,
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
malfunction.
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
napajanja.
Odspajanje
kabla
malfunction.
z •odspajanja
•malfunction.
The
CH
button
has
atactile
tactile
dot.
Use
itasas
a AC
z
The
CH
button
has
atactile
dot.
Use
ititas
aathe
power
cord
while
the
TV
isthe
turned
on
the
reference
when
TV.
z •z
The
+
button
has
a operating
tactile
dot.
Use
itUse
as
amay
malfunction.
3
2
+/–/
/+kabla
malfunction.
•• •CH
The
CH
++++button
has
aoperating
dot.
it
reference
when
the
TV.
z
The
CH
button
has
atactile
tactile
dot.
Use
asacause
outlet.
power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
cause
the
z
•
The
CH
+
button
has
a
tactile
dot.
Use
it
as
a indikator
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
z
The
CH
button
has
a
dot.
Use
it
as
a
je
TV
uključen
može
dovesti
do
toga
da
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
z
••reference
The
CH
+
button
has
a
tactile
dot.
Use
it
as
a
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
z dok
The
CH
+
button
has
a
tactile
dot.
Use
it
as
a
Increases
(+)
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
when
operating
TV.
reference
operating
the
TV.
indicator
towhen
remain
lit or the
may
cause
the TV to
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
malfunction.
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
(
)
ostane
uključen
ili
do
kvara
TV-a.
2 CH +/–/
/
z
• malfunction.
The
CHnext
has
a tactile(–)
dot.channel.
Use it as a
or left
( +++button
).(+)
•zSelects
the
orispupčenje.
previous
The
CH
button
has
a tactile dot.
Use it as
akao referentnu
•• Tipka
CH
ima
Koristite
je
reference
when operating
the options
TV.
•4Intačku
TV
menu:
Moves
through
reference
when operating
the
TV. up ( ) or
TV prijemnikom.
/ dok
– upravljate
Input
select
/the
Enter
11 SRP
GB GB
1111
9/ " ––Power
indicator
GB GB
Picture
Off
/
Timer
indicator
11
GB
11
• Lights up in green when the TV is turned GB
11GBGB
Lights up in green when you select “Picture Off”
GB
11 on.11
Using Optional
Upotreba
dodatneEquipment
opreme
Connecting
optional
equipment
Spajanje
dodatne
opreme
You can connect
wide range
of optional
equipment
to your
Možete
spojitiaširok
spektar
dodatne
opreme
naTV.
vaš TV prijemnik.
DVD
Home
Kućni
Audio
theatre Audio
bioskop
system
system sistem
DVD
player
uređaj
withsa
KamHDMI
HDMI
korder
izlazom
Camcorder
output
PCPC
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
(HDMI- Disk
(HDMIDisc
output) plejer
izlaz)
player
Digitalna
video
Digital
still
kamera
camera
Kamkorder
Camcorder
USB
storage
USB uređaj
media
S VHS/
S VHS/ Hi8/DVC
Hi8/DVC
kamkorder
camcorder
Opremagame
za video
Video
igrice
equipment
DVD
DVD
plejer
player
Video rekorder
VCR
Slušalice
Headphones
PC
PC
Hi-Fiaudio
audio
Hi-Fi
oprema
equipment
Hi-Fiaudio
audio
equipment
Hi-Fi
oprema
sa
with optical
input
optičkim
audioaudio
ulazom
SRP
12 GB
12
DVD uređaj
DVD
player
sa komponentnim
with
component
izlazom
output
1 – when
Power
Lights up1
in green
you select “Picture Off”
(page 30). Press to turn the TV on or to switch to standby mode.
• To disconnect the TV from the AC power
8 1 – Standby indicator
completely, pull the plug from the AC power
Lights up in red when
the TV is in standby mode.
outlet.
Viewing pictures from the c
Gledanje
• Lights up
in•slika
green
when
TV
on.
Turnabout
on thethe
connected
equipment, then press
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
Displays
information.
Press
once to display
information
programme/
Selects
the• the
next
(+)isorturned
previous
(–)
channel.
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
• Flashes while
the
remote
being
operated.
the desired
input
source, then press . (The high
you
are viewing.
Press
to remove the display
from the
screen.
• In
TV
menu:isinput
Moves
through
the options
upagain
( ) or
afterPritisnite
pressing
.)
the input source is set
F /f
Uključite
opremu,
a ).•zatim
pritisnite
prikaz
liste
spojene
opreme.
odabir
Inthen
Text
mode:
Reveals
information
(e.g.
answers
to alist.
quiz).
down
(equipment,
Fza
fFF
Turn
on the
connected
equipment,
press
/ /za
display
the the
connected
equipment
Press
/When
to
Turn
onspojenu
the
connected
then
press
/tohidden
display
theconnected
connected
equipment
list.
Press
/fselect
select
Turn
on
the
connected
equipment,
then
press
totodisplay
equipment
list.
Press
/f
totoselect
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
(page
29),without
that
input
isoperation
greyed
out in the list.
the
desired
input
source,
then
press
.
(The
highlighted
item
is
selected
if
2
seconds
pass
any
F
f
G
g
qj
/
/
/
/
–
Item
select
/
Enter
željenog
ulaznog
izvora,
zatim
pritisnite
.
(Označena
stavka
se
bira
ako
prođe
2
sekunde
bez
bilo
kakve
radnje
the desired input source, then press . (The highlighted item is selected if 2 seconds pass without any operation
9 " – Power
2 indicator
CH +/–/qh /
– Info / Text
reveal
sa / spojene
opreme
Operating the TV
Make sure
that
the
TV is
completely
offhighlighted
before
the• desired
input
source,
then
press turned
. (The
item is selected if 2 seconds pass without any operation
2When
+/–/
after
pressing
/fFF
.)
the/je(+)
input
source
ispodešen
set
to
“Skip”
in the
“Video
Labels”
the“AV
“AV
Set-up”
menu
F3
•the
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
posle
pritiska
na
).)Kada
ulazni
izvor
na
“Skip”
u the
“Video
Labels”
uunder
meniju
Set-up”
unplugging
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
AC
after
pressing
/f
When
the
input
source
set
to
“Skip”
in
the
“Video
Labels”
under
the
“AV
menu
•the
Increases
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
after
pressing
/f
.)
When
input
source
isis
set
to
“Skip”
in
“Video
Labels”
“AV
Set-up”
menu
Turn
on
the
connected
equipment,
then
press
/
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list.
Press
/fto
toselect
select the connecte
Turn
on
the
connected
equipment,
then
press
/
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list.the
Press
/Set-up”
toF
select
F
fthe
z
•under
Press
/ Press
on
TV
display
Turn
on
the
connected
equipment,
then
press
/
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list.
/f
F
•
Confirms
selected
items.
(page
29),
that
input
is
greyed
out
in
the
list.
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
cause
the
(page
29),
that
input
is
greyed
out
in
the
list.
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
(
)
29),
taj ulaz
je source,
označen
sivom
bojom
na
listi.
(page
29),
that
input
is greyed
out
in
the
list.
F/f
to
select
the
desired
input source. Then wai
the
desired
input
source,
then
press
.
(The
highlighted
item
is
selected
if
2
seconds
pass
without
any
operation
the(str.
desired
input
source,
then
press
.
(The
highlighted
item
is
selected
if
2
seconds
pass
without
any
operation
the
desired
input
then
press
.
(The
highlighted
item
is
selected
if
2
seconds
pass
without
any
operation
•
When
playing
a
photo
file:
Press
G
to
select
the
previous
file.
Press
g
to
select
indicator to remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
( toinput
).display
after
pressing
.)left
When
the
input
source
isset
settoto“Skip”
“Skip”
in
the
“Video
Labels”
under
the“AV
“AV
Set-up”
menu
f
after
//f.)FF
When
the
source
is setisto
“Skip”
in list
theinand
“Video
Labels”
under
the
“AV
Set-up”
menu
Fthe
pressing
/f/or
.)on
When
the
input
the
“Video
Labels”
under
the
Set-up”
z after
•pressing
Press
on
the
TV
thesource
connected
equipment
select
the desired
input
source.
You
can
also
press
the
next
file.
Turn
on
connected
equipment,
then
press
/equipment
to display
the
connected
equipment
list.
Press
/also
to
select
Falso
fmenu
z
Press
thegreyed
TV
display
theconnected
connected
list
and
select
thedesired
desired
input
source.
You
can
press
z
••malfunction.
Press
/ /is
on the
TV
toto
display
the
list
and
select
the
input
source.
You
can
press
(page
29),
that
input
is
out
in
the
list.
(page
29),
that
input
greyed
out
in
thein
list.
F/f
to
select
the
desired
input
source.
Then
wait
for 2equipment
seconds
toPress
display
the
selected
input
source.
29),
that
input
is
greyed
out
the
list.
When
playing
a
music/video
file:
to
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and
Jacks/
Description
z(page
•
The
CH
+
button
has
a
tactile
dot.
Use
it
as
a
•
Pritisnitre
na
TV
prijemniku
za
prikaz
liste
spojene
opreme
i
izaberite
željeni
ulazni
izvor.
Takođe
4
/
–
Input
select
/
Enter
F/f
to
select
the
desired
input
source.
Then
wait
for
2
seconds
to
display
the
selected
input
source.
the desired
inputthe
source,
then
press
.Then
(Thewait
highlighted
itemfrom
selected
ifequipment
2 connected
seconds
withoutequipment
any operation
F/f
to select
desired
input
source.from
for 2 seconds
toisdisplay
the
selected
input pass
source.
Viewing
pictures
the
connected
Viewing
pictures
the
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
hold
G/g to
fast forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at the
point
where
•FDisplays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
Input
symbol
on
screen
možete
pritisnuti
za
odabir
željenog
ulaznog
izvora.
Zatim
sačekajte
2
sekunde
za
prikaz
željenog
ulaznog
after
pressing
/
.)
When
the
input
source
is
set
to
“Skip”
in
the
“Video
Labels”
under
the
“AV
Set-up”
menu
f
z
•
Press
/
on
the
TV
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list
and
select
the
desired
input
source.
You
can
also
press
z •zPress
display
the
connected
equipment
list and
the desired
input input
source.
You can
• Press/ on
/ the
onTV
thetoTV
toyou
display
the
connected
equipment
listselect
and select
the desired
source.
Youalso
canpress
also press
want
resume
playback.
the
input
source
(page
13).
Jacks/
Description
(page
29),
input
isinput
greyed
out
in to
the
list.
izvora.
F/f
select
thedesired
input
source.
Then
wait
for2equipment,
2seconds
seconds
todisplay
display
theselected
selected
input
source.
Jacks/
Description
F/f
to
select
the
desired
source.
Then
wait
for
2option,
seconds
to the
display
the press
selected
input
source.
Jacks/
Description
F/f
totothat
select
the
input
source.
Then
wait
for
input
source.
Turn
on
the
connected
equipment,
then
press
/and
totodisplay
the
connected
Press Fequipment
/fConnect
to selectto
Turn
on
the
connected
then
/ HDMI
toequipment
display
thelist.
list.
Viewing
pictures
from
connected
equipment
A
IN
1 or
2connected
thePrH
•screen
In
TVdesired
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
qk
OPTIONS
Input
symbol
on
the desired
input
source,
then
pressinput
. (The
highlighted
item .to
is(The
selected
if 2 menus.
seconds
pass
without
operation
Inputsymbol
symbol
on
screen
the
desired
source,
then shortcuts
press
highlighted
item
is
selected
if also
2any
seconds
withou
Input
on
screen
confirms
the
setting.
Press
to
display
aconnected
list
that
contains
some
setting
digitalpass
video
and
z
•
Press
/
on
the
TV
to
display
the
equipment
list
and
select
the
desired
input
source.
You
can
press
Priključnice/
Opis
after
pressing
When
the
input
source
isIN
set21 to
“Skip”
in
theto
“Video
under
the
“AV
Set-up”
menu
F/on
f.)the
F
after
pressing
/f
.)depending
When
the
input
source
is
set
toLabels”
“Skip”
in
the
“Video
Labels”
under
Jacks/
Description
Jacks/
Description
Turn
connected
then
press
/ the
display
the
connected
equipment
list.InPress
/f“AV
to se
Fthe
HDMI
1 or
The
listed
options
vary
on
thetocurrent
input
and
content.
Jacks/
Description
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
A
HDMI
IN
1IN
or1select
2or
Connect
to equipment,
the
HDMI
or
2or
jack
if
equipment
has
an
HDMI
jack.
The
F/f
to
the
desired
input
source.
Then
wait
for
seconds
display
the
selected
input
source.
addition,
whe
A
HDMI
IN
1
or
2
Connect
to
the
HDMI
IN
1
or
2
jack
if
the
equipment
has
an
HDMI
jack.
The
5
A
HDMI
2
Connect
to
the
HDMI
IN
1
2
jack
if
the
equipment
has
an
HDMI
jack.
The
(page
that
input
isinput
greyed
out
inand
list.
(page
29),
that
input
is signals
greyed
outhighlighted
in thefrom
list. item
Simbol
ulaza
na
ekranu
the
desired
source,
then
press
. (The
is selected
if 2 seconds pass without
any
operat
Input
symbol
on
screen
Input
symbol
on29),
screen
HDMI
ql
Coloured
buttons
Input
symbol
on
screen
digital
video
audio
are
input
the the
equipment.
HDMI,
commun
Displays
or cancels
digital
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
from
the
equipment.
digital
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
from
equipment.
after pressing
/the
.)menu.
When
the
input
source
is set
“Skip”
in
thecompatible
“Video
Labels”
under the
“AV
Set-up”
men
F
f
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
anto
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
Turn
on
the
connected
equipment,
then
press
/
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list.
Pr
HDMI
1
or
In
addition,
when
you
connect
the
equipment
that
is
with
Control
for
set
up
this
comm
Jacks/
Description
HDMI
1
or
Spojite
na
HDMI
IN
11ili
2equipment
ako
oprema
ima
HDMI
priključnicu.
Ovo
je
ulaz
zapresssource.
z
•or
/ 29),
onConnect
the
TV
to
the
connected
list
and
select
the
desired
input
source.
You
can
also
z
•Connect
Press
/when
on
the
TV
display
theif
connected
equipment
list
and
select
the The
desired
Y
HDMI
or
In
addition,
you
connect
the
equipment
that
compatible
with
Control
forinput
AHDMI
HDMI
INPress
to
the
HDMI
IN
or2the
2jack
if
the
equipment
has
an
HDMI
jack.
The
A HDMI
IN
1IN
todisplay
HDMI
IN
or
2priključnicu
jack
ifjack
the
equipment
has
an
HDMI
jack.
The
In
addition,
when
you
connect
equipment
that
isis
compatible
with
Control
for
A
121or
22
Connect
to
the
HDMI
IN
1to1press
or
the
equipment
has
an
HDMI
jack.
(page
that
input
is/the
greyed
out
in
the
list.
6
–
Remote
sensor
Light
sensor
the
desired
input
source,
then
.
(The
highlighted
item
is
selected
if
2
seconds
pass
withou
w;
–
Subtitle
setting
HDMI
2
HDMI,
communication
with
the
connected
equipment
is
supported.
See
page
30
to
F/f
to select
thedigital
desired
input
source.
Then
wait
for
2
seconds
to
display
the
selected
input
source.
F/f
to
select
the
desired
input
source.
Then
wait
for
2
seconds
to
display
the
selected
input
source.
If
the
equipment
Input HDMI
symbol
on
screen
HDMI
2
digitalne
video
i
audio
signale.
2
HDMI,
communication
with
the
connected
equipment
is
supported.
See
page
30
to
digital
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
from
the
equipment.
video
and
audio
signals
areinput
input
from
the
equipment.
HDMI,
communication
with
the
connected
equipment
isonly).
supported.
SeeLabels”
page 30under
to
digital
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
the
equipment.
Receives IR Press
signals
from
the
remote.
after
pressing
/
.)
When
the
source
is
set
to
“Skip”
in
the
“Video
the
“AV
F
f
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(infrom
digital
mode
up
this
communication.
through
a DVI
Pored
toga,
kada
spojite
opremu
koja
jeequipment
kompatibilna
saisis
funkcijom
Control
for
HDMI,
HDMI
1z
or • wa
Press
/set
on
the
TV
to display
the
connected
list
and
select
the
desired
input
source.
also pHDMI
1 or 1
HDMI
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
up
this
communication.
In
addition,
when
connect
the
equipment
that
compatible
with
Control
forYou can
Inset
addition,
when
you
connect
the
equipment
that
is
compatible
with
Control
for
set
up
this
communication.
(page
29),
that
input
isyou
greyed
in
the
list.
In
addition,
when
you
connect
the
equipment
that
compatible
with
Control
for
PROG/CH
+/–/
/the
A HDMI
INSenses
1or
or 2room
Connect
to
HDMI
IN
1out
or
2 jack
ifseconds
the
equipment
has
an
HDMI
jack.
The
F/f
toIfJacks/
select
the
desired
input
source.
Then
wait
for
2
to
display
the
selected
input
source.
the
equipment
has
a
DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
jack
to
the
HDMI
IN
1
jack
Jacks/
Description
equipment’s
aud
Description
podržava
se
veza
sa
spojenom
opremom.
Pogledajte
stranu
30
da
podesite
ovu
vezu.
HDMI
2
HDMI
2
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
HDMI
2
If
the
equipment
has
a
DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
jack
to
the
HDMI
IN
1
jack
HDMI,
communication
with
theconnected
connected
equipment
issupported.
supported.
Seepage
page
communication
with
the
connected
equipment
isjack
supported.
See page
to3030toto
Viewing
pictures
from
the
equipment
• HDMI,
Selects
theequipment
next
(+) and
orconnected
previous
(–)
channel.
If
the
has
a DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
the
HDMI
IN
130
jack
HDMI,
communication
with
the
equipment
isto
See
digital
video
audio
signals
are
input
from
the
equipment.
through
aoprema
DVI
-communication.
adaptor
interface
supplied),
and
connect
the
sensor, doing
soIn
may
affect
its
function.
Ako
ima
DVI
priključnicu,
spojite
DVI
priključnicu
naand
HDMI
1 priključnicu
(theinput
PC/HDMI
1
Input
symbol
screen
z
•this
Press
/HDMI
on
the
TV
to display
the(not
connected
equipment
listconnect
andIN
select
the desired
source. Y
Input
symbol
on
screen
• set
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
(
)
or
previous
(
)
page.
through
a
DVI
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
connect
the
set
up
this
up
communication.
wing pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
through
a
DVI
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and
the
HDMI
1 or on
set
up
this
communication.
InF/f
addition,
when
you to
connect
the equipment
that
is
compatible
with
Control
for
toaudio
select
the
desired
input
source.
Then
wait
for
2IN
seconds
to Press
display
the
selected
input
source.
Jacks/
Description
equipment’s
out
jack
the
PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
jack
in
the
PC
IN
jacks
putem
DVI
HDMI
adaptera
(nije
isporučen)
i
spojite
audio
izlazne
priključnice
opreme
na
and
HDMI
IN
1
Turn on
the
connected
equipment,
then
press
/
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list.
/
to
select
F
f
ws
–
Previous
channel
equipment’s
audio
out
jack
to
the
PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
IN
jack
in
the
PC
IN
jacks
IfHDMI,
the
equipment
has
DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
the2HDMI
HDMI
IN1 1IN
jack
theequipment’s
equipment
has
a2has
DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
jack
tojack
the
HDMI
INan
1ifHDMI
jack
7 2IN
/ 1–or
Picture
Off
/ equipment
Timer
indicator
audio
outa aHDMI
jack
to
the
PC/HDMI
1equipment
AUDIO
IN
jack
in
the
PC
jacks
If
the
DVI
jack,
the
DVI
jack
to
the
IN
jack
AHDMI
HDMI
2 If(the
Connect
to
the
IN
1connect
orPC
2asIN
jack
if
the
equipment
has
jack.
A
HDMI
INcommunication
11AUDIO
or
to
the
HDMI
IN
1to
or
jack
the
equipment
has an HD
with
the
is
supported.
See
page
30The
to
PC/HDMI
ININ
priključnicu
uconnected
priključnicama
PC/HDMI
AUDIO
jack
is
used
the
audio
in
jack
for
both
the
PC
IN
Input
on
• The HDMI
the desired
input
source,
press
. (The
highlighted
item
isConnect
selected
if
2Press
seconds
pass
without
any
operation
Returns
toto
the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
15
seconds).
Fthan
on the connected
equipment,
then
press
/ (the
display
the
connected
equipment
list.
/f
to
select
Lights
up symbol
inthen
green
when
you
Off”
(the
PC/HDMI
1-HDMI
AUDIO
IN
jack
used
as
the
audio
in
jack
forthe
both
PCthe
INequipment.
through
aselect
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and
connect
the
through
ascreen
DVI
-1DVI
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and
connect
PC/HDMI
AUDIO
IN
jack
isisused
as
the
audio
in
jack
for
both
the
PC
IN
through
athis
DVI
-1“Picture
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and
connect
the
digital
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
from
the
equipment.
digital
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
from
set
up
communication.
720p,
1080
(PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
IN
priključnica
se
koristi
kao
audio
ulazna
priključnica
za
PC
IN
i
Jacks/
Description
F
after pressing
/f.).30).
When
the
input
source
isIN
set
to
“Skip”
into
the
“Video
Labels”
under
thein“AV
Set-up”
menu
and
HDMI
IN
1IN
jacks).
sired input source,
then press
(The
item
is
selected
ifjack
2the
seconds
pass
without
any
operation
(page
and
HDMI
jacks).
equipment’s
audio
out
the
PC/HDMI
1AUDIO
AUDIO
jack
the
PC
jacks
equipment’s
audio
out
jack
to
AUDIO
INjack
jack
the
PC
IN
jacks
HDMI
1 or highlighted
and
HDMI
11jacks).
HDMI
1audio
or
out
toPC/HDMI
the
PC/HDMI
ININ
inin
the
PC
IN
jacks
A
HDMI
INInput
1equipment’s
or
2the
Connect
to
the
HDMI
11or
2you
jack
if
the
equipment
has
an
HDMI
jack.
Th
In
addition,
when
you
connect
the1IN
equipment
that
isjack
compatible
with
Control
for
In
addition,
when
connect
theHDMI
equipment
that
is• compatible
If
the
equipment
has
ajack
DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
to
the
IN
1IN
jack
The
HDMI
HDMI
IN
1
priključnice).
(page
29),
that
input
is
greyed
out
in
list.
symbol
on
screen
pressing
/
.)
When
the
input
source
is
set
to
“Skip”
in
the
“Video
Labels”
under
the
“AV
Set-up”
menu
F
f
•
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
576p,
To change the Wide Mode
(the
PC/HDMI
1-AUDIO
AUDIO
INjack
jack
is
used
as
the
audio
injack
jack
for
both
the
PCININ
• HDMI
The
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
576p,
(the
PC/HDMI
AUDIO
IN
jack
isHDMI,
used
as
the
audio
inequipment
jack
for
both
the
PC
IN
HDMI
2
2
•PC/HDMI
The
HDMI
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
576p,
(the
1jacks
IN
is
used
as
the
audio
in
for
both
the
PC
Standby
indicator
digital
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
from
the
equipment.
PC
input si
HDMI,
communication
with
the
connected
isconnect
supported.
See
page 30
to
communication
with
the
connected
equipment
is support
through
a1HDMI
DVI
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and
the
720p,
1080i,
1080p
and
1080/24p.
29), that input is greyed8
out1in–the
list.
720p,
1080i,
1080pmode.
and1080/24p.
1080/24p.
720p,
1080i,
1080p
and
and
HDMI
IN
1jacks).
jacks).
HDMI
1•HDMI
orthe
and
HDMI
IN
1up
jacks).
Lights
red
when
TV
is1
in
standby
and
HDMI
IN
1audio
•with
Be
sure
to
IN
or
2can
Connect
to
thedesired
HDMI
INSee
1source.
orpage
2 jack
ifcan
equipment
hasContro
an HD
z • Component
Press
/ onup
theinHDMI
TV
toA
display
the
connected
equipment
list
and
the
input
You
also
press
In
addition,
when
you
connect
the
equipment
that
isthe
compatible
set
this
communication.
set
upselect
this
communication.
equipment’s
out
jack
to
the
PC/HDMI
1 AUDIO
IN
jack
the
PC
IN
jacks
For TV, Video,
or
(except
The
HDMI
jacks
support
PC
timing
in
HDMI
PC
mode.
25infor
supported
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
The
HDMI
jacks
can
support
PC
timing
inselected
HDMI
PC
mode.
See480p,
page
25576p,
for576p,
supported
•••HDMI
priključnice
podržavaju
samo
sledeće
video
ulaze:
480i,
576i,
The
HDMI
jacks
can
support
PC
timing
in
HDMI
PC
mode.
See
page
25
for
supported
recommend
F/f
to
select
the
desired
input
source.
Then
wait
for
2
seconds
to
display
the
input
source.
HDMI
2
•
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
576p,
•
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
•
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
576p,
digital
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
from
the
equipment.
PC
input
signal.
Press
/ on the TV to
the connected
equipment
list
and
select
thehas
desired
input
source.
You
can
also
press
HDMI,
communication
with
the
connected
equipment
is
supported.
See
page
If
the
equipment
a
DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
jack
to
the
HDMI
IN
1
jack
If
the
equipment
has
a
DVI
jack,
connect
DVI
jack
to
the
HD
(the
PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
IN
jack
is
used
as
the
audio
in
jack
for
both
the
PC
IN
PC input)
9display
" – Power
indicator
PC
input
signal.
PC
input
signal.
720p,
1080i,
1080p
i 1080/24p.
720p,
1080p
and1080/24p.
1080/24p.
1080i,
1080p
and
1080/24p.
720p,
1080i,
1080p
and
HDMI
11080i,
or
F/f to select the desired input•source.
Then
wait
for
2when
seconds
display
the
selected
input
source.
• 720p,
Be
sure
toto
use
only
an
authorized
HDMI
cable
bearing
the
HDMI
logo.
We
In
addition,
when
you
connect
the
equipment
that
is compatible
set
up
this
communication.
Lights
upportion
in
green
the
TV
turned
on.
through
ause
DVI
-can
HDMI
adaptor
(not
supplied),
and
connect
the
through
ainterface
DVI
- HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and con
and
HDMI
IN
1jacks
jacks).
•HDMI
Be
sure
tois
use
only
ansupport
authorized
HDMI
cable
bearing
the
HDMI
logo.
We
•
Be
sure
to
only
an
authorized
HDMI
cable
bearing
the
HDMI
logo.
We
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
its
original
•
HDMI
priključnice
mogu
podržati
PC
tajming
u
HDMI
PC
modu.
Pogledajte
stranu
B
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
Use
an
optical
a
Wide Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
of
the
•
The
HDMI
PC
timing
in
HDMI
PC
mode.
See
page
25
for
supported
•
The
jacks
can
support
PC
timing
in
HDMI
PC
mode.
See
page
25
for
supported
• HDMI
The
jacks
can
support
PC
timing
incable
HDMI
PC
mode.
page
25
for to
supported
recommend
you
use
ause
Sony
HDMI
cable
(high
speed
type).type).
2that
Jacks/
• Flashes while theDescription
remote
isHDMI
being
operated.
HDMI,
communication
with
the
connected
equipment
isIN
support
recommend
that
you
Sony
HDMI
(high
speed
If
the
equipment
has
a DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
jack
HDMI
IN
1 jaci
equipment’s
audio
out
jack
to
the
PC/HDMI
1speed
AUDIO
IN
jack
in
the
PC
IN jacks
equipment’s
audio
out
jack
toSee
the
PC/HDMI
1the
AUDIO
jack
that
you
use
aaSony
HDMI
cable
(high
type).
•recommend
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
576p,
PC
input
signal.
PC25input
signal.
za
podržani
PC
ulazni
signal.
(OPTICAL)
PC
input
signal.
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
at
the
top,
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
s/
Input symbolDescription
on screen
720p,
1080i,
1080p
and
1080/24p.
set
up
this
through
aauthorized
DVI
-IN
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
and
connect
the fo
(the
PC/HDMI
1anAUDIO
jack
is
used
as
theHDMI
audio
in supplied),
jack
for
both
PC in
INjack
(the
PC/HDMI
1 both
AUDIO
IN
jack
islogo.
used
as
thethe
audio
•Koristite
Be
sure
touse
use
only
an
authorized
HDMI
cable
bearing
the
HDMI
logo.
We
Bethe
sure
to
use
only
an
authorized
HDMI
cable
bearing
the
logo.
We
Be
sure
to
only
HDMI
cable
bearing
the
HDMI
We
••optical
samo
originalni
HDMI
kabl
sa communication.
HDMI
logotipom.
Savetujemo
vam
upotrebu
B DIGITAL
OUT
an
audio
cable.
bottom,
and
sides
for
small
the AUDIO
picture
are
stretched
to•Use
fill
B
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT Use
Use
an
optical
audio
cable.
•recommend
The
HDMI
jacks
can
support
PC
timing
in
HDMI
PC
mode.
See
page
25 the
for
supported
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
an
optical
audio
cable.
symbol onB
screen
If
the
equipment
has
a
DVI
jack,
connect
DVI
jack
to
the
HD
equipment’s
audio
out
jack
to
the
PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
IN
jack
in
the
PC
recommend
that
you
use
a
Sony
HDMI
cable
(high
speed
type).
recommend
that
you
use
a
Sony
HDMI
cable
(high
speed
type).
and
HDMI
IN
1
jacks).
and
HDMI
IN
1
jacks).
that
you
use
a
Sony
HDMI
cable
(high
speed
type).
C
PC
IN
/
Connect
to
theIN
P
Sony
HDMI
cabla
(tipa
high-speed).
(OPTICAL)
A(OPTICAL)
HDMI
1• or
2 sure that the Connect
toinput
the HDMI
INbefore
1 or 2 jack
if the equipment has an HDMI jack. The
Make
TV is completely
turned
off
picture.
16:9IN
screen.
PC
signal.
(OPTICAL)
through
a
DVI
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and
con
(the
PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
IN
jack
is
used
as
the
audio
in
jack
for
both
the
•
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
576p,
•
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
GB
PC cable withPC
fe4
unplugging
theHDMI
ACdigital
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
AC
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
from
the
equipment.
DMI INB
1 or
2
Connect
to
the
IN
1
or
2
jack
if
the
equipment
has
an
HDMI
jack.
The
11
•
Be
sure
to
use
only
an
authorized
HDMI
cable
bearing
the
HDMI
logo.
We
Koristite
optički
audio
kabl.
BDIGITAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUTwhile
Use
anoptical
optical
audio
cable.
AUDIO
OUT
Use
an
optical
audio
cable.
B
OUT
Use
an
audio
cable.
720p,
1080i,
1080p
and
1080/24p.
720p, jack
1080i,
1080p
and
1080/24p.
equipment’s
audio
out
jack
to
thetoPC/HDMI
1 AUDIO
IN jack i
Normal
Displays
theor
4:3video
picture
in its
and
HDMI
IN
1 jacks).
cord
the
TV
isthe
turned
on
may
cause
the
CDIGITAL
PC
IN
/ AUDIO
Connect
to
PC
IN
jack
and
the
audio
.isItPC
is
recommended
to use
ause
HDMI
recommend
that
you
use
aand
Sony
HDMI
cable
(high
type).
Full
1
Stretches
the
original
picture
fill Control
Inoriginal
addition,
when
you
connect
the
equipment
that
compatible
with
forPC
digital
and
audio
signals
arePC
input
from
the
equipment.
C(OPTICAL)
PC
IN
/ power
Connect
the
PC
IN
jack
and
the
audio
jack
.It
It
recommended
touse
C
PC
IN
/1
Connect
toto•cause
the
IN
jack
the
audio
jack
.speed
isisrecommended
to
aa mode.
(OPTICAL)
(OPTICAL)
The
HDMI
jacks
can(the
support
PC
timing
in HDMI
PC
mode.
See
page
25
for
supported
•
The
HDMI
jacks
can
support
PC
timing
in
HDMI
Seefo
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
may
the
TV
to
PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
IN
jack
is
used
as
the
audio
in
jack
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
•
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
57p
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
HDMIIn2 addition, when PC
HDMI 1 or
HDMI,
communication
withthat
theisconnected
equipment
iskeeping
supported.
tocan listen
you
connect
the
equipment
compatible
with Control
for its See page 30
the
vertically,
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
cable
with
ferrite
PC
inputcore.
signal.
PCscreen
input
signal.
malfunction.
You
to
720p, 1080i,
1080p
andD
1080/24p.
PC
and
HDMI
IN
1
jacks).
B
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
Use
an
optical
audio
cable.
16:9
screen.
HDMI
2
PC
PC
set
up
this
communication.
communication
with
the
connected
isBe
supported.
page
30
totheaspect
+ button
has
a tactile
dot.
Use
itIN
a equipment
Spojite
na
PC
IN
priključnicu
iauthorized
audio
priključnicu
Preporučuje
se
upotreba
kabla
original
horizontal-to-vertical
CIN
PCININ/z HDMI,
Connect
the
PC
jackthe
and
the
audio
jack
.bearing
Itauthorized
recommended
use
•the
Be
sure
toas
use
only
an
HDMI
cable
HDMI
logo.
We
C PC
Connect
to
the
PC
IN
and
jack
.See
It. istiming
recommended
tomode.
use
ause
•audio
sure
tojack
use
only
HDMI
cable
bearing
thefor
HDM
C
PC
/• / The CH
Connect
toto
PC
IN
jack
and
the
audio
.an
It
isis
recommended
toto
a ainputs:
•jack
The
HDMI
jacks
can
support
PC
in
HDMI
PC
See
page
25
sup4
•
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
480i,
(OPTICAL)
when
operating
the
TV.
recommend
thatthe
you
use
arecommend
Sony the
HDMI
cable
(high
that
you
use
aspeed
Sony
HDMI
speedtotype).
If
the
equipment
hasjezgrom
acore.
DVI
jack,
connect
DVI
jack
toor
the
HDMI
IN cable
1 jack(high
za
računar
sa
setreference
up this communication.
PC
cable
with
ferrite
E
/ equipment.
1type).
Connect
the c
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
ratio.
PC
input
signal.
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
DD
You
can
listen
toferitnim
TV
sound
on
connected
audio
720p, Hi-Fi
1080i,
1080p
andequipment.
1080/24p.
DPC Stretches
You
canlisten
listen
to
TVsound
sound
onthe
the
connected
Hi-Fi
audio
equipment.
You
can
to
TV
on
connected
Hi-Fi
audio
PC Ifthe
through
a
DVI
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and
connect
the
the
equipment
has
a
DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
jack
to
the
HDMI
IN
1
jack
PC
•
Be
sure
to
use
only
an
authorized
HDMI
cable
bearing
the
HDMI
logo.
We
Full
4:3
picture
horizontally
quality,
compon
•
The
HDMI
jacks
can
support
PC
timing
in
HDMI
PC
mode.
See
p
C PC
IN
/ AUDIO OUT
Connect
toAUDIO
PC OUT
IN
jack
and
the
audio
jackcable.
. It is recommended to use a
DIGITAL
Use
anthe
optical
cable.
DIGITAL
Use
an
optical
audio
recommend
that
you
use
Sony
HDMI
cable
speed
orpicture
Full
2
Stretches
the
Fullthe
1Component
equipment’s
audio
outaudio
jack
toand
theand
PC/HDMI
1ajacks
AUDIO
IN
jack
in(high
the
PCpicture
INtype).
jacks
through
a DVIConnect
-B
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and
connect
EE
/ B
or
116:911screen.
to
the
component
jacks
the
audio
jacks
/ picture
./ For
better
PC
input
signal.
component vide
to
fill or
the
E
/
or
Connect
to
the
component
jacks
the
audio
.
For
better
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
/
Connect
to
the
component
jacks
and
the
audio
jacks
/
.
For
better
picture
Možete
slušati
TV
zvuk
na
spojenoj
Hi-Fi
audio
opremi.
(OPTICAL)
D
You
canlisten
listen
to
TVsound
sound
on
the•connected
connected
Hi-Fi
audio
equipment.
(OPTICAL)
D D
You
can
listen
to
TVtoPC/HDMI
on the
connected
Hi-Fi
audio
equipment.
You
can
TV
the
Hi-Fi
audio
equipment.
Video
1screen.
to
fill
the
16:9
(the
PC/HDMI
1sound
AUDIO
IN
jack
ishorizontally
used
astoif
the
audio
in
jack
for
both
theacable
PC jack
IN
Be
use
only
an
authorized
HDMI
bearing the
HDM
audio
out
jack
to
the
1on
INsure
jack
in
the
PC
IN
jacks
quality,
component
connection
isAUDIO
recommended
your
DVD
player
has
ahas
1, selec
PC equipment’s
quality,
component
connection
recommended
your
DVD
player
quality,
component
connection
isisaudio
recommended
ififyour
DVD
player
has
a
B
DIGITAL1 AUDIO
OUT
Use
anasoptical
cable.
recommend
that
you
use
aIN
Sony
HDMI
cable
(high• speed
type).
Component
or
and
HDMI
IN
1
jacks).
(the
PC/HDMI
AUDIO
IN
jack
is
used
the
audio
in
jack
for
both
the
PC
component
video
output.
When
using
the
component
video
jack
as
the
video
You
canno
Component
or
Component
or Connect
Spojite
na
komponentne
priključnice
i pictures
audio
priključnice
/jack
..the
Za
bolji
kvalitet
slike,to
component
video
output.
When
using
the
component
video
jack
as
the
video
C
PC
IN
/
Connect
to
the
PC
IN
jack
and
the
audio
jack
It
is
recommended
use
a
E
/
or
1
Connect
to
the
component
jacks
and
audio
jacks
/
.
For
better
picture
C
PC
IN
/
Connect
to
the
PC
IN
and
the
audio
jack
.
It
is
reco
E
/
or
1
to
the
component
jacks
and
the
audio
jacks
/
.
For
better
picture
component
video
output.
When
using
the
component
video
jack
as
the
video
E
/
or
1
Connect
to
the
component
jacks
and
the
audio
jacks
/
.
For
better
picture
Viewing
from
connected
equ
(OPTICAL)
of the TVDVideo
buttons
and indicators
1 and
You•1,can
listen
to
TV
sound
on
the
connected
Hi-Fi
audio
equipment.
1 jacks).
The
HDMI
jacks
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
576p,
jack
select
1”
in
the
“Video
1/Component
Input”
menu
(page
29).
Video
Video
11 HDMI INquality,
preporučuje
se“Video
komponentna
veza
ako
vaš
DVD
uređaj
ima
komponentni
video
izlaz.
Kod time.
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
jack
1,
select
“Video
1”
in
the
“Video
1/Component
Input”
menu
(page
29).
quality,
component
connection
is
recommended
if
your
DVD
player
has
a
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
component
connection
is
recommended
if
your
DVD
player
has
a
jack
1,
select
“Video
1”
in
the
“Video
1/Component
Input”
menu
(page
29).
B
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
Use
an
optical
audio
cable.
quality,
component
connection
is
recommended
if
your
DVD
player
has
a
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
720p,
1080i,
1080p
andvideo
1080/24p.
• The
only
support
following
inputs:
480i,
480p,
576i,
576p,
You
cannot
usethe
the
component
video
jack
and video
the
video
jack
at1,
the
same
PC
Component
Component
or
korišćenja
komponentne
video
priključnice
kao
video
priključnice
izaberite
PC
INcomponent
/•(OPTICAL)
Connect
to
the
PC
IN
jack
and
the
audio
jack
.the
It
isvideo
recommended
to
Component
ororHDMI
Turn
on
the
connected
equipment,
then
/as
to
display
theenjoy
connec
component
video
output.
When
using
the
component
video
jack
the
video
You
cannot
use
the
component
video
jack
and
the
video
jack
at
the
same
video
output.
When
using
the
component
jack
as1 the
video
1jacks
1
Power
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connecte
•–••PC
You
cannot
use
the
video
jack
and
video
jack
11as
at
the
same
component
video
output.
When
using
the
component
video
jack
F
You
can
p
E format)
/
or C 720p,
1
Connect
to
the jacks
component
jacks
and
the
audio
jacks
/press
.page
For
better
picture
The
HDMI
cancomponent
support
PC
timing
in
HDMI
PCthe
mode.
See
25
for
supported
1080p
and
1080/24p.
in1080i,
the correct
time.
Video
time.
Video
1 broadcasts
“Video
1”
u
“Video
1/Component
Input”
meniju
(str.
29).
the
desired
input
source,
then
press
.
(The
highlighted
item
is selected
if
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
•
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
on
the
time.
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
Video
11 • The HDMI
jack
1,
select
“Video
1”inin
the
“Video
1/Component
Input”
menu
(page
29).
jack
1, select
“Video
1”connection
in1”
the
“Video
1/Component
Input”
menumenu
(page(page
29).a29).
PC
input
signal.
jack
1,
select
“Video
the
“Video
1/Component
Input”
camcorder
or
US
quality,
component
is
recommended
if
your
DVD
player
has
jacks
can
support
PC
timing
in
HDMI
PC
mode.
See
page
25
for
supported
proportions.
D
You
can
listen
to
TV
sound
on
the
connected
Hi-Fi
audio
equipment.
D
You
can
listen
to
TV
sound
on
the
connected
Hi-Fi
audio
equipm
PC
input
signal.
PC
F
f
after
pressing
/
.)
When
the
input
source
is
set
to
“Skip”
in
the
“Video
To
disconnect
the
TV
from
thevideo
AC
power
Ne
možete
koristiti
komponentnu
video
priključnicu
ivideo
video
priključnicu
C
/ video
Connect
to
the
IN
jack
and
the
jack
is recoLt
Turn
on
the
connected
equipment,
then
press
/1 u to. Itdisplay
•IN
You
cannot
use
the
component
video
jack
and
the
jack
1We
atthe
the
same
Be
sure
tothe
use
only
an
authorized
HDMI
bearing
the
HDMI
• PC
You
cannot
use
component
video
jack
and
the
video
jack
1 logo.
at the
same
Component
PC or
input You
signal.
••••enjoy
You
cannot
use
the
component
jack
and
the
video
jack
1audio
at
same
FF
can
photo/music/video
files
stored
incable
aPC
Sony
digital
still
camera,
component
output.
When
using
the
component
video
jack
as
the
video
F
You
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
files
stored
in
aSony
Sony
digital
still
camera,
You
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
files
stored
in
a
digital
still
camera,
(page
29),
that
input
is
greyed
out
in
the
list.
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC
power
isto
vreme.
the
desired
input
source,
then
press
.
(The
highlighted
item
isv
time.
recommend
that
you
use
a
Sony
HDMI
cable
(high
speed
type).
time.
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
time.
G
2/jacks
2 and
Connect
to the
• or
Be sure
use only
anConnect
HDMI
cable
bearing
theto
HDMI
logo. We
orauthorized
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
EVideo
/ 1D
1 tocamcorder
to1You
the
component
and
the
/ menu
. For
better
E
or
Connect
the
jacks
the
audio
jacks
.the
F
jack/PC
1,orselect
“Video
1”
in
the
“Video
1/Component
Input”
(page
29).
can
listen
tojacks
TV
sound
on
connected
Hi-Fi
audio
equipment.
camcorder
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
camcorder
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
after
pressing
/component
.)the
When
the
input
source
is
set
topicture
“Skip”/ inconn
F
faudio
recommendinthat
you outlet.
use aor
Sony
HDMI
cable
(high
speed
type).
equipment,
14:9*
Displays 14:9 broadcasts
the
quality,
component
connection
is
recommended
if
your
DVD
player
has
a
zcable.
• Press
/files
on
the
TV
toasačuvanim
display
the
connected
equipment
list
andDVD
selectpl
th
quality,
component
connection
is
recommended
if
your
•
You
cannot
use
the
component
video
jack
and
the
video
jack
1
at
the
same
Možete
uživati
u
slikama/muzičkim/video
datotekama
na
Sony
digitalnoj
kameri,
F
You
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
stored
in
Sony
digital
still
camera,
B
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
Use
an
optical
audio
(page
29),
that
input
is
greyed
out
in
the
list.
F
You
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
files
stored
in
a
Sony
digital
still
camera,
You
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
files
stored
in input
a Sony
digital
stillwait
camera,
2connect
GF
2/ correct
to
the
video
jack
2toand
the
audio
jacks
2.Video
Ifthe
mono
2
CHblack
/ili USB
Component
or
F/f
to
select
the
desired
source.
Then
forcomponent
2mono
seconds
tovideo
display
the
Component
or
proportions.
aConnect
result,
time.
/Ascamcorder
or
1+/–/
Connect
the
component
jacks
and
audio
jacks
/ Hi-Fi
For
better
pict
component
video
output.
When
using
the
component
video
jack
as .the
G (OPTICAL)
2/2 22
Connect
toor
the
video
jack
2and
and
the
audio
jacks
2.you
Ifyou
you
connect
mono
video
output.
When
using
the
video
jack
G
2/
Connect
to
the
video
jack
2component
the
audio
jacks
2.
Ifon
connect
D
You
can
listen
to
TV
sound
the
connected
audio
equipm
kamkorderu
uređaju
(str.
17).
camcorder
or
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
IGITAL AUDIO
OUT
UseE
an optical
audio
cable.
or
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
camcorder
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
connect
the
Lthe
(MONO)
jack
2./ 2.2.
• screen.
Selects
theconnect
(+)
previous
channel.
Video
Video
1next
border areas
are 1
visible equipment,
on the
z
•(–)
Press
on
TV
connected
equipment
list
component
connection
is the
recommended
ifthe
your
DVD
player
a toam
equipment,
(MONO)
jack
jack
1,toquality,
select
“Video
1”
in
the
“Video
1/Component
menu
(page
29).has
jack
1,
select
“Video
1” to
indisplay
theInput”
“Video
1/Component
Input”
equipment,
connect
totoor
the
LL(MONO)
jack
Headphones
You
can
listen
OPTICAL) FVideo
2 22
•You
In/TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(H
)in
or
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
files
stored
adesired
Sony
digital
still
camera,
F/f
to
select
the
input
source.
Then
wait
for
seconds
to
or
Video
Jacks/
Description
EConnect
or
1
Connect
to
the
component
jacks
and
the
audio
/asselec
.jac
Fv
Video
component
video
output.
When
using
video
jack
the
G2/PC2/
2/ on the Component
Connect
to
the
video
jack
2
and
the
audio
jacks
2.
Ifcomponent
you
connect
mono
C
IN
Connect
to
the
PC
IN
jack
and
the
audio
jack
. 2.
Itthe
is
recommended
to
use
aF2the
•
You
cannot
use
the
component
video
jack
and
the
video
jack
1jacks
atand
the
Spojite
na
video
priključnicu
2
i
audio
priključnice
2.
Ako
spajate
mono
opremu,
G G
22/ 2Turn
Connect
to
the
video
jack
2
and
the
audio
jacks
2.
Ifcomponent
you
connect
mono
•
You
cannot
use
the
video
jack
video
f
connected
equipment,
then
press
/
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list.
Press
/same
to
to
the
video
jack
2
and
the
jacks
If
you
connect
mono
down
(
).
camcorder
or
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
Video
1PC
time.
time.
quality,
component
connection
isa recommended
ifany
your
DVD
Input
symbol
on
screen
jack
1,jack
select
“Video
in
the
“Video
1/Component
Input”
menu
(pagepl2
spojite
najack
L
(MONO)
desiredtoinput
source,
then
press
.topriključnicu
(The
highlighted
is selected
if to
2 seconds
pass without
operation
equipment,
connect
to
the
L(MONO)
(MONO)
2.
cable
with
ferrite
C IN
/ Headphonesthe
Connect
the
PC
IN
and
the
audio
.2.
Ititem
isjack
recommended
use
equipment,
connect
to sound
Lcore.
(MONO)
jack
2.1”
equipment,
connect
the
L
jack
2.
H
You
can
listen
to
TV
through
headphones.
Htop
Headphones
You
can
listen
TVor
sound
through
headphones.
H
Headphones
You
can
listen
totoTV
sound
through
headphones.
Component
3
2
+/–/
/input
Jacks/
Description
Video
2 pressing
PC
Video
2 after
component
video
output.
When
using
the
component
/f
.)
When
source
is set
to2“Skip”
the “Video
Labels”
under
the
“AV
Set-up”
menu
Video
2
You
cannot
use
theincomponent
video
jack
and
the
video
jack video
1 atjack
* Parts of the
bottom
the picture
may
be
cutthe
PC
withFferrite
core.
G and
2 ofcable
jack
the
audio
jacks
2.
Ifto
you
connect
mono
A•list.
HDMI
IN
1and
or
2enjoy
Connect
the
HDMI
IN
2 jack
if the
the
F2/ (page
Youtoout
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
files
stored
in 1”
a Sony
digital
still
camera,
F •Connect
You
can
photo/music/video
files
stored
in 1a or
Sony
digital
sm
(+)
orvideo
decreases
the
volume.
Video
1thein
time.(–)
29), that input
isIncreases
greyed
the
Input
symbol
on
screen
PC
jack
1,
select
“Video
in
the
“Video
1/Component
Input”
off.
equipment,
connect
to
the
L
(MONO)
jack
2.
digital
video
and
audio
signals
are
input
f
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
(
)
Možete
slušati
zvuk
iz
TV
prijemnika
preko
slušalica.
camcorder
or
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
H
Headphones
You
can
listen
to
TV
sound
through
headphones.
D
You
can
listen
to
TV
sound
on
the
connected
Hi-Fi
audio
equipment.
camcorder
or
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
H
Headphones
You
can
listen
to
TV
sound
through
headphones.
H
Headphones
You
can
listen
to
TV
sound
through
headphones.
• You cannot select “Normal” or “14:9” for HD signal
•
You
cannot
use
the
component
video
jack
and
the
video
jac
Video
2• Press
HDMI
1 or equipment.
or left
). connected
Aequipment
HDMI
1 and
or 2select
Connect
to digital
the
HDMI
IN
1press
or 2
In the
addition,
you
connect
equipm
z
on the
TV (on
to display
the connected
desired
input
source.
You
canthe
also
You
can enjoy
photo/music/video
files
stored
inwhen
a Sony
still
camera,
source pictures.
YouF
can listen /to TV
sound
the
Hi-Fi
audio
time.INlist
HDMI
desired
input
wait
for
22 seconds
todevice
display
the
selected
input
source.
2 to select
toselect
the Then
video
jack
2the
and
the
audio
jacks
2.
Ifthe
you
connect
mono
E G
/
or2/ 1F/f
Connect
to
component
jacks
and
audio
jacksjack
/ 17).
For
better
picture
Gthe
2/Connect
2thesource.
Connect
to
the
video
2. digital
and
audio
jacks
2.
If youa
video
and
audio
signals
HDMI,
communication
with
the connecte
camcorder
or
USB
storage
(page
4
/
–
Input
/
Enter
H Headphones
You can
listen to connect
TV
sound
through
headphones.
HDMI
1photo/music/video
orbetter
equipment,
tojacks
the
(MONO)
jack
2.
component
connection
isLrecommended
iftoyour
DVD
has
a when
equipment,
the
L (MONO)
jack
/
or
1
Connect to the component
jacks
the
audio
/enjoy
. selects
For
picture
In
addition,
you connect
set
up
thisplayer
communication.
F quality,
You
can
files
stored
in2.a Sony
digital st
• Displays
theand
connected
equipment
list
andconnect
Video
2
Component
or
Video
2
HDMI
2 2 storage
G
2/
2
Connect
to
the
video
jack
and
the
audio
jacks
2.
Ifvideo
you
connect
Jacks/
Description
video
output.
When
usingDVD
the
component
jack
as
the
quality, componentcomponent
connection
is recommended
ifGByour
player
has
athedevice
HDMI,
communication
with mo
the
the input source
(page 13).
If video
equipment
has
a DVI
jack,
connect
camcorder
or
USB
(page
17).
11
1 symbol
Component or Video
equipment,
to the
L (MONO)
2.up- this
• In TV
menu:
Selects
menu
or “Video
option,
and
jack
1,
select
“Video
1”
inconnect
the
1/Component
Input”
menu
(page
29).
Input
on output.
screen
component
video
When
using
the the
component
video
jack
asthrough
thejack
video
set
communication.
a
DVI
HDMI
adaptor
interface
H
Headphones
You
can
listen
to
TV
sound
through
headphones.
H
Headphones
You
can
listen
to
TV
sound
through
headphones.
2 confirms
the
Video 1
G“Video
Connect
tojack
the menu
video
jack
and
the
jacks
2.
If jack
you
jack
1, Video
select
1” in2cannot
the setting.
“Video
Input”
(page
29).2 jack
If
the
equipment
has
a DVI
•2/You
use the1/Component
component
video
and
the video
1audio
at the
same
audio
out
jack
to jack.
the
PC/HD
A HDMI IN 1 or 2
to the HDMI
IN 1 or 2 jacktoifequipment’s
the Lequipment
has
an HDMI
The
time. Connect
equipment,
the
(MONO)
jack
2.
through
a
DVI
HDMI
adaptor
• You cannot
use the component
video jack
and the videoconnect
jack
1(the
at the
same
PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
IN
jack
is
used
5
H time.
Headphones Video 2digital
Youvideo
can listen
to TVsignals
sound are
through
and audio
inputheadphones.
from the equipment.
equipment’s
out jack to th
Displays or cancels the menu.
and digital
HDMI
IN
1camera,
jacks).audio
HDMI 1 orYou
addition, when you
connect
thatstill
is compatible
with Control fo
F
can enjoyInphoto/music/video
files
storedthe
in equipment
a Sony
PC/HDMI
AUDIO
jac
The (the
HDMI
jacks only1support
theIN
follow
6
– Remote
sensor
/ Light
sensor
H camcorder
Headphones
candigital
listen
toconnected
TV
sound• equipment
through
headphones.
communication
with
the
is
supported.
See page
30
or HDMI,
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
You canHDMI
enjoy 2photo/music/video
files
stored
in
aYou
Sony
still
camera,
720p,
1080i,
1080p
1080/24p.
and
HDMI
INand
1 jacks).
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
set(page
up this
communication.
camcorder or USB storage device
17).
• The HDMI
can support
PC
• jacks
The HDMI
jacks
onlytiming
suppoi
Senses room
light
and adjusts
the
screen
G
2/ 2
Connect
to the
jack
2has
and
the
audio
2. If
you
connect
mono
SRPIN
Ifvideo
thelevel
equipment
a DVI
jack, jacks
connect the
DVI
jack
to the
HDMI
1 jack
PC
input
signal.
GB 1080p
13
GB
720p,
1080i,
brightness
Do
not
put anything
overconnect
the
13
GB and 108
102/ 2
GB
equipment,
to
the
L
(MONO)
jack
2.
Connect to the video
jack accordingly.
2connect
and
the
audio
jacks
2.
If
you
mono
13
13
• Besupplied),
sure to
useand
only
an
authorized
HDM
through
a DVIits- function.
HDMI adaptor interface (not
connect
the
• The
HDMI
jacks
can support
sensor, doing so
may affect
Videoequipment,
2
connect to the L (MONO)
jack audio
2. out jack to the PC/HDMI recommend
that
you signal.
use
a Sony
HDMI
equipment’s
1 AUDIOPC
IN
jack
in the
PC IN
jack
input
Video 2
7
/ – Picture Off / Timer indicator
13 GB13GBGB
Using Optional Equipment
Using Optional Equipment
Using
Optional
Equipment
Using
Optional
Equipment
Using
Optional
Equipment
Using
Using
Optional
Optional
Equipment
Equipment
Using Optional Equipment
Using Optional Equipment
Using Optional Equipment
Operating the TV
and indicators
1Viewing
1 – Power PIP
PIP (slika
(Picture
in
Gledanje
u slici)
Press to turn the TV on or to switch to standby mode.
• To disconnect the TV from the AC power
Picture)
Možete istovremeno gledati dve slike (u PC ulaznom
• Increases (+) or decreases (–) the volume.
• In TV menu: Moves through the options
right ( )
Sub Window
or left ( ).
(Location of
4
/ – Input select / Enter
Main
Operating the TV
nd
completely, pull the plug from the AC power
modu)
na outlet.
ekranu.
You can
view two pictures (in PC input mode) on the
simultaneously.
Spojite
2screen
CHračunar
+/–/
/(str. 12) i postarajte se da se slike sa
Connect
a PC
12),orand
make
surechannel.
that images
računara
pojave
na
ekranu
(str.
13). (–)
• Selects
the(page
next
(+)
previous
from
a PC
appearMoves
on thethrough
screen the
(page
13). up ( ) or
• In
TV menu:
options
1 Pritisnite
i izaberite “PIP”.
down OPTIONS
( ).
1 slike
Press
and select “PIP”.
Dve
se OPTIONS
prikazuju istovremeno.
3 2
+/–/ /
Two pictures are displayed simultaneously.
the sub
window can
• Displays
and selects
Window the connected equipment list
be moved
by
the input source (page 13).
pressing
• In TV menu: Selects the menu or option,
and)
F/f/G/g.
confirms the setting.
5
Dostupnost
PIPPIP
funkcije
Availability
Displays or cancels
the
menu.
In Main
Window
In
Sub prozoru
Window
U
prozoru
U pomoćnom
6glavnom
– Remote
sensor / Light
sensor
TVremote.
program,
Receives IR signals from the
TV programme,
Senses room light level andHDMI
adjustsHDMI
the (samo
screen
PCPC
1/2
za PC)
1/2 (for
brightness accordingly. Do not put anything over the
HDMI
1/2
(PC
merenje)
ili
Video
1/2
PC
only)
or
HDMI
1/2
(PC
timing)
sensor, doing so may affect its function.
Video 1/2
7
/ – Picture Off / Timer indicator
up in green
when
you select
“Picture
2 ULights
pomoćnom
prozoru,
možete
izabrati
TV Off”
2 (page
In
you can
select the TV
30).window,
kanal
ili sub
video
ulaz pritiskom
na OPTIONS
i odaor video
input by pressing
birom
“Sub
window”.
8 1channel
– Standby
indicator
OPTIONS
and
select
“Sub
Lights
up inna
redmod
when
the TV
isjedne
in window”.
standby
Za povratak
prikaza
slikemode.
indicators
To
return
to
single
picture
mode
Pritisnite
RETURN
ili izaberite “Single
Picture” iz
9 " – Power
indicator
RETURN
orwhen
selectthe
“Single
Picture”
Lights
up in green
TV is turned
on.from
opcija.
1 menija
1 –• Press
Power
• Options
Flashes
while
theor
remote
is being
operated.
menu.
Press
to
turn the
TV on
to switch
to standby
mode.
Ne
možete
prikazati
rezoluciju
veću
odyour TV's
• ••To
disconnect
the TVresolutions
from
the AC
power
You
cannot display
higher
than
completely,
pull the
plug from
the
AC
power
display
resolution
(page
36).
rezolucije
koju
prikazuje
vaš
TV
prijemnik
• Make sure that the TV is completely turned off before
outlet.
•(str.
In PIP
reduced,
this may
36).mode,
unplugging
the as
ACpicture
powersize
cord.
Unplugging
the AC
decrease
picture
smoothness.
power
cord
while
the
TVsmanjivanja
is turned on may
cause the
•
U
PIP
modu
se
zbog
veličine
2 CH
+/–/
/
z • indicator
You cantoswitch
the
audible
picture
by
selecting
remain
or may cause
the TV to
• Selects
the
next
(+)from
orlitprevious
(–) channel.
slike
i njen
kvalitet
može
smanjiti.
“Audio
Swap”
the Options
menu.
malfunction.
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(as a) or
You
can+also
usehas
theaPIP
feature
“PIP”
z • ••The
CH
button
tactile
dot. by
Useselecting
itodabirom
Možete
da
prebacujete
audio
slike
down
( ).thewhen
from
Options
reference
operating
TV.
“Audio
Swap”
iz menu.
menijathe
opcija.
3 2 +/–/
• PIP /funkciju takođe možete koristiti oda• Increases (+) or decreases (–) the volume.
birom
“PIP”
iz menija
• In TV
menu:
Moves
throughopcija.
the options right ( )
/
).
– Input select / Enter
• Displays the connected equipment list and selects
the input source (page 13).
• In TV menu: Selects the menu or option, and
confirms the setting.
5
Displays or cancels the menu.
6
Operating the TV
or left (
4
– Remote sensor / Light sensor
Receives IR signals from the remote.
Senses room light level and adjusts the screen
brightness accordingly. Do not put anything over the
sensor, doing so may affect its function.
7
/
– Picture Off / Timer indicator
Lights up in green when you select “Picture Off”
(page 30).
8 1 – Standby indicator
Lights up in red when the TV is in standby mode.
9 " – Power
indicator
SRP
14
• Lights
up in green when the TV is turned on.
GB
14
• Flashes while the remote is being operated.
11 GB
Using Menu
Functions
Upotreba
funkcija
menija
Using
Menu
Using
Menu
Functions
Using
MenuFunctions
Functions
Using Menu Functions
Navigating through menus
through
menus
ProlazNavigating
kroz
menije
Navigating
through
menus
Navigating
through
menus
The
HOME button
allows you to access a variety of TV settings and USB media
Navigating
through
menus
The
HOME
button
allows
you
toto
access
a variety
ofof
TV
settings
and
USB
media
The
HOME
button
you
a aavariety
and
The
HOME
button
allows
you
to
access
variety
of
TV
settings
and
USB
media
The
HOME
buttonallows
allows
you
toaccess
accessraznim
variety
ofTV
TVsettings
settings
andUSB
USBmedia
media
Tipka
HOME
omogućava
vam da
pristupite
podešenjima
TV prijemfiles.
files.
files.
files.
nika
i
datotekama
USB
uređaja.
1 Press HOME
on the TV or remote.
through
menus
files.
Navigating
HOME
on
thethe
TV
or
remote.
1The
Press
HOME
on
TV
remote.
1F1
Press
HOME
on
the
TV
or
remote.
HOME
button
allows
you
toor
access
a variety
of TV settings and USB media
1Press
Press
HOME
on
the
TV
or
remote.
Press
/f
toHOME
select
an
option,
then
press
.
1 Pritisnite
na TV-u
ili daljinskom.
files.
2
F
f
Press
/
to
select
an
option,
then
press
22
Press
then
press
F
f
Press
select
an
option,
then
press
2 Pritisnite
F/fFza
nekean
zatim
pritisnite
2the
F/f//odabir
ftoto
Press
toselect
select
anoption,
option,
then
press. . ..
Follow
instructions
on
the opcije,
screen.
33
Sledite
uputstvo
na ekranu.
133Follow
Press
HOME
on the TV
or
remote.
thethe
instructions
onon
thethe
screen.
Follow
instructions
screen.
Follow
the
instructions
on
the
screen.
the
instructions
on
the
screen.
Do this
Za 3
izlazak
iz menija,
pritisnite
To4 exit
theFollow
menu,
press
HOME. HOME.
2
F
f
Press
/
to
select
an
option,
then
4
To
exit
the
menu,
press
HOME.
To
exit
the
menu,
press
HOME.
4
To
exit
the
menu,
press
HOME.
4
1 Press the blue button.
4 To exit the menu, press HOME. press .
Navigating
2Menu
Press the yellow button to select
the 3
Favourite
list
want to through
Follow
theyou
instructions
on the screen.menus
Description
Meni
Opis
Using Menu Functions
2
3
4
Using Menu Functions
edit. Menu
Menu
Menu
Description
1 Digital
Favourites
You can Description
select
the exit
Digital
Favourite
list. HOME. The HOME button allows you to access a var
Menu
Description
4Description
To
the
menu,
press
13 Digital
Favourites
Možete
odabrati
Digital
list.
Press 1
/f
/G/gFavourites
to select
the channel
you
wantFavourite
to add
or
F1
files.
Digital
You
can
select
the
Digital
Favourite
list.list.
Favourites
You
can
select
Digital
Favourites
You
can
select
the
Digital
Favourite
1
2remove,
Digital EPG
You can select
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide (EPG) (page 16).
1Digital
Digital
You
can
selectthe
theDigital
DigitalFavourite
Favouritelist.
list.
then
pressFavourites
. Možete
2 Digital
EPG
odabrati
digitalni
elektronski
programski
vodič
(EPG)
(str.
16).(page 16).
Digital
EPG
can
select
thethe
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
You
can
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
(page
Digital
EPG
You
can
select
the
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
(page
16).
2
3 Photo22
You can You
enjoy
photo
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).1 Press
HOME
on
the16).
TV
DigitalEPG
EPG
You
canselect
select
theDigital
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
(page
16). or remote.
2Digital
Menu
Description
31 Photo
Možete
uživati
u
datotekama
sa
fotografijama
putem
USB
uređaja
(str.
17).
current
Press
the
blue
button.
Photo
You
can
enjoy
photo
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).
Photo
You
can
enjoy
photo
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).
Photo
You
can
enjoy
photo
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).
3
You
can
enjoy
music
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).
4 Music33
3
Photo
You
can
enjoy
photo
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).
1 yellow
Digital button
Favourites
can
select
the
Digital
Favourite
list. uređaja
2 Press
F17).
/f to select an option, then pr
Press 4
the
to
selectuživati
the You
Favourite
list
you
want
to
42 Music
Možete
ucan
muzičkim
datotekama
putem
USB
(str.
Music
enjoy
music
files
via
USB
devices
17).
You
can
enjoy
music
files
via
devices
(page
17).
4Music
Music
You
can
enjoy
music
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).
Video 4
You can You
enjoy
video
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).(page
5edit.
MusicEPG
You
can
enjoy
files
viaUSB
USB
devices
(page
17). (EPG) (page 16).
Digital
You
can
select
themusic
Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
24
Follow
the instructions on the screen.
3(page
56
Video
Možete
uživati
u“Settings”
video
datotekama
putem
USB
uređaja
(str.
17).
Video
You
can
enjoy
video
files
viavia
USB
(page
17).
55
You
can
enjoy
video
files
USB
devices
17).
5Video
Video
You
can
enjoy
video
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).
Settings
Displays
the
menu
where
most
ofdevices
the
advanced
settings
Video
You
can
enjoy
video
files
USB
devices
(page
17). and adjustments are
the
blue
button.
3 Press
35
Photo
You
can
enjoy
photo
files
viavia
USB
devices
(page
17).
Settings
Displays
thethe
“Settings”
menu
where
most
the
advanced
settings
andZa
adjustments
areare
6 Settings66
Prikazuje
meni
“Settings”
gde
se izvode
najnaprednija
podešenja
ithe
postavke.
detalje
performed.
For
details
about
settings,
see
page
21
toof30.
Settings
Displays
menu
where
most
of
settings
6
Settings
Displays
the
“Settings”
menu
where
most
of
the
advanced
settings
and
adjustments
are
To
exit
menu,
press
HOME.
Settings
Displays
the“Settings”
“Settings”
menu
where
most4
ofthe
theadvanced
advanced
settingsand
andadjustments
adjustments
are
6
4 Press G4
/g
to
select “Yes”, then press
toenjoy
confirm.
Music
You
can
music
files
via
USB
devices
(page
17).
performed.
For
details
about
settings,
seesee
page
2121
to
30.
performed.
For
details
about
settings,
see
page
21
to30.
30.
performed.
For
details
settings,
page
to
o podešenjima,
pogledajte
strane
21about
do
30.
performed.
For
details
about
settings,
see
page
21
to
30.
You can enjoy video files via USB devices (page 17).
5 Video
Menu
Description
6 Settings
Displays the
“Settings” menu where most of
the advanced settings and adjustments are
Using
the
Digital
Favourite
list
*
performed.
details
about
settings, see page
30. the Digital Favourite list.
1For
Digital
Favourites
You 21
cantoselect
Upotreba
Digital
Favourite
liste
*
al Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
*
Using
the
Digital
Favourite
list
*feature
Using
the
Digital
Favourite
list
*** You
Using
the
Digital
Favourite
list
Using
the
Digital
Favourite
list
The
Favourite
allows
you
tothe
specify
to four Programme
2
Digital
EPG
can
select
DigitalupElectronic
Favourite Set-up
Možete
napraviti
četiri
različite
liste
omiljenih
lists
of your
favourite
programmes.
The
Favourite
feature
allows
you
toto
specify
updevices
to
four
The
Favourite
feature
allows
you
to
specify
upto
tofour
four
GUIDE.
1Set-up In digital mode, press 3
The
Favourite
feature
allows
you
specify
up
Favourite
Set-up
Photo
You
can
enjoy
photo
files
via
USB
(page
Favourite
The
Favourite
feature
allows
you
to
specify
up
to
four
Favourite
Set-up
Favourite Set-up
kanala.
lists
ofof
your
favourite
programmes.
lists
your
favourite
programmes.
lists
of
your
favourite
programmes.
lists
of
your
favourite
programmes.
1
In
digital
mode,
press
HOME
and
select
Using2the
Digital
Favourite
list
*
4
Music
You
can
enjoy
music
files
via
USB
devices
(pag
Perform the desired operation as shown in
1
U
digitalnom
modu,
pritisnite
i
HOME
1
In
digital
mode,
press
HOME
and
select
“Digital
Favourites”.
In
digital
mode,
press
HOME
and
select
1
In
digital
mode,
press
HOME
and
select
1
the following table or displayed
on
the
Youfeature
can
enjoy
video
files
USB
devices
(page
5 Video
1“Digital
In digital
mode,
press
HOME
andup
select
The
Favourite
allows
you
to via
specify
to four
Favourites”.
Favourite Set-up
“Digital
Favourites”.
“Digital
Favourites”.
screen.
“Digital
Favourites”.
“Digital
Favourites”.
Displays
theprogrammes.
“Settings”
menu where
6 Settings2 izaberite
Perform
desired
operation
as shown
in most of the
lists the
of
your
favourite
Digital
Fri 16 Mar 11:35
Enter Programme Number:
Favourites 1
12: 30
13: 00
Neighbours
Afterlife
le: Britains Iden...
The Jeremy Kyle...
Special Victims U...
A Picture of Brit...
uth About the...
CSI: Crime Scene Inv...
001
002
Cracker
003
Homes Under th...
004
PartyPoker.com Worl...
005
Vodafone TBA: L...
006
Eastenders
This is BBC FOUR
The Sharon Osb...
007
008
BBC ONEFavourites 1
Favourites
1 1
Favourites
BBC TWO
Favourites 1
001 001
BBC
001ONE
BBCBBC
ONEONE
ITV1
001
BBC ONE
002 002
BBC
BBCBBC
TWO
002TWO
TWO
Channel 4
002 BBC TWO
003 003
ITV1
003
ITV1
ITV1
Five
003 4
ITV1
004 004
Channel
4 4
004Channel
Channel
BBC Three
004
Channel 4
005 005
Five
Favourites
1 FiveFive
005
ITV2
005Three
Five
006 006
BBC
BBC
Three
006
BBC
Three
Sky Sports
001 BBC ONE
006 BBC Three
007 007
ITV2
ITV2
ITV2
UKTV History
002 007
BBC
TWO
007
ITV2
008 008
Sky
Sports
SkySky
Sports
Sports
003 008
ITV1
008 History
Sky Sports
009 009
UKTV
UKTV
History
UKTV
004 009
Channel
4 History
009 UKTV History
005 Five
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
000
Digital
Digital
Digital
Digital
More 4
EnterEnter
Programme
Number:
000 000000
Programme
Number:
Enter
Programme
Number:
abc1
Enter Programme Number: 000
010 010
More
4 More
010More
4 4
QVC
010
More
4
011 011
abc1
011abc1
abc1
UKTV Gold
011 abc1
012 012
QVC
012QVCQVC
Digital
The HITS
012 Gold
QVC
013 UKTV
GoldGold
UKTV
UKTV Bright Ideas 013013UKTV
013
UKTV
Gold
014 014
The
HITS
Enter
Programme
Number:
000
TheThe
HITS
014
HITS
ftn
014 Bright
The HITS
015 015
UKTV
Ideas
UKTV
Ideas
UKTV
Bright
Ideas
TMF
010 015
More
4 Bright
UKTV Bright Ideas
016 016
ftn015ftn ftn
E4
011 016
abc1
016 ftn
017 017
TMF
TMF
017
TMF
012 QVC
018 018
E4017E4 TMF
013 018
UKTVE4
Gold
018 E4
014 The HITS
performed.
For details
settings,
seein
page 2
the
desired
operation
shown
2
following
table
or
displayed
onabout
theas
Perform
the
desired
as
shown
Perform
the
desired
operation
as
shown
Izvedite
željeni
postupak
prema
2the
the
desiredoperation
operation
asselect
showninin
in
2Perform
122
InPerform
digital
mode,
HOME
and
the
following
tablepress
or displayed
on the
screen.
screen. the
thefollowing
followingtable
tableorordisplayed
displayedon
onthe
the
the following
tableuputstvu
or displayed
“Digital
Favourites”.
sledećojscreen.
tablici
ili prema
sa on the
screen.
screen.
screen.
DigitalFavourite
Favourite
list
Digital
lista
ekrana.
2 Perform
the desired operation as shown in
e Guide (EPG)
Digital
Favourite
list
Favourite
list
*
Digital
Favourite
list
Digital
Favourite
list
* *Ova
možda
neće
biti
dostupna
nekim Using the Digital
Thisfunkcija
function
may
not
be available
in someucountries/regions.
Digital
Favourite
list
the following table or displayed on the
Baseball Wedne...
Trans World Sport
009
018
006
BBC Three
015
007
ITV2
016
UKTV Bright Ideas
ftn
lable in some countries/regions.
* *This
function
may
not not
be available
some
countries/regions.
državama/regijama.
018 E4 in in
009function
UKTV History
may
**This
This
may
available
in
some
countries/regions.
Thisfunction
function
maynot
notbebe
beavailable
available
insome
somecountries/regions.
countries/regions.
Favourite Set-up
008
Sky Sports
017
TMF
screen.
The Favourite fe
To
Do this
lists of your favo
Do
this
Za
Učinite
sledeće
ToDigital
DoDo
this
Favourite list
To
this
To
Do
this
Create yourTo
Favourite list for the first
1 Press Do
tothis
select “Yes”.
1 In digital m
Press
to select
themay
programme,
then press
time F/f/G/g
*Create
This
function
not
be
in some
countries/regions.
Create
your
Favourite
listlist
foravailable
the
first
toto
select
1 1.1Press
your
Favourite
first
Create
your
Favourite
list
for
the
first
Press
“Yes”.
1
Press
to
select
“Yes”.
Pritisnite
za
odabir
“Yes”.
Press
yellow
to “Yes”.
select
the Favourite list.
2put
Pravljenje
vaše
liste
omiljenih
kanala
prvi
Create
your
Favourite
listfor
forthe
the
first the
Press button
toselect
select
“Yes”.
1
“Digital Fav
time
time
time
yellow
button
toto
select
the
Favourite
Press GUIDE.
22Press
žutu
tipku
za
odabir
liste
omiljenih
time
Press
yellow
button
the
list.
2
Press
the
yellow
button
to
select
the
Favourite
list.
/Pritisnite
f
/G/the
gthe
to
select
the
channel
you
want
tokanala.
add,list.
then
3 Press2F
2
Press
the
yellow
button
toselect
select
theFavourite
Favourite
list.
To
Do
this
Perform
th
2zatim
za
odabir
kojiyou
želite
da
dodate,
press3 33Press
.Pritisnite
F/ f
//G
//g
thekanala
channel
want
to add,
then
Press
Press
to
select
the
channel
you
want
add,
then
3
3Press
PressFF
/f
/G
toselect
selectthe
thechannel
channelyou
youwant
wanttoto
toadd,
add,then
then
F/f
f/G
G/g//tog
gtoselect
the
followin
Create your Favourite list for the first
1pritisnite
“Yes”. list are indicated by a
press
. ..to. select
Channels
that
are stored
in the Favourite
press
press
press
. details,
mmes has been selected,time
a message asking for a PIN code will appear on the
screen. For
symbol.2Kanali
Channels
that
are
stored
in
theto
Favourite
list
are are
indicated
bysu
abya a screen.
koji
su
sačuvani
u listi
omiljenih
kanala
označeni
Press
the
yellow
button
select
the
Favourite
list.
Channels
that
Favourite
list
by
Channels
that
are
stored
the
Favourite
list
indicated
28.
Channels
thatare
arestored
storedinin
inthe
the
Favourite
listare
areindicated
indicated
by a
symbol.
symbol.
symbol.
simbolom.
to
finish
setting
up.
4 Press RETURN
F/f/G/g
Press
3Digital
symbol.
Favourite
listto select the channel you want to add, then
RETURN
toto
finish
setting
up.
4 44Press
Pritisnite
za
završetak
podešavanja.
Press
RETURN
finish
setting
up.
Press
RETURN
to
finish
setting
up.
4press
.RETURN
Press
RETURN
to
setting
Watch a channel
1 Press the
yellow
button
to
through
your
Favourite
*4
This
function
notnavigate
be finish
available
in someup.
countries/regions.
Channels
thatmay
are stored
in the Favourite
list
are indicated by a
Watch
a channel
lists. 1 1Press
the
yellow
button
toto
navigate
through
your
Favourite
Watch
channel
Watch
a aachannel
Press
the
yellow
button
navigate
through
1
Press
the
yellow
button
to
navigate
through
your
Favourite
symbol.
1
Pritisnite
žutu
tipku
za
navigaciju
kroz
vašu
listu your
omiljenih
Watch
channel
1 Press the yellow button to navigate through
yourFavourite
Favourite
Gledanje kanala
lists.
To
Do
this
lists.
lists.
2 Press F
f
/
to
select
the
channel,
then
press
.
lists.RETURN to finish setting up.
Press
4kanala.
/f
channel,
then
press
. .
FF
2Create
Press
/f
the
then
press
F
f
Press
//to
to
select
the
channel,
then
press
2
your
Favourite
listthe
for
thechannel,
firstzatim
1pritisnite
Press
“Yes”.
22Press
za
odabir
kanala,
F
ftoselect
2Pritisnite
Press
toselect
select
the
channel,
then
press.to.select
.
Turn off the Favourite list
Press RETURN.
Watch a channel
1time
Press the yellow button to navigate2through
your
Favourite
Press
the
yellow
button
to selec
Turn
offoff
the
Favourite
listlist
Press
RETURN.
Press
RETURN.
Turn
the
Favourite
Turn
off
the
Favourite
list
Press
lists. RETURN.
off the Favourite
Press
RETURN.
Isključivanje Turn
liste omiljenih
kanalalist
Pritisnite
RETURN.
3 Press F/f/G/g to select the ch
2 Press F/f to select the channel, then
press . .
press
Favourites 1
Turn off the Favourite list
Digital
Enter Programme Number:
001
BBC ONE
010
More 4
002
BBC TWO
011
abc1
003
ITV1
012
004
Channel 4
013
UKTV Gold
005
Five
014
The HITS
006
BBC Three
015
007
ITV2
016
ftn
008
Sky Sports
017
TMF
009
UKTV History
018
E4
Press RETURN.
Watch a channel
000
QVC
UKTV Bright Ideas
Channels that are stored in the Favou
symbol.
PressContinued
RETURN
toSRP
finish setting
4Nastavlja
se
Continued
15
Continued
Continued
GB
Continued
1 Press the yellow15
button to navig
GBGB
G
lists.
15
15
15
15 G
004 Channel 4
Enter Programme Number:
005 Five
013
UKTV Gold
The HOME button allows you to access a variety of TV settings and
mediathe desired
2 USB
Perform
operation
The
Favourite as
fea
1 Inmenus
digital mode,
press HOME
and select
Favourite
Set-up
Digital files.
Favourite list Navigating
through
lists
of
your
favo
the
following
table
or
displayed
o
* This function may not be available in some countries/regions.
The“Digital
HOME Favourites”.
button allows
you to access a variety of TV sett
screen.
1 Press HOME Do
on the
1 In digital
m
files.
To
thisTV or remote.
in
Za
Učinite
sledeće2 Perform the desired operation as shown
“Digital
Fav
To
Do this
Digital Favourite list
the
table or displayed on the
2 inPress
anthe
option,
press
. following
ton.
Add or remove channels
the F/f to select
1 Press
blue then
button.
1select
Press
HOME on the TV or remote.
* This
function
in some
countries/regions.
screen.
Create
your
Favourite
list
formay
the not
firstbe available
1
Press
to
“Yes”.
currently
edited
Favourite
list
1
Pritisnite
plavu
tipku.
Dodavanje
ili
brisanje
unosa
iz
liste
omiljenih
utton to select the Favourite
list
wantthe
to instructions
2 Press the
yellow
button to select the Favourite list you want to 2 Perform the
3 you
Follow
on
the
screen.
the followin
2
Pritisnite
žutuyellow
tipku
za
odabir
kojuthe
želite
da menjate.
2
Press
the
button
toliste
select
list. press
2 Press
F/f
to
select
anFavourite
option,
then
.
kanala Digitaltime
edit.
Favourite list
To
Do this
3/f3
Pritisnite
select
za
odabir kanala
kojito
želite
dodate
ili screen.
Press
F
/f/G/the
g
to
select
the
channel
youda
want
to add,
then
4
To
exit
the menu,
pressFHOME.
o select the channel
you
want
to
add
or
3
Press
/
G
/
g
to
channel
you
want
add
or
3 Follow
instructions
* This function mayCreate
not be your
available
in some
Favourite
listcountries/regions.
for
thepress
first
skinete,
zatim.1pritisnite
.to the
Press
select
“Yes”. on the screen.
s .
remove,
then
press
Digital
Favourite. list
time
Channels that
stored
the menu,
Favourite
listselect
are
indicated
by a
2 Press
the
yellow
buttonpress
to
the Favourite
list.
4are
To
exitin
the
HOME.
Do*this
function
maytipku.
not be available in some countries/regions.
Menu
Description
RemoveTo
all
channels
the current
ton.
1 Press
the
blue
button.
symbol.
1 This
Pritisnite
plavu
Brisanje
svih
kanala from
iz
trenutne
liste omiljenih
3
Press
F
/
f
/
G
/
g
to
select
the
channel
you
want
to add,
Favourite
list your Favourite
list
fortothe
the Digital
first
1 the
Press
to
select
1 Digital
Favourites
Youyou
canwant
select
Favourite
list.
utton
to select
theCreate
Favourite
list
2 Press
yellow
button
to“Yes”.
select
list
you
to
24
Pritisnite
žutu press
tipku
za
liste koju
želite
dawant
menjate.
Press
RETURN
to odabir
finish
setting
up.
kanala
. the Favourite
To
Do this
time
Description
edit.
3 Pritisnite
plavuGuide
tipku.
2 Press
the yellow
button
tothat
select
the
list. list are indicated by a
Channels
are stored
in the Favourite
2 Digital EPG
You can select theMenu
Digital
Electronic
Programme
(EPG)
(page
16). Favourite
Watch a channel
1
Press
the
yellow
button
to
navigate
throughlist.
your
Favourite
Create
your
Favourite
list
for
the first
ton.
4
Pritisnite
za
odabir
“Yes”,
zatim
pritisnite
za
potvrdu.
1
Press
to
select
“Yes”.
symbol.
1
Digital
Favourites
You
can
select
the
Digital
Favourite
3
Press
the
blue
button.
3
Press
F
/
f
/
G
/
g
to
select
the
channel
you
want
to
add,
then
3 Photo
You can enjoy photo files via USB devices
lists. (page 17).
time
press
.
ct “Yes”, then press
to confirm.
4
Press
RETURN
toto
finish
setting
up.
2
Press
theProgramme
yellow button
selec(
4
Press
G
/g to select
“Yes”,
then
press
confirm.
2
Digital
EPG
You
can
select
the
Digital
Electronic
Guideto(EPG)
4 Music
You can enjoy music files via USB2devices
(page
17).
Press
to select
channel,
then
press by a.
Channels
that F
are/f
stored
in the the
Favourite
list3are
indicated
Press
F
/f/G/(page
g
to select
the ch
3
Photo
You
can
enjoy
photo
files
via
USB
devices
17).
Watch
a channel
Press the yellow button to navigate through your Favou
5 Video
You can
enjoy
video files via USB
devices (page1 17).
symbol.
press .
Turndigitalnog
off the Favourite list4
Press RETURN.
Upotreba
elektronskog
programskog
Music
You
can settings
enjoy
music
files via USB
(page 17).
6 Settings
Displays the “Settings”
menu4 where
most
of
the
advanced
and
aredevices
Press RETURN lists.
to
finish
setting
up.adjustments
Channels
that are stored in the Favou
2 Press
Fenjoy
/f tovideo
select
the
channel,
then
press
5 Video
You
files
via
USB devices
(page
17). .
ammevodiča
Guidethe
(EPG)
** details
performed. Electronic
For
about settings,
see page 21
to
30.can
Using
Digital
Programme
Guide
(EPG)
*
(EPG)
symbol.
Watch a channel
1 Press the yellow Displays
button tothenavigate
through
yourmost
Favourite
6
Settings
“Settings”
menu
where
of
the
advanced
settin
4
Press
RETURN
to
finish
setting
Turn off the Favourite list lists.
Press RETURN.
GUIDE
1 In digital mode,
press GUIDE.
1 1In
mode,
press
GUIDE.
Udigital
digitalnom
modu
pritisnite
GUIDE.
performed.
For
details
about
settings,
see page 21 to 30.
2 Press
/f to select the channel, then1press
. yellow button to navig
Watch F
a channel
Press the
2Using
Performthe
the desired
operation
as shown inlist
the željeni
desired postupak
operation
shownContinued
in
Izvedite
prema
Digital
Favourite
* 2 2Perform
lists. as
Turn off
Favourite on
list the
Press RETURN.the following table or displayed on the
the following table
orthe
displayed
2
Press
F
/
f
to
select
the channe
sledećoj
tablici
ili
prema
uputstvu
sa
G
The Favourite feature allows you to specify up to four
Favourites 1
000
014
The HITS
001
BBC ONE
006
BBC Three
010
More 4
015
002
BBC TWO
007
ITV2 abc1
011
016
ftn
003
ITV1
008
Sky Sports
012
QVC
017
004
Channel 4
009
UKTV UKTV
HistoryGold
013
018
005
Five
014
The HITS
TMF
Favourites 1
E4
001 BBC ONE
006
BBC Three
015
UKTV Bright Ideas
007
ITV2
016
ftn
008
Sky Sports
017
TMF
009
UKTV History
018
E4
UKTV Bright Ideas
Digital
Enter Programme Number:
010
More 4
002
BBC TWO
011
abc1
003
ITV1
012
004
Channel 4
013
UKTV Gold
005
Five
014
The HITS
006
BBC Three
015
007
ITV2
016
ftn
008
Sky Sports
017
TMF
009
UKTV History
018
E4
000
QVC
UKTV Bright Ideas
Using Menu Functions
Fri 16 Mar 11:35
screen.
Favourite Set-up
Favourites 1
Fri 16 Mar
11: 30
12: 00
001
BBC ONE
Homes Under the Hammer
002
BBC TWO
Ready Steady Cook
003
ITV1
Dancing On Ice Exclusive
004
Channel 4
Sign Zone: Ancient Rome: The Rise a...
005
Five
House
006
ITV2
Crime Hour: Midsomer Murders
007
BBC THREE
BBC Learning Zone: Schools: World P...
008
BBC FOUR
Afterlife
CSI: Crime Scene Inv...
Cracker
The Jeremy Kyle...
Law and Order: Special Victims U...
Digital
ER
13: 00
Neighbours
Extraordinary People: Britains Iden...
Enter Programme Number:
BBC ONE
009
ITV3
002
010
SKY THREE
BBC TWO
PartyPoker.com Worl...
Vodafone TBA: L...
000
A Picture of Brit...
003
ITV1 011
004
Channel 4
013
UKTV Gold
005
Five
014
The HITS
006
BBC Three
015
UKTV Bright Ideas
007
ITV2
016
ftn
This is BBC FOUR
Favourite Set-up
Trans World Sport
Carry On 012
Up The QVC
Khyber
More 4
1
The Sharon Osb...
Baseball Wedne...
001
15
Digital
“Digital Favourites”.
Enter Programme Number:
Favourites 1
Digital Electronic Programme Guide (EPG)
*
Press RETURN.
Con
The Favourite feature allows
yo
In digital mode, press HOME and select
lists of your favourite programm
Turn off the Favourite list
Eastenders
010 More
4 Raymond
Everybody
Loves
Racing from
011 Chepstow
abc1 and Ascot
Homes Under th...
screen.
Using the
Digital
Favourite
list
lists of your favourite
programmes.
ekrana.
Real Crime: The Truth About the...
001
P
12: 30
BBC ONE
2
000
1 In digital mode, press H
Perform the desired operation as shown in Continued
010
More 4
011
abc1
002
BBC TWO
003
ITV1
004
Channel 4
013
UKTV Gold
005
Five
014
The HITS
006
BBC Three
015
007
ITV2
016
ftn
008
Sky Sports
017
TMF
009
UKTV History
018
E4
“Digital Favourites”.
Digitalni elektronski programski vodič (EPG)
the following table or displayed on the
This function
not be
available
in some countries/regions.
15 GB
** Ova
funkcijamay
možda
neće
biti dostupna
u nekim
screen.
2
Perform the desired op
državama/regijama
To
Do this
008
Sky Sports
017
TMF
009
UKTV History
018
E4
Digital Favourite list
the programme,
press .
Watchthen
a programme
012
Turn off the EPG
UKTV Bright Ideas
Press F/f/G/g to select the programme, then press
* This function may not be available in some countries/regions.
To
QVC
.
the following table or di
screen.
Digital
PressFavourite
GUIDE. list
Do this* This function may not be available in some countries/regions.
~
Create
Favourite
for the
first
1For
Press
to select “Yes”.
sledeće
king foryour
a PIN
willlist
appear
onfor
theprogrammes
screen.Učinite
details,
• Za
Ifcode
an age
restriction
has
will appear on the screen. For details,
Tobeen selected, a message asking for a PIN code
Do this
time
2
Press
the
yellow button to select the Favourite list.
see “Parental Lock” on page 28.
Create
Favourite
listprograma,
for channel
the firstzatim
Pressto add,
Gledanje programa
/fyour
za
pritisnite
.to select
3Pritisnite
Press
F
/G/g
to odabir
select
the
you1
want
then “Yes”.
nd indicators
presstime .
2 Press the yellow button to select the Favourit
EPG-a
Pritisnite
GUIDE.
1 Isključenje
1 – Power
Channels
that are stored in the Favourite list are3indicated
by/f
a /G/g to select the channel you wa
Press F
Press to turn the TV on or to switch
to standby mode.
symbol.
press .
• To disconnect the TV from the AC power
Press RETURN
tona
finish
setting
Channels
that arePIN
stored
in the
• Ako je ograničenje starosti za4 programe
odabrano,
ekranu
će seup.
pojaviti poruka
za traženje
koda.
ZaFavourite
detalje, list are ind
completely, pull the plug from the AC power
outlet.
pogledajte
“Parental Lock” na1strani
28.the yellow button to navigate throughsymbol.
Watch a channel
Press
your Favourite
4 Press RETURN to finish setting up.
lists.
• Selects the next (+) or previous
(–) channel.
Watch
channel
2 Press
F/fa to
select the channel, then press
. the yellow button to navigate through y
1 Press
• In TV menu: Moves through the options up ( ) or
lists.
down
(
).
Turn off the Favourite list
Press RETURN.
2 Press F/f to select the channel, then press
3 2 +/–/ /
• Increases (+) or decreases (–) the volume.
Turn off the Favourite list
Press RETURN.
2 CH +/–/
/
4
/
)
– Input select / Enter
• Displays the connected equipment list and selects
the input source (page 13).
• In TV menu: Selects the menu or option, and
confirms the setting.
5
Displays or cancels the menu.
6
– Remote sensor / Light sensor
Receives IR signals from the remote.
Senses room light level and adjusts the screen
brightness
accordingly. Do not put anything over the
GB
16
SRP
sensor,
doing so may affect its function.
16
7
/
– Picture Off / Timer indicator
Lights up in green when you select “Picture Off”
Operating the TV
• In TV menu: Moves through the options right (
or left ( ).
Continued
15 GB
Using
the
Favourite list
lists of
your Digital
favourite programmes.
Enter Programme Number:
Digital
000
ns
Do this
Favourites 1
*
The Favourite feature allows you t
The Favourite
feature
you tomode,
specifypress
up to four
1 allows
In digital
HOME*and select
Favourite
Set-up
to select
“Yes”.
1 Press Using
the
Digital
Favourite
list
lists feature
of yourallows
favourite
lists
of
your
favourite
programmes.
The
Favourite
youprogrammes
to specify u
Favourites”.
1button
In digital
mode,
press
HOME
and select
Favourite
Set-up
the yellow
to select
the“Digital
Favourite
list.
2 Press
Playing
back
photo/music/video
via
USB
lists
of
your
favourite
programmes.
The
Favourite
feature
allows
you
to
specify
up to
Favourites”.
1 Inindigital mode, press HOM
Set-up In“Digital
digitalthe
mode,
press
HOME
and
select
/G/1
tofiles
select
channel
you
want
add,
then
F/fFavourite
g
3 Press
Perform
the
desired
shown
lists of as
your
favourite
programmes.
You can enjoy
photo/music/video
stored in
a2Sony
digital
stilltocamera
oroperation
camcorder
through
a USB
cable
or
“Digital
Favourites”.
Favourites”.
press . slika/muzike/video
digital
the following
table
or displayed
on
the mode, press HOME and s
Reprodukcija
snimaka
putem
USB-a
2 “Digital
Perform
the desired
operation
as shown
in 1 In
USB
storage device on your
TV.
“Digital
Favourites”.
pressthe
HOME
andopera
sele
Channels
that are
stored
in following
the Favourite
list
are
indicated
by
aon the 1 In digital
Playing
back
photo/music/video
via
USB
screen.
the
table
or
displayed
2mode,
Perform
desired
thedatoteka
desiredslika/muzike/video
operation as shown
in sačuvanih na
2 uPerform
Na ovom TV-u
možete uživati
reprodukciji
snimaka
Sony
digitalnom
symbol.
“Digital
Favourites”.
Connect
a
supported
USB
device
to
the
TV.
1fotoaparatu
screen.
You
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
files
stored
in
a
Sony
digital
still
camera
or
camcorder
through
a
USB
cable
or
the
following
table
or
displ
the
following
table
or
displayed
on
the
ili kamkorderu
putem USB
USB
uređaja
za still
memorisanje.
desired
operation as s
2 Perform
Youlist
can 4
enjoy
photo/music/video
fileskabla
storediliinup.
a Sony
digital
camera or camcorder
throughthe
a USB
cable or
igital Favourite
Press
RETURN to finish
setting
storage
device
screen.
the following
tableoperation
or displayed
on
the screen.
desired
as show
2 Perform
USB
storage
device on
on your
your TV.
TV.
Press
HOME.
2 USB
tThis function
may not be available in some countries/regions.
thescreen.
following table or displayed on the
1
Spojite
podržani
USBbutton
uređaj to
na navigate
TV.
1
Press
the yellow
through
your
Favourite
Favourite
list
F/f to
select “Photo”,
“Music”
3 1inPress
Connect
device
to
the
TV.
ot be available
some
countries/regions.
Connect
supported
USBDigital
device
to or
the“Video”.
TV.
screen.
lists.aa supported
Pritisnite
HOME. DoUSB
obe available2 in some countries/regions.
this
Digital
Favourite
list
This
function
may not
be
available in some countries/regions.
43 2 The
thumbnail
view
file*or
folder
appears.
Press
HOME.
Pritisnite
zaof
odabir
“Photo”,
“Music”
ilipress
“Video”.
2
F
f
Press
/
to
select
the
channel,
then
.
Press
HOME.
Dofor
this
Digital
Favourite
listtonot
reate your Favourite
list
the one
first
Press
select
“Yes”.
1 device
*iliThis
function
be na
available
in some
4 3 If Press
Lista
datoteka
foldera
pojavljuje
se
ekranu.
more
than
USB
ismay
detected,
press
the
red countries/regions.
button toDo
select
“Device Selection” from the
F/f
to
select
“Photo”,
“Music”
or
“Video”.
To
thislist.
Press
F/f
to
select
“Photo”,
“Music”
or
“Video”.
me
Do
this
listfor theAko
Press
RETURN.
*
This
function
may
notyellow
be available
in some
countries/regions.
etelist
firstlist
Pressviše od
to jednog
select
“Yes”.
2 Press
the
button
toF/f/G/g
select
the
se prepozna
USB
uređaja,
pritisnite
crveno
dugme
za
odabir
“Device
Selection”
sa liste.dostupnih
of1 available
options
and
press
, then
press
to Favourite
select
a USB
device
and press
To
Do
this you
4 iThe
thumbnail
view
of
file
or
appears.
Create
your
list for
the
first
The
thumbnail
view
of
file
or
folder
appears.
to select
1 Press
Press the
yellow
button
to/folder
select
the
Favourite
list.
2Press
ist for the first
opcija
pritisnite
,to
zatim
pritisnite
za select
odabir
USB
uređaja
i pritisnite.
select
“Yes”.
1
Press
/G/Favourite
to
the
channel
want to add,
then “Yes”.
F
f
g
3
55 Press
F/f/G/gToto select a file
or folder, then press Do. this
time
If
than
USB
is
detected,
press
red
button
“Device
from
press
.datoteke
za
odabir
iliFavourite
foldera,
pa
your
Favourite
list
for
the
first the
the
yellowSelection”
button to select
the Favourite l
2to
toselect
select
“Yes”.
1pritisnite
Press
/fCreate
/G
/gbutton
todevice
select
the
channel
you
want
toPress
add, then
3Pritisnite
Fone
Press
the
yellow
to select
the
list.
If2more
more
than
one
USB
device
is
detected,
press
the
red
button
to.Press
select
“Device
Selection”
from the
the
When
you
select
a
folder,
select
alist
file,
then
press
.Press list
time
Channels
that
are
stored
in
the
Favourite
are
indicated
by
a
Kad
odaberete
folder,
odaberite
datoteku,
a
zatim
pritisnite.
press
.
Create
your
Favourite
for
the
first
1
to
select
“Yes”.
list
of
available
options
and
press
,
then
press
F/f/G/g
to
select
a
USB
device
and
press
.
F
f
G
g
3
Press
/
/
/
to
select
the
channel
you want
2 add,
Press
the
yellow
button
to select
the Favourite
list.
/g to select
the channel
want
to
3 Press
F/time
f/Goptions
list
of available
and press
, thenyou
press
F/f/G/g
tothen
select
a USB
device
and press
.
symbol.
Playback
starts.
Channels
that
are
stored
in
the
Favourite
list
are
indicated
by
a
Počinje
reprodukcija.
press
.
2
Press
the
yellow
button
to
select
the
Favourite
list.
press
.
3.. Press F/f/G/g to select the channel you want to add, th
F/f/G/g
to
aa file
or
folder,
then
press
5 Press
Press
F/f/G/g
to select
select
file
orAuto
folder,
then
press
symbol.
4kad
Press
RETURN
to
setting
up.
spojite
USB
uređaj
je
naby
“On”
29),
automatski
seof
pojavljuje
lista
posled
z •• Ako
If you
connect
the
when
“USB
AutoStart”
Start”
isindicated
set
to3“On”
(page
29),
thumbnail
the last
played
Photo/
Channels
thatview
are
stored
in the
Favourite
list
are indicat
Channels
thatUSB
are device
stored
in “USB
the
Favourite
listfinish
arepodešen
aContinued
.the
Press
/g
to select
the
channel
you
want
to- add,
then
F/(str.
f/G
When
you
select
a
folder,
select
a
file,
then
press
. press
When
you
select
a
folder,
select
a
file,
then
press
.
Music/Video
automatically.
symbol.
4symbol.
Pressappears
RETURN
to finish setting
up.
nje
reprodukovane
slike/
muzike/video
snimka.
press
.
Channels
that
are
stored
in
the
Favourite
list
are
indicated
by
a
GB
atch a channel
the yellow button to navigate through your
Favourite
Playback
starts.
15RETURN
Playback
starts. 1toPress
4 are
Press
to finish
up. by a
symbol.
RETURN
finish setting up.
4 1Press
Channels
that
stored
in the Favourite
listsetting
are indicated
lists.
Basic
operation
of
Photo/Music/Video
Press
the
yellow
button
to
navigate
through
your
Favourite
z
•• If
you
connect
the
USB
when
“USB
Auto
Start”
is
“On”
(page
29),
view
of
Osnovne
operacije
snimaka
z can
If
you
connect
theslika/muzike/video
USB device
device
when
“USB
Auto
Start”
is set
set to
tosymbol.
“On”
(pageRETURN
29), the
the thumbnail
thumbnail
view
of the
the last
last
played Photo/
Photo/
4 Press
to finish
setting
up.played
You
operate
the
connected
USB
device
by select
thethrough
TV
remote.
lists.
Press
/f
to
the
channel,
then press
2USB
Fnavigate
Watch
a channel
appears
1 Press. the yellow button to navigate through you
Press
the
yellowautomatically.
button
to
your
Favourite
Music/Video
appears
automatically.
Možete 1Music/Video
upravljati
spojenim
uređajem
pomoću
daljinskog
upravljača
TV-a.
to finish setting up.
4 Press RETURN
2lists.
Press F/fWatch
to select
the channel, then press 1. Press thelists.
a channel
yellow button to navigate through your Favourit
urn off the Favourite
list
Press
RETURN.
Item
Description
Basic
operation
of
Basic
operation
ofselect
Photo/Music/Video
2 Press
F/f toto navigate
select thethrough
channel,
then
press
lists.
aPhoto/Music/Video
channel
the yellow
button
your
Favourite
2
Press F/Watch
f
to
the channel, then press 1 .Press
e list
You
can
operate
the
USB
the
remote.
You
canPress
operateRETURN.
the connected
connected
USB device
device by
by
the TV
TVthe
remote.
m
/M
Fast reverses/fast
forwards
file lists.
when
pressed
during
playback.
F
/f
to select
the channel, then press .
2 Press
Turn off the Favourite list
Press RETURN.
ist
Press RETURN.
2 Press F/f to select the channel, then press .
Stavka
Opis
Item
Description
001
BBC ONE
002
BBC TWO
Enterthe
Programme
Number:
e list for
first
003 010
ITV1 More 4
Enter Programme Number:
abc1
004 011
Channel
4
012
010
More QVC
4
005 Five
000 Digital
000
010
More 4
011
abc1
012
QVC
UKTV Gold
014
The HITS
015
012 014
QVC The HITS
007
ITV2
016
ftn
UKTV
013 015
UKTV
Gold Bright Ideas
008
Sky
Sports
017
TMF
ftn
014 016
The HITS
009
UKTV
History
015 017
UKTVTMF
Bright Ideas
016 018
ftn
E4
017
TMF
018
E4
018
001
Favourites 1
UKTV Bright Ideas
E4
Favourites 1 001 BBC ONE
002 BBC TWO
001 BBC ONE
003 ITV1
002 BBC TWO
004 Channel 4
003 ITV1
005 Five
004 Channel 4
006 BBC Three
005 Five
007 ITV2
006 BBC Three
008 Sky Sports
007 ITV2
009 UKTV History
008 Sky Sports
009
BBC ONE
Enter Programme Number:
002
BBC TWO
003
010 More 4
ITV1 Enter Programme
Number: 000
011 abc1
Channel 4
010 More 4
012 QVC
Five
011 abc1
013 UKTV Gold
BBC Three
012 QVC
014 The HITS
ITV2
013 UKTV Gold
015 UKTV Bright Ideas
Sky Sports
014 The HITS
016 ftn
UKTV History
015 UKTV Bright Ideas
017 TMF
016 ftn
018 E4
017 TMF
004
005
006
007
008
009
UKTV History
018
000
010 More 4
Digital
000
011 abc1
012
QVC
013
UKTV Gold
014
The HITS
015
UKTV Bright Ideas
016
ftn
017
TMF
018
E4
E4
Using
UsingMenu
Menu Functions
Functions
Using Menu Functions
.
/>
Item
m
M
m // M
N
Enter Programme
Number:
Digital
Favourites 1
013
UKTV Gold
011 013
abc1Three
006
BBC
Digital
toFavourite
the beginning
nextRETURN.
file.
Description
TurnGoes
off
the
list of the previous/
Press
Turn
the
Favourite
list
Press
RETURN.
Fast
reverses/fast
forwards
the
file
when
pressed
during
playback.
Brzooffpremotavanje
datoteke
unazad/unapred
kad
se
pritisne
tokom
reprodukcije.
Fast reverses/fast forwards the file when pressed
during
playback.
. // >
>
X.
Starts playback.
Ide na početak
prethodne/sledeće
Goesplayback.
to
the beginning
beginning of
of datoteke.
the previous/
previous/ next
next file.
file.
Goes
to
the
the
Pauses
N
xN
Starts
playback..
Započinje
reprodukciju
Starts
playback.
Stops
playback.
X
X
Pauses playback.
playback.
Pauzira reprodukciju.
Pauses
x
x
Zaustavlja
reprodukciju.
Stops
playback.
Stops
playback.
Continued
Continued
Continued
15 GB
15 GB
15 GB
Contin
Continued
z • If a video file has subtitles, they can be displayed by pressing the green button during DivX playback.
To use playback options
Press
theIfcoloured
buttons
to display
acan
list mogu
that contains
shortcuts
togreen
somebutton
setting
menus.
The listed
video file
datoteka
ima
titlove,
prikazati
pritiskom
tokom
reprodukcije
DivX options
diska. vary
z
has
they
by
the
during
DivX
z •• Ako
If aa video
video
file
has subtitles,
subtitles,
theyoni
cansebe
be displayed
displayed
by pressing
pressing
thezelene
greentipke
button
during
DivX playback.
playback.
depending on the current input and content.
ZaTo
upotrebu
opcija reprodukcije
use
options
Photo
To
use playback
playback
options
Press
the
coloured
to
aa list
that
contains
to
setting
The
listed
options
vary
Pritisnite
tipke
u bojibuttons
za prikaz
liste
koja
sadrži
doshortcuts
nekih menija
podešenja.
Navedene
razlikuju
Press the coloured
buttons
to
display
list
thatprečice
contains
shortcuts
to some
some
setting menus.
menus.
Theopcije
listedse
options
varyu
“Slideshow
Effect”:
Selects
andisplay
effect
for
a slideshow.
depending
on
the
input
and
zavisnosti
odSpeed”:
trenutnog
ulaza
i sadržaja.
depending
on
the current
current
input
and content.
content.
“Slideshow
Selects
the
slideshow
duration.
Slika
Photo
“Shuffle”:
Photo Plays a file in random order.
“Slideshow
Effect”:
Bira
efekatan
zaeffect
slideshow.
“Slideshow
Effect”:
Selects
for
“Zoom”:
Magnifies
the
picture
(“1×”,
“2×”
“4×”)
“Slideshow
Effect”:
Selects
an
effect
for aaorslideshow.
slideshow.
“Slideshow
Speed”:
Bira
trajanje
slideshow
“Slideshow
Speed”:
Selects
the
slideshow
duration.
“Slideshow Speed”: Selects the slideshowprikaza.
duration.
Music
“Shuffle”:
Reprodukcija
nasumičnim
“Shuffle”:
Plays
file
in
order.
“Shuffle”:
Plays aa Selects
file datoteke
in random
random
order.
“Playback
Target”:
to play
all files, orredosledom.
one selected file.
“Zoom”:
Uvećava
sliku
(“1×”,
“2×”
ili “4×”)
“Zoom”:
Magnifies
the
picture
(“1×”,
“2×”
“Zoom”:
Magnifies
the
picture
(“1×”,
“2×” or
or “4×”)
“4×”)
“Shuffle”:
Plays
files
in
random
order.
Muzika
Music
“Speakers”:
Selects a speaker (page 23).
Music
“Playback
Target”:
BiraSelects
reprodukciju
datoteka
iliselected
jedne odabrane
datoteke.
“Playback
Target”:
to
all
or
file.
“Playback
Target”:
Selects
to play
play svih
all files,
files,
or one
one
selected
file.
Video
“Shuffle”:
Reprodukcija
datoteka
nasumičnim
“Shuffle”:
Plays
in
random
order.
“Shuffle”:
Plays files
files
in
random
order.
“Playback
Target”:
Selects
to play
all files, orredosledom.
one selected file.
“Speakers”:
Odabir
zvučnika
(str.(“1×”,
23). 23).
“Speakers”:
Selects
aa speaker
(page
“Speakers”:
Selects
speaker
(page
23).
“Zoom”*:
Magnifies
the
picture
“2×”, “4×” or “Full”)
Video
Video
“Speakers”:
Selects a speaker (page 23).
Video
Birastop
reprodukciju
datoteka
iliselected
jedne odabrane
datoteke.
*“Playback
When youTarget”:
setTarget”:
“Zoom”,
video
“Playback
Selects
to
play
all
or
file.
“Playback
Target”:
Selects
toplayback.
play svih
all files,
files,
or one
one
selected
file.
“Zoom”*:
Uvećava
slikuthe
(“1×”,
“2×”,
“4×”
ili “Full”)
“Zoom”*:
Magnifies
picture
(“1×”,
“2×”,
“4×”
General
“Zoom”*:
Magnifies
the
picture
(“1×”,
“2×”,
“4×” or
or “Full”)
“Full”)
“Speakers”:
Odabir
zvučnika
(str.(page
23). 23).
“Speakers”:
Selects
aa speaker
“Repeat”:
Plays
a file
repeatedly.
“Speakers”:
Selects
speaker
(page
23).
* **Kada
podesite
na “Zoom”,
zaustavite
reprodukciju video snimka.
When
you
“Zoom”,
stop
video
playback.
“File
Order”:
Changes
file
When
you set
set
“Zoom”,
stoporder
video
playback.
Opšte
General
“Device
Selection”: Selects a USB device.
General
“Repeat”:
Više
putaaa reprodukuje
datoteku.
“Repeat”:
Plays
file
“Repeat”:
Plays
file repeatedly.
repeatedly.
“File
Order”:
Menja
redosled
datoteke
“File
Order”:
Changes
file
order
“File Order”: Changes file order
“Device
Selection”:
Odabir
USB
uređaja.
“Device
Selection”:
Selects
aa USB
device.
“Device
Selection”:
Selects
USB
device.
Continued
17 GB
Continued
Continued
Nastavlja se
SRP
17
GB
17 GB
17
* 2
UKTV Bright Ideas
TMF
004
016
018
ftn
E4
005
017
TMF
006
018
E4
007
008
Digital
009
Programme Number:
ITV1
014
BBC Three004
005
ITV2
Channel 4
015
UKTV Gold
The HITS 012 QVC
013 Ideas
UKTV Gold
UKTV Bright
Five
016
ftn
014
The HITS
Sky Sports006
007
UKTV History
BBC Three
017
TMF
015
UKTV Bright Ideas
ITV2
018
E4
016
ftn
008
Sky Sports
017
TMF
009
UKTV History
018
E4
Channel 4
003
Five
000
013
006
BBC Three
007
ITV2
008
Sky Sports
009
UKTV History
015
UKTV Bright Ideas
016
ftn
017
TMF
018
E4
Functions
015
017
ons
Perform the desired operation as shown in
2 Perform
“Digital Favourites”.
screen.
the following table or displayed on the
the follow
2
Perform the desired operation as shown
in
Digital Favourite list
The Favouritescreen.
feature allows you to specify up to four
the2 following
or displayed
onscreen.
the
Performtable
the desired
operation
as sho
st
Using the *Digital
Favourite
list
*
This
may
not be programmes.
available
in some countries/regions.
listsfunction
of your
favourite
screen.
the following table or displayed on the
st
Digital Favourite list
not be available
in some countries/regions.
Za podešenje
slike (Video)
screen.
The
Favourite
feature
allows
you to specify up to four
In digital
and
select
Favourite Set-up
To1Favourite
Do
this
Digital
listmode, press HOME
not be available
in
some
countries/regions.
*
This
function
may
not
be
available
in some countries/regions.
lists
of
your
favourite
programmes.
Možete podesiti kvalitet slike
USBFavourites”.
video snimka.
“Digital
Do this
Digital
Favourite
* This
function
may
not belist
available
some countries/regions.
Create
your
Favourite
list
for theinfirst
1 Press to select “Yes”.
1
Izaberite
video
snimak.
Do
this
1Press
In
digital
press HOME
Tosome
Do and
this select
time
*
This
function
may
not
be
available
countries/regions.
2
Perform
the
desired
operation
shown
in mode,
e list for the first
1 Press to select “Yes”.
2 as
theUSB-a”
yellow
button
Pogledajte“Reprodukcija
slika/muzike/videoinsnimaka
putem
(str. 17).to select the Favourite list.
“Digital
Favourites”.
To
Do this
the
following
table
or
displayed
on
the
e list for the2first
1
Press
to
select
“Yes”.
Create
your
Favourite
list
for
the
first
1 Pressyou. to
select
“Yes”.
2
the
yellow button
to select the zatim
Favourite
list.F
Pritisnite
OPTIONS
tokom reprodukcije,
/f/za
“Picture”
pritisnite
3pritisnite
Press
G/odabir
g to select
theichannel
want
to add,
then
To screen.
Do this
time
Create
Favourite
list to
forstavke,
thechannel
firstzatim
1
Press
.select
3
Pritisnite
your
odabir
pritisnite
2press
Perform
the“Yes”.
desired operation
as shown
in button to sel
2 Press
the
button
select
the Favourite
list.
2 Press
the yellow
3
F
/fyellow
/G
/g za
to
select
the
you
want
to. to
add,
then
time Create
Favourite
listpodešenje,
for the first
1pritisnite
Press
to
select
“Yes”.
the
following
table
onare
Channels
that.then
arebutton
stored
inor
thedisplayed
Favourite
list
by select
a
4
Pritisnite
da
podesite
zatim
2
Press
yellow
to
select
the
Favourite
3 press
Press F
/.f/Gyour
/g to
select
the
channel
you
want
to add,
3 Press
Fthe
/indicated
flist.
/G/g to
the
symbol.
screen.
Channels
that
arePress
indicated
by/G
a /gyellow
press time
. are stored in the Favourite list 3
2 Press
the
button
select
the Favourite
list.then
press
. to add,
F/ f
to select
the to
channel
you
want
l Favourite list
More 4
Digital
abc1
QVC
Favourites 1
Enter Programme Number:
000
UKTV Gold
The HITS
001
BBC ONE
010
More 4
UKTV Bright Ideas
002
BBC TWO
011
abc1
ftn
003
ITV1
012
TMF
004
Channel 4
013
UKTV Gold
E4
005
Five
014
The HITS
QVC
006
BBC Three
015
007
ITV2
016
ftn
008
Sky Sports
017
TMF
009
UKTV History
018
E4
UKTV Bright Ideas
able in some countries/regions.
symbol.
Displays or cancels the menu.
6
– Remote sensor / Light sensor
Receives IR signals from the remote.
Senses room light level and adjusts the screen
brightness accordingly. Do not put anything over the
sensor, doing so may affect its function.
7
/
– Picture Off / Timer indicator
Lights up in green when you select “Picture Off”
(page 30).
8 1 – Standby indicator
Lights up in red when the TV is in standby mode.
9 " – Power indicator
• Lights up in green when the TV is turned on.
• Flashes while the remote is being operated.
• Make sure that the TV is completely turned off before
unplugging the AC power cord. Unplugging the AC
power cord while the TV is turned on may cause the
indicator to remain lit or may cause the TV to
malfunction.
z • The CH + button has a tactile dot. Use it as a
reference when operating the TV.
18 SRP
Operating the TV
4
Press
RETURN
setting
Za reprodukciju
slika
slideshow
prikazalist
(Slika)
Channels
that kao
are stored
in the Favourite
arepress
indicated
a /f/G/to
. by
Channels you
that are
stored
in thethen
Fav
3 Press
F
gfinish
to select
the up.
channel
want
to add,
Digital Favourite
list
symbol.
4 Press
RETURN
to prikaz
finish setting
up.
symbol.
Možete reprodukovati
slideshow
sa fotografijama.
“Slideshow
efekat”
i “Slideshow
brzina”
mogu
se podesiti.
Channels
that
are
stored
in
the
Favourite
list
are indicated
by a
press
.
Do
this
channelin some countries/regions. 1 Press the yellow button to navigate through your Favourite
*1This function
mayWatch
not
be aavailable
symbol.
Izaberite
sliku.
4 Press
RETURN
to finish setting up.
4 PresslistRETURN
to finish
Channels that are stored in the Favourite
are indicated
by a setti
lists.
1
Press
the
yellow
buttonslika/muzike/video
to navigate through
yourputem
Favourite
he first
1
Press
to
select
“Yes”.
Pogledajte “ Reprodukcija
snimaka
USB-a
” (str.setting
17). up.
4
Presssymbol.
RETURN
to finish
Press
F/ f
the channel,
then
press
. button to na
1 lists.
Press
the
yellow
to
through
Favourite
To
Donavigate
thisili pritisnite
Watch
ayour
1 Press
the yellow
2 Press the
yellow
button
tobutton
select
the
Favourite
list. 2OPTIONS
2
Pritisnite
zelenu
tipku
u prikazu
liste
doktoseselect
slikatoprikazuje,
zatim
pritisnite
4channel
Press RETURN
finish setting
up.
lists.
lists.
2
Press
F
/
f
to
select
the
channel,
then
press
.
Watch
a
channel
1
Press
the
yellow
button
to
navigate
through
your
Favourite
3 Press
odabir
“Slideshow”
ilist
.to select
Create
yourFFavourite
for
theFavourite
first
1pritisnite
Press
/f/za
G/Turn
glist
tooff
select
the channel
you want
to Press
add,“Yes”.
then
the
RETURN.
lists.1 Press
channelthe channel,
2 .Press
FWatch
/f toaselect
then press
.
the yellow button to navigate
Favourite
2 Pressthrough
F/f toyour
select
the chan
nd
indicators
time
press Za
zaustavljanje
prikaza
2 Press
the yellow button to select the Favourite list.
e list
Press
RETURN. slideshow
lists.
2 Press
F
/f to select the channel, then press .
Pritisnite
RETURN
ili
HOME.
Channels
that
are
stored
in
the
Favourite
list
are
indicated
by
a
e list 1 1 – Power
Press RETURN.
3 Press F/f/Turn
G/gofftothe
select
the channel
you want Press
to add,RETURN.
then
Favourite
Press
F
/flist
to select the channel,
then press .
symbol.
Press
to turn the
TVoff
on the
or toFavourite
switch tolist
standby
mode. . Press2RETURN.
press
Turn
• To disconnect
fromsetting
the AC power
RETURN
toTV
finish
up.
4 Press
• Dok TVthe
pristupa
na Channels
USB uređaju,
obratite
pažnju
na sledeće:
that are
stored
in the
Favourite
list are indicated by a
Turn
off podacima
the Favourite
list
Press
RETURN.
completely,
pull the
plug fromTV
the ili
ACspojeni
power
– Nemojte
isključivati
USB uređaj.
symbol.
outlet.
the
yellow button
toUSB
navigate
through your Favourite
Continued
1 Press
– Nemojte
odspajati
kabl.
4 Press RETURN to finishContinued
setting up.
lists.
2 CH +/–/ – /Nemojte odspajati USB uređaj.
1
F
/fnext
tona
select
the
channel,
press
.
Selects
the
(+)
or previous
(–)
channel.
Watch
a channel
1then
the yellow
button Continued
to navigate through
2• Press
Podaci
USB
uređaju
mogu
sePress
oštetiti.
15 GB your Favourite
• In TV menu: Moves through the options uplists.
( ) or
Continued
Press
ili GB
gubitak podataka na mediju za
downRETURN.
( • Sony
). ne preuzima odgovornost i nije dužan da kompenzuje oštećenje15
ContinueG
2 PressuFradu
/f to
select
channel,
thennapress
.
snimanje, nastalih usled nepravilnosti
bilo
kojegthe
uređaja
spojenog
TV.
15
3 2 +/–/ • /U nekim slučajevima naziv datoteke ili foldera možda neće biti prikazan ispravno.
• Increases
(+) or decreases
(–) the volume.
Turn
off the Favourite
list
Press RETURN.
• In TV menu:
• KadMoves
spojitethrough
Sony digitalni
fotoaparat,
the options
right ( )podesite USB mod fotoaparata na Auto ili Mass Storage. Za više ).
or left (informacija
o USB povezivanju, pogledajte uputstvo isporučeno sa vašim digitalnim fotoaparatom.
Proverite
sledeću
Internet stranicu za najnovije podatke o kompatibilnim USB uređajima. http://www.
4
/ –•Input
select
/ Enter
Continued
• Displays
sony-asia.com/bravia/flash.html
the connected equipment list and selects
source (page
the input
• Koristite
USB13).
uređaj koji je u skladu sa standardima klase 15
USBGBuređaja.
thedatoteka
menu or ima
option,
and sadržanu informaciju ili je nepotpuna, ne može seContinued
• In TV menu:
• Ako Selects
odabrana
netačnu
reprodukovati.
confirms the setting.
• BRAVIA TV podržava DivX®.
15 GB
5
Ekstenzija
Extension
Format
Container
Video Codec
Kodek
Video
DivX 3.11/4.x/5.1
XviD
.avi
MPEG1
AVI
MPEG2 MP
H.264 BP/MP/HP
Audio
Kodek
Audio
Codec
PCM / MPEG1 Layer1, 2 / MP3 /
MPEG2 AAC (2ch) /
MPEG4 AAC (2ch) /
MPEG4 HE-AAC (2ch) /
Dolby Digital (2ch) / WMA v8
MPEG-4 SP/ASP
WMV v9
Divx 3.11
.wmv
.asf
ASF
XviD
MP3 / WMA v8
MPEG-4 SP/ASP
VC-1
H.264 BP/MP/HP
.mp4
.mov
.3gp
MPEG-4 SP/ASP
MP4
MPEG1 Layer1, 2 / MP3 / MPEG2 AAC /
MPEG4 AAC / MPEG4 HE-AAC
H.263
H.264 BP/MP/HP
MPEG-4 SP/ASP
.mkv
MKV
WMV v9
DivX 3.11/4.x/5.1
PCM / MPEG1 Layer1, 2 / MP3 /
MPEG2 AAC (2ch) /
MPEG4 AAC (2ch) /
MPEG4 HE-AAC (2ch) /
Dolby Digital (2ch) / WMA v8
VC-1
.mpg
.mpeg
.vob
MPEG1
PS
MPEG2 MP
MPEG1 Layer1, 2 / MP3 /
Dolby Digital (2ch)
MPEG2 MP
.ts, .m2ts
VC-1
TS
MPEG1 Layer1, 2 / MP3 / MPEG2 AAC /
MPEG4 AAC / MPEG4 HE-AAC
H.264 BP/MP/HP
USB Music
audio format
format
USB
Ekstenzija
Extension
.mp3
Audio
AudioKodek
Codec
MP3
.wma
WMA v8
USB Photo
foto format
USB
format
Ekstenzija
Extension
.jpg, .jpeg
indicators
Image
ImageKodek
Codec
JPEG
1 DCF2.0
1
– Power
DCF2.0
or ili
EXIF2.21
supported.
EXIF2.21
su
podržani.
Press to turn the TV on or to switch to standby mode.
of the
filegore
formats
is not guaranteed.
• • ToPlayback
disconnect
the above
TV from
the
ACnavedenih
power
• Reprodukcija
formata
completely, pull the plug from the AC power
outlet.
2 CH +/–/
datoteka nije zagarantovana.
/
• Selects the next (+) or previous (–) channel.
• In TV menu: Moves through the options up ( ) or
down ( ).
3 2 +/–/
/
4
/
)
– Input select / Enter
• Displays the connected equipment list and selects
the input source (page 13).
Operating
• Increases (+) or decreases (–) the volume.
• In TV menu: Moves through the options right (
or left ( ).
19 SRP
GB
19
Using Menu Functions
nd
USB Video format
Using
BRAVIA
Sync
with
Control
HDMI
Using
BRAVIA
Sync
with
Control
forfor
HDMI
Upotreba BRAVIA Sync sa funkcijom Control for HDMI
Control
for HDMI
function
enables
the to
TVcommunicate
to communicate
the connected
equipment
is compatible
The The
Control
for HDMI
function
enables
the TV
withwith
the connected
equipment
that that
is compatible
the function,
using
HDMI
CEC
(Consumer
Electronics
Control).
Forsaexample,
byopremom
connecting
Sony
equipment sa
withwith
the
function,
using
HDMI
CEC
(Consumer
Electronics
Control).
For example,
by connecting
Sony
equipment
Funkcija
Control
for
HDMI
omogućava
TV
prijemniku
komunikaciju
spojenom
koja
je kompatibilna
is compatible
Control
for HDMI
(with
HDMI
cables),
can
control
them
together.
that that
is ovom
compatible
withwith
Control
for
HDMI
(with
HDMI
cables),
you you
can
control
them
together.
funkcijom,
pomoću
HDMI
CEC
(Consumer
Electronics
Control).
Na
primer,
spajanjem Sony opreme koja je
Bekompatibilna
sure
to connect
the equipment
correctly,
and
make
the necessary
settings.
Be sure
to connect
the
correctly,
make
theHDMI
necessary
settings.
sa equipment
funkcijom
Control
forand
HDMI
(sa
kablovima),
možete upravljati njima zajedno.
Pobrinite se da je kompatibilna oprema pravilno spojena i napravite neophodna podešenja.
Control
HDMI
Control
for for
HDMI
•
•
•
•
•
•
forturns
HDMI
• Control
Automatically
turns
the connected
equipment
off when
switch
the to
TVstandby
to standby
mode
using
the remote.
Automatically
the connected
equipment
off when
you you
switch
the TV
mode
using
the remote.
• Automatski isključuje spojenu opremu kada uključite TV prijemnik u pripravno stanje pomoću daljinskog
• Automatically
the on
TVand
on and
switches
the input
to connected
the connected
equipment
when
the equipment
Automatically
turnsturns
the TV
switches
the input
to the
equipment
when
the equipment
startsstarts
to to
upravljača.
play.play.
• Automatski uključuje TV i prebacuje ulaz na spojenu opremu kada oprema započne reprodukciju.
you
turn
aspojeni
connected
audio
system
the is
TVon,
isizlaz
on, sound
the
sound
output
switches
from
the
TV
speaker
If• you
turn
on aon
connected
audio
system
while
the uključen,
TV
the
output
switches
the TV
to to
• If
Ako
uključite
audio
sistem
dok
jewhile
TV
zvuka
se prebacuje
safrom
zvučnika
TVspeaker
prijemnika
na audio
the audio
system.
thesistem.
audio
system.
• • Adjusts
theglasnoću
volume
mutes
the
sound
a connected
audio
system.
Podešava
imutes
isključuje
zvuk
(%)
spojenog
audio audio
sistema.
Adjusts
the volume
(2(2
+/–)+/–)
and and
the sound
(%)
of a of
connected
system.
Možete
upravljati
Sony
opremom
kojathat
ima
logotip
BRAVIA
Sync
pomoću
upravljača
• • You
operate
thespojenom
connected
Sony
equipment
has
the BRAVIA
logo
by TV
thedaljinskog
TV remote.
Possible TV-a.
You
can can
operate
the connected
Sony
equipment
that
has
the
BRAVIA
SyncSync
logo
by
the
remote.
Possible
Moguće
radnje
saBRAVIA
BRAVIA
Sync
tipkama,
pogledajte
operations
with
buttons,
see
page
operations
with
BRAVIA
SyncSync
buttons,
see page
9. 9. na strani 9.
–– Za
dostupne
pogledajte
uputstvo
za upotrebu
te opreme.
Refer
to instruction
the kontrole
instruction
manual
of
the equipment
for available
control.
– Refer
to the
manual
of the
equipment
for available
control.
•
Ako
je
“Control
for
HDMI”
TV
prijemnika
podešeno
na
“Control
for connected
HDMI”
spojene
opreme
se takođe
If “Control
for HDMI”
of TV
the is
TVsetisto
set“On”
to “On”
, “Control
for HDMI”
of connected
the
equipment
is also
If• “Control
for HDMI”
of the
, “Control
for “On”,
HDMI”
of the
equipment
is also
automatski
prebacuje
na
“On”.
automatically
switched
to “On”.
automatically
switched
to “On”.
Za podešenje funkcije Control for HDMI
To make
Control
HDMI
settings
To make
thethe
Control
for for
HDMI
settings
Podešenja za funkciju Control for HDMI moraju biti podešena i na TV prijemniku i na spojenoj opremi. Pogledajte
Control
for HDMI
settings
must
beon
setboth
on both
theprijemniku.
TV side
connected
equipment
See
“HDMI
Set-up”
The The
Control
for HDMI
settings
must
be
theTV
TV
side
and and
connected
equipment
side.side.
See
“HDMI
Set-up”
“Podešavanje
HDMI”
(str.
30)
zaset
podešenja
na
Za
podešenja
na spojenoj
opremi,
pogledajte
njeno
(page
30) the
for
the
TV side
settings.
For settings
on connected
the connected
equipment,
its operating
instructions.
(page
30)
for
side
settings.
For settings
on the
equipment,
referrefer
to itstooperating
instructions.
uputstvo
zaTV
upotrebu.
GB SRP
GB 20
20 20
nd indicators
Settings
adjustment
postavki
1 Podešavanje
1
– Power
Settings
adjustment
Press to turn the TV on or to switch to standby mode.
outlet.
Picture
2 CH +/–/Picture
/
Slika
• Selects the next (+) or previous (–) channel.
•Picture
In TV menu:
Moves through the
up (mode.
) or The options that can be selected differ depending on the “Scene
Mode
Setsoptions
a picture
Picture
Podešava slikovni
mod. mode.
OpcijeThe
kojeoptions
se mogu
izabrati
u zavisnosti
odon the “Scene
down (Mode
).
Picture
Mode
Sets a picture
that
can berazlikuju
selected se
differ
depending
Select” settings.
podešenja Select”
“Scene Select”.
“Vivid”:settings.
Enhances picture contrast and sharpness.
“Vivid”:(–)“Vivid”:
Poboljšavapicture
kontrast
i oštrinu
slike.
• Increases (+) or decreases
the volume.
Enhances
contrast
and
sharpness. for home entertainment.
“Standard”:
For standard pictures.
Recommended
• In TV menu: Moves
through the optionsZa
right
( )
“Standard”:
standardne
slike.
Preporučuje
se za kućnu
zabavu.
“Standard”:
For
standard
pictures.
Recommended
for home
entertainment.
“Custom”:
Allows
you
to
store
your
preferred
settings.
or left ( ).
“Custom”:
Omogućava
vam
da
čuvate
vaša
omiljena
podešenja.
“Custom”:
Allows
you
to
store
your
preferred
settings.
“Cinema”: For film-based content. Suitable in a theatre-like environment.
4
/ – Input select
/ Enter
“Cinema”:
Za
sadržaj
zasnovan
naoffilmu.
Podesan
ambijentu environment.
nalik pozorištu.
“Cinema”:
For
film-based
content.
Suitable
in a utheatre-like
“Photo”:
For
standard
viewing
photographs.
• Displays the connected
equipment list and
selects
“Photo”:
Za
standardno
gledanje
fotografija.
“Photo”:
For
standard
viewing
of
photographs.
“Sports”:
Optimizes
picture
quality
for
viewing
sports.
the input source (page 13).
“Sports”:
Podešava
za gledanje
sportskih programa.
“Sports”:
Optimizes
picturekvalitet
quality
for
viewing
“Game”:
Select
standard
pictureslike
suitable
for sports.
games.
• In TV menu: Selects
the menu
or option,
and fornajbolji
“Game”:“Game”:
Izbor
standardne
slike
podesne
zaviewing
igrice.
confirms the setting.
Select
for standard
picture
suitable
for games.
“Graphics”:
Optimizes
picture
quality
for
graphics.
“Graphics”:
Podešava
najbolji
kvalitet
slikeforzaviewing
gledanjegraphics.
grafika.
“Graphics”:
Optimizes
picture
quality
5 Reset
Resets all the “Picture” settings except “Picture Mode” to the factory settings.
Displays
Reset or cancels the menu. Resets all the “Picture” settings except “Picture Mode” to the factory settings.
Backlight
Adjusts
the brightness
of thesem
backlight.
Reset
Resetovanje
svih “Picture”
podešenja
“Picture Mode” na fabrička podešenja.
6 Backlight
– Remote sensor / Light
sensor
Adjusts
the
brightness of the backlight.
Backlight
Podešava
svetlinu
pozadine.
PictureIR signals from the remote.
Increases or decreases picture contrast.
Receives
buttons
and
indicators
Picture
Povećava
ili smanjuje
Brightness
Picture
Increases
or kontrast
decreasesslike.
picture
contrast. Povećava ili smanjuje svetlinu slike.
Senses
room light
level
and adjusts
the screen
Brightness
Brightens
or darkens
the picture.
brightness accordingly.
Do not ili
putsmanjuje
anything over
the boja na slici.
Colour
Povećava
zasićenost
Brightness
or darkens the picture.
1 1
– Power
sensor,
doing so may
affect
its Brightens
function.
Colour
Increases
or decreases
colour
intensity.
Hue
Povećava
ili
smanjuje
i crvene
tonove.
Press to turn
the TV onzelene
or to switch
to standby
mode.
Colour
Increases
or
decreases
colour
intensity.
7 Hue
/ – Picture Off / Timer
indicator
•Increases
Kod
gledanja
programa
ili
video
• To disconnect
thedecreases
TVTV
from
the
power
or
theAC
green
tones ulaza,
and red“Hue”
tones.je dostupan samo za NTSC sistem
Lights
select
Off”
pull
plug from
thegreen
AC power
Hue up in green when youcompletely,
Increases
orthe
decreases
tones
andinput,
red tones.
•“Picture
When
viewing
TVthe
programme
or video
“Hue” is only available for NTSC colour
boja.
3 2 +/–/
/
(page 30).
outlet. • system.
When viewing TV programme or video input, “Hue” is only available for NTSC colour
Operating the TV
Sharpness
Povećava ili smanjuje
system.oštrinu slike.
8 1
– Standby indicator
Sharpness
or softens the picture.
2 CH +/–/ Sharpens
/
Lights
up in red when• the
TV isSharpens
in standby
Sharpness
ormode.
softens
the (–)
picture.
Selects
the
next (+)
or
previous
channel.
Colour
Colour Temperature
Adjusts
the whiteness
the picture.
• In TV menu:
Moves
through theofoptions
up ( ) or
9 Temperature
" Colour
– Power
indicator
Temperature
Adjusts
the
whiteness
of
the
picture.
“Cool”:
Gives
the
white
colours
a blue tint.
Podešava
belinu
slike.
down
• Lights
up in green
when
the( TV).is turned on.
V buttons
and
indicators
“Cool”:
Gives
the
white
colours
a blue
tint. tint.
“Neutral”:
Gives
the
white
colours
a nijansu.
neutral
“Cool”:
Belim
tonovima
daje
plavu
• Flashes while the
is being
3 remote
2 +/–/
/ operated.
“Neutral”:
Gives
the whitedodaje
colours
neutral
tint.
“Warm”:
Gives
the
colours
a ared
tint.nijansu.
Belim
tonovima
neutralnu
1“Neutral”:
– Power
•1Increases
(+) or decreases
(–)white
the volume.
“Warm”:
Gives
the
white
colours
a
red
tint.
•
“Warm”
is
not
available
when
“Picture
Mode”
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
“Warm”:
Belim
tonovima
dodaje
crvenu
• In TV menu: Moves
through
the options
right
( ) nijansu.is set to “Vivid”.
• Make sure that the TV isorcompletely
offTV
before
• turned
“Warm”
isdostupno
not
available
when
“Picture Mode”
ispodešen
set to “Vivid”.
left
(
).
•
To
disconnect
the
from
the
AC
power
•
“Warm”
nije
kada
je
“Picture
na “Vivid”.
Noise
Reduction
Reduces
the picture
in a weak
broadcast
signal.
unplugging
the AC power cord.
Unplugging
the AC noise (snowy picture) Mode”
completely,
pull
the
plug
from
the
AC power
power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
cause
the
Noise
Reduction
Reduces
the
picture
noise
(snowy
picture)
in
a
weak
broadcast
signal.
4
/
–
Input
select
/
Enter
Noise
MPEG
Noise
Reduces
the
picture
noise
in
MPEG-compressed
video.
outlet.
indicator to remain lit
may cause
TV to equipment list and selects
• or
Displays
the the
connected
Reduction
Smanjuje
smetnje
na
slici
(sneg)
pri
lošem
signalu
emitovanja.
MPEG
Noise
Reduces
the
picture
noise
in
MPEG-compressed
video.
malfunction. 2 CH
Reduction
the+/–/
input source
(page 13).
/
z •Reduction
The CH + button has
tactile
dot. Use
it as athe menu or option, and
•• aIn
TV menu:
Selects
Selects
the
next
(+) or previous
(–) movement
channel. when playing BD (Blu-ray Disc), DVD or VCR
MPEG
Noise
Cinema
Drive
Provides
improved
picture
reference when operating
the TV.the setting.
• confirms
In TV menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(slike.
)when
or
Cinema Drive Smanjuje
Provides
improved
picture
movement
playing
BD (Blu-ray
or VCR
images
taken
on film,
reducing
picture
blur and
graininess.
SelectDisc),
“Auto”DVD
to represent
Reduction
šum
MPEG-komprimovane
video
down (images
). taken on film, reducing picture blur and graininess. Select “Auto” to represent
5
original film-based content as is.
Displays
or
the menu. content as is.
V buttons
and
3Pruža
2 +/–/
/cancels
original
film-based
• Ifkretanje
the
imageslike
contains
signalsBD
or too
much noise,
“Cinema
Drive”
automatically
Cinema
Driveindicators
poboljšano
kodirregular
reprodukcije
(Blu-ray
Disc),
DVD ili
VCRis slika
snim •
Increases
(+)
or
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
turned
off /even
if “Auto”
is selected.
•smanjujući
If
the image
contains
irregular
signals
or too
much noise,
“Cinema
Drive”kad
is automatically
6ljenih– na
Remote
sensor
Light
sensor
film,
zamućenost
slike
i
zrnastu
strukturu.
Izaberite
“Auto”
želite
da
1 1
– Power
• In
TV menu:
Moves
through
options
right ( )
turned
off
evenremote.
ifthe
“Auto”
is selected.
Receives
IR signals
from
the
prikažete
originalni
sadržaj
filma
kakav
jeste.
Press
to
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
or
left
(
).
Senses room light level and adjusts the screen
• To disconnect
thesadrži
TV
theanything
AC power
slika
nepravilne
signale
accordingly.
Do/from
not
put
over ili
thepreviše šuma, “Cinema Drive” se automatski
4 brightness
/ completely,
–• Ako
Input
select
Enter
pull
theiplug
from
the AC power
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
isključuje
čak
ako
je
odabrano
“Auto”.
• Displays the connected equipment list and
selects
confirms
setting.
• Selects
next
(+) or previous (–) channel.
(page
30). thethe
•
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through the options up ( ) or
5
8 1down
– Standby
indicator
( or ).cancels
Displays
the
menu.
Lights up in red when the
TV is in standby mode.
Operating the TV
outlet.
the
source Off
(page
13). indicator
7
/ input
– Picture
/ Timer
• In+/–/
TV
Selects
option, Off”
and
2 CH
Lights
up menu:
in/ green
whenthe
youmenu
selector“Picture
3
+/–/
/
62
– Remote
sensor / Light sensor
9
"• –Increases
Power
indicator
or decreases
the volume.
Receives IR(+)
signals
from the(–)
remote.
8 1malfunction.
– Standby indicator
11 GBdot. Use it as a
5 •Lights
z
The CH
+ button
has the
a tactile
up in
red when
TV is in standby mode.
Displays
or cancels
the menu.
reference
when operating
the TV.
9 " – Power indicator
6
– Remote sensor / Light sensor
Operating the TV
•• Lights
up in green
when
the TV
is turned
on. ( )
In TVroom
menu:
Moves
through
the options
right
light
andisadjusts
screen
•Senses
Flashes
while
thelevel
remote
being the
operated.
or
left
(
).
brightness accordingly. Do not put anything over the
so may
affect
its function.
4 sensor,
/ doing
– Input
select
/ Enter
the
equipment
list and
Make
thatconnected
the Off
TV is/ completely
turned
offselects
before
7 • Displays
/ –sure
Picture
Timer
indicator
the
input
(page
13).
unplugging
the AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
AC
Lights
up insource
green
when
you
select
“Picture the
Off”
power
cord
while
the TV
turned
may cause
•(page
In
TV
menu:
Selects
theismenu
oron
option,
and the
30).
indicator to
lit or may cause the TV to
confirms
theremain
setting.
Continued
Nastavlja
se
Continued
21 SRP
21 GB
21 GB
Using
Using
Menu
Menu
Functions
Functions
Operating the TV
V
options koje
you
can
adjustthe
vary
on the
Unavailable
options
are greyed out
or not
• Opcije
možete
podesiti
razlikuju
se usituation.
zavisnosti
od situacije.
Nedostupne
opcije
su displayed.
obeležene sivom
• • ToThe
disconnect
the TV
from
ACdepending
power
optionspull
youthe
can
adjust
vary
plug
from
the depending
AC power on the situation. Unavailable options are greyed out or not displayed.
bojom• completely,
iliThe
nisu
prikazane.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen.
Menu
4 To exit the menu, press HOME.
urites
Description
Description
You can select the Digital Favourite
1list.
Digital Favourites
You can select the Digital Favourite list.
Digital
Digital
g the DigitalSound
Favourite list
Zvuk
1
Enter Programme Number:
t-up
1
BBC ONE
BBC TWO
ITV1
Channel 4
010
More 4
011
abc1
012
QVC
000
Digital
013
UKTV Gold
014
The Enter
HITS Programme Number:
015
UKTV Bright Ideas
010 More 4
ftn
011 abc1
TMF
012 QVC
E4
013 UKTV Gold
SoundMode
Mode
Sound
016
017
018
014
Five
te list
BBC Three
015
ITV2
016
The HITS
UKTV Bright Ideas
ftn
*
Favourites 1
Enter Programme Number:
000
In digital mode, press HOME and select
The Favourite
feature allows you to specify up to four
“Digital
Favourites”.
001
BBC ONE
010
More 4
002
BBC TWO
011
abc1
003
ITV1
012
QVC
Using Menu Functions
Using Menu Functions
You can select the Digital Electronic
16).
Digital EPGGuide (EPG) (page
You
can select the Digital Electronic Programme Guide (EPG)
2 Programme
Advanced
Settings
Allows you to set “Picture” settings in more detail. These settings are not available when
Description
Advanced
Settings
Omogućava
vam
da
detaljnije
podesite
podešenja
“Picture”.
Ova
nisu(page 17).
You can enjoy photo files via
USB
devices
(page
17).
3
Photo
You
can
enjoy
photo files
viapodešenja
USB devices
“Picture
Mode”list.
is set to “Vivid”.
Favourites
You can select the Digital
Favourite
dostupna
kada
je
“Picture
Mode”
podešen
na
“Vivid”.
You can enjoy music files “Reset”:
via USB4devices
Music(page
Youtocan
music
files via USB devices (page 17).
Resets
all the17).
advanced settings
theenjoy
factory
settings.
“Reset”:
Resetuje
sva napredna
podešenja
naadjusts
fabrička
podešenja.and “Picture” to the
EPG
You can select the Digital
Electronic
Programme
Guide
(EPG) (page
16). “Backlight”
“Adv.
Enhancer”:
Automatically
You can enjoy video files via
USBContrast
devices
17).
Video(page
You can
enjoy video files via
USB devices (page 17).
5
Contrast
Enhancer”:
Automatski
podešava “Backlight”
i “Picture”
na najpodesni
You can enjoy photo“Adv.
files suitable
via
USBsettings
devices
(page
17).
most
judging
from
the
brightness
of
the
screen.
This
setting
is of the advanced
Displays the “Settings” menu
where
most
of
the
advanced
settings
and
adjustments
are
6 Settings
Displays
the “Settings”
menuefikasno
where
most
settin
ja
podešenja
sudeći
po
svetlini
ekrana.
Ovo
podešenje
je
posebno
za
scene
sa
especially
effective
for
dark
scenes,
and will
the contrast
of to 30.
You can
files
via USB
17).
performed.
Forenjoy
detailsmusic
about
settings,
see devices
page
21 (page
to
30.images
performed.
Forincrease
details
about
settings,distinction
see page 21
tamnijim
slikama
i
povećava
razliku
u
kontrastu
tamnijih
scena.
the
darker
picture
scenes.
You can enjoy video“Black
files
via USB
devices
(page 17). oblasti slike za veći kontrast.
“Black Corrector”:
Corrector”:Povećava
Enhancescrne
black areas of the picture for stronger contrast.
gs
Displays the “Settings”
menu
where
most
of
advanced
settings
adjustments
are of the picture.
“Gamma”:
Podešava
balans
između
svetlih
iand
tamnih
oblasti
slike.
“Gamma”: Adjusts thethe
balance
between
bright
and
dark
areas
performed. For details
about
settings,
see
page
21
to
30.
“Clear
White”:
Naglašava
bele
boje.
White”:
white colours.
e Digital Favourite list “ClearUsing
* Emphasises
the Digital
Favourite list
*
“Live
veću
živostmore
bojama.
“Live Colour”:
Colour”:Daje
Makes
colours
vivid.
The Favourite
feature allows you to specify up to four
The Favourite feature allows yo
Favourite Set-up
lists of your favourite programmes.
lists of your favourite program
1
In digital mode, press H
“Digital Favourites”.
listsmode.
of your
favourite
programmes.
Sets a sound
The
options
that
can berazlikuju
selectedse
differ
depending
the “Scene
Podešava zvučni
mod.
Opcijethe
koje
se mogu
izabrati
zavisnosti
od
2
Perform
desired
operation
as shownu in
the desired op
2onPerform
1
In
digital
mode,
press
HOME
and
select
podešenjaSelect”
“Scenesettings.
Select”.
the following table or displayed on the
the following table or di
“Dynamic”:
Enhances
treble
and
bass.
Recommended
for
home
entertainment.
“Digital
“Dynamic”: Poboljšava
visoke iFavourites”.
niske tonove. Preporučuje se za kućnu zabavu. screen.
screen.
“Standard”:
For standard
“Standard”:
Za standardni
zvuk. sound.
2zvuk
Perform
the
desired operation as shown in
“Clear Čini
Voice”:
Makes
voice
Digital
Favourite
list sound clearer.
“Clear Voice”:
glasa jasnijim.
000
004
Channel 4
013
UKTV Gold
005
Five
014
The HITS
006
BBC Three
015
007
ITV2
016
ftn
008
Sky Sports
017
TMF
009
UKTV History
018
E4
UKTV Bright Ideas
the following table or displayed on the
Resetin
the “Sound”
settings
“Sound
Mode”,
“Dual Sound”, “Speakers”,
may
not be available
countries/regions.Resets all
* This
function
not beexcept
available
in some
countries/regions.
018 some
E4
UKTV History
screen.may
Sky Sports
Reset
017
TMF
Operating the TV
Resetuje sva podešenja “Sound” sem “Sound Mode”, “Dual Sound”, “Speakers”,
“Audio Out”, “Headphone Speaker Link”, “Headphone Volume” and “HDMI/DVI
Audio“Headphone
Source”
to the
factoryLink”,
settings.
Do
this
To
this i “HDMI/DVI Audio Source”
“Audio Out”,
Speaker
“Headphone Do
Volume”
avourite list
na
fabrička
podešenja.
Adjusts“Yes”.
soundyour
frequency
settings.
ction may
not7
beBand
available
in
countries/regions.
ourite
list for
the
first Equalizer
Create
Favourite
list for the first
Press
to select
1 some
1 Press to select “Yes”.
timeto to
Press
G/g
select
the desired
sound frequency,
pressthe
F/fyellow
to adjust
the setting
andthe Favourit
the yellow
button
select
thezvuka.
Favourite
list.
2 Press
2then
Press
button
to select
7 Band
Prilagođava
podešenja
frekvencije
Do
this
press
. The adjusted
settings
willwant
be received
you select “Sound
Mode”
options.
V buttons
and3 indicators
Equalizer
Pritisnite
željene
frekvencije
zvuka,
pritisnite
podešenje
i
F/f/GSelecting
Press
/g za
to odabir
select
the channel
you
to zatim
add,when
3then
Press F/f/da
G
/podesite
g
to select
the channel
you w
“Reset”
will setćethese“7
Band kad
Equalizer”
to “Sound
original. Mode”
settings.
ur Favourite list for the first press
.
pritisnite.
Prilagođeno
podešenje
primiti
izaberete
opcije.
Odabirom
press
Press
to
select
“Yes”.
1
1 1 – Power• Adjusting higher frequency will affect higher pitched sound and adjusting lower frequency
Channels
that
areBand
stored
in
the
are indicated
bylist.
a podešenje.
Channels that are stored in the Favourite list are ind
“Reset”
“7
Equalizer”
se list
podesiti
namode.
originalno
2
Press
yellow
button
toćeselect
the
Favourite
Press
to, the
turn
thewill
TV
on
orFavourite
to switch
to
standby
affect
lower
pitched
sound.
symbol.
symbol.
•disconnect
Podešavanje
viših
frekvencija
će you
uticati
na više
zvukove,
• ToF
the
TV
from
the channel
AC power
3
f
G
g
Press
/
/
/
to
select
the
want
to
add,
then a podešavanje nižih frekven Balance 4 Press RETURN
Emphasises
left
or right
balance.
pull zvukove.
the
plug
from
the AC power
to niže
finish
setting
up.speaker
4 Press RETURN to finish setting up.
cija
presscompletely,
. na
outlet.
Intelligent VolumeChannels
Minimizes
the difference
in volume
level
between
that
are stored
in theizmeđu
Favourite
list iare
indicated
by aall programmes and adverts (e.g.
Balance
Podešavanje
zvučnog
balansa
levog
desnog
zvučnika.
Watch
channel
1 Press
the yellow
button
toa be
navigate
through
your
Favourite
1 Press the yellow button to navigate through y
adverts
tend
to
louder
than
programmes).
symbol.
2 CH +/–/ /
lists.
lists.
•Press
Selects
the next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
Intelligent
Smanjuje
razliku
uthe
nivou
zvuka
između
programa
i reklama
Volume Offset 4
Adjusts
level
of channel.
thesvih
current
input relative
to (npr.
otherreklame
inputs. obično
RETURN
tovolume
finish
setting
up.
Press• F
/f
to
select
the through
channel,
then
press
.or
2
2
Press F/f to select the channel, then press
In
TV
menu:
Moves
the
options
up
(
)
Volume
bivaju
glasnije
od
drugih
programa).
Surround
youbutton
to selecttothe
suitable through
surround your
effectsFavourite
depending on the genre of TV
downthe
(Allows
).
hannel
1 Press
yellow
navigate
nivo
zvuka
u odnosu
druge
ulaze.RETURN.
ourite list Volume Offset
Turn
offtrenutnog
the Favourite
list
PressPrilagođava
RETURN.
Press
(movie,
sport,ulaza
music,
etc.) or na
video
game.
lists.
3 2
+/–/ programme
/
The
options
that
can
be
selected
differ
depending
on
the “Scene
Select”TV
settings.
•Press
Increases
(+)toor
decreases
the volume.
Surround
Omogućava
vam
odabir
odgovarajućeg
surround
efekta. u zavisnosti
od žanra
F/ f
2
select
the (–)
channel,
then
press
Delivers
surround
effects
that
• In TV “On”:
menu:
Moves
through
the
right
(help
) you enjoy the virtual two-ch surround audio
programa
(film, sport,
muzika,
itd.)options
ili video
igrice.
or left with
( ).just the two internal TV speakers.
e Favourite list
Press
Opcije RETURN.
koje se mogu
izabrati razlikuju se u zavisnosti od podešenja “Scene Select”.
Stereo”:
Adds
surround-like
effectu to
mono programmes.
4“On”:/ Pruža
–“Simulated
Input
select
/ Enter
surround
efekte
koji
vama pomažu
da uživate
viruelnom
dvo-kanalnom surround
•
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
“Cinema”:
Delivers
surround
effects
just
like
the
high-grade
audio systems found in
zvuku
sa
samo
dva
interna
TV
zvučnika.
Continued
the input
source
(page 13).
movie
theatres.
“Simulated
Stereo”:
Mono
programima
dodajte
efekat
sličan
surround
efektu.
• In TV “Music”:
menu: Selects
the menu
or option,
and
GB
Delivers
surround
effects
that
make you feel 15
likeaudio
you are
surrounded
by sound
confirms Pruža
the setting.
“Cinema”:
surround
efekte
slične
onim
visokokvalitetnim
sistemima
u bioskopima.
as in a music hall.
Pruža surround efekte koji čine da se osećate kao
da ste okruženi zvukom sličnim
Continued
5“Music”:“Sports”:
Delivers surround effects that make you
feel like you are watching a live
onom
u muzičkoj
hali.
Displays
or cancels
the menu.
sports contest.
GB
Pružasensor
surround/ Light
efekte sensor
koji čine da se osećate kao da uživo15
gledate
sportsko
6“Sports”:
– Remote
“Game”:
Delivers surround
effects that enhance game sound.
takmičenje.
Receives“Off”:
IR signals
from
the
remote.
Converts and reproduces multi-ch audio to 2ch audio. In the case of other audio
Senses room
light
level andefekte
adjusts
thepoboljšavaju
screen
“Game”:
Pruža
surround
koji
zvuk igrice.
formats,
the original
is reproduced.
brightness
accordingly.
Do notaudio
put anything
over the
“Off”: Pretvara i reprodukuje
višekanalni
zvuk
na dvokanalni zvuk. U slučaju drugih audio forsensor, doing
so may
affectsound
its function.
Bass Booster mata,
Produces
a fuller
for more impact, by emphasising the bass sounds.
originalni
zvuk
se reprodukuje.
7
/ – Picture Off / Timer indicator
Bass Booster
Proizvodi
zvuk
za više
uticaja,
ističućiOff”
bas zvukove.
Lights uppuniji
in green
when
you select
“Picture
(page 30).
8 1 – Standby indicator
Lights up in red when the TV is in standby mode.
9 " – Power indicator
• Lights up in green when the TV is turned on.
• Flashes while the remote is being operated.
SRP
22
22 GB
• Make sure that the TV is completely turned off before
unplugging the AC power cord. Unplugging the AC
power cord while the TV is turned on may cause the
indicator to remain lit or may cause the TV to
V
/
– Picture Off / Timer indicator
Lights up in green when you select “Picture Off”
(page 30).
8 1 – Standby indicator
Podešava
zvuk
iz red
zvučnika
za TV
stereo
dvojezično
emitovanje.
Lights
up the
in
when
the
inilistandby
Sets
sound
from
the is
speaker
for amode.
stereo or bilingual broadcast.
buttons and indicators
“Stereo”/“Mono”: Za stereo emitovanje.
“Stereo”/“Mono”:
9 " – Power
indicator For stereo broadcasts.
“Main”/“Sub”/“Mono”:
dvojezično
izaberite “Main”
za zvučni
Lights
up in greenZa
when
the TV
turned on.broadcasts,
“Main”/“Sub”/“Mono”:
Forisemitovanje,
bilingual
select “Main”
for kanal
sound1,channel 1,
1 1 –• Power
“Sub”
zvučni
kanal
2orili
“Mono”
kanal,
je dostupno.
the
remote
is being
operated.
Press• za
toFlashes
turn
thewhile
TVsound
on
tochannel
switch
to
mode.
“Sub”
for
2,zastandby
ormono
“Mono”
forukoliko
mono channel,
if available.
Ako
signal
slab,
automatski
postaje
mono.
• To •disconnect
the
TVveoma
from
the
AC zvuk
power
• Ifjethe
signal
is very
weak,
the sound
becomes
monaural
automatically.
completely,
the plug
from
AC
power
• Ako
glasan
stereo
zvuk
kadwhen
se prima
NICAM
program,
izaberite
“Mono”.
• Ifjepull
the
stereo
sound
isthe
noisy
receiving
a NICAM
programme,
select
“Mono”.Zvuk
The
• outlet.
Make suresound
that the
TV
is
completely
turned
off
before
becomes
monaural,
but the noise is reduced.
postajethemono,
ali buka
jeUnplugging
smanjena.
unplugging
AC
power
cord.
the
AC
• The “Dual Sound” setting is memorized for each programme position.
power
while
the listen
TVSound”
isto
turned
onbroadcast
may
cause
the when
• Podešenje
“Dual
ostaje
memorisano
za svaku
poziciju
programa.
2 CH +/–/
/ •cord
You
cannot
stereo
sound
“Mono”
is selected.
indicator
to remain
lit or may
cause
the TV tozvuk kada je izabrano “Mono”.
• Selects•z
the
(+) select
or
previous
(–)
channel.
Ne•next
možete
slušati
stereo
emitovani
If
you
other
equipment
connected
to
the
TV,
set
“Dual
Sound”
to “Stereo”, “Main”
malfunction.
• In TV
menu:
Moves
through
theopremu
options
upexternal
( ) ornaequipment
or
“Sub”.
However,
when
the
connected
the HDMI
(except
• Ako
izaberete
drugu
spojenu
TV, podesite
“DualtoSound”
najack
“Stereo”,
zdown
• The
CH
+
button
has
a
tactile
dot.
Use
it
as
a
( ). HDMI 1) is selected, this is fixed to “Stereo”.
reference
operating
the TV. kada je izabrana spoljna oprema spojena na HDMI
“Main”when
ili “Sub”.
Međutim,
3 2 +/–/ priključnicu
/ Speakers”:
Speakers
“TV
the TV’s
sound from the TV speakers.
(sem Turns
HDMIon1),and
ovooutputs
je podešeno
na “Stereo”.
• Increases
(+) orSystem”:
decreases Turns
(–) theoff
volume.
“Audio
the TV speakers and outputs the TV’s sound from external
• InSpeakers”:
TV menu: Moves
through
the options
right
( iz zvučnika
)
Zvučnici
“TV
Uključuje
i emituje
zvuk
TV-a
TV-a.
audio
to the
audio
output jacks
on the TV.
or left
( ). equipment connected
“Audio
System”:
zvučnike
TV-a i emituje
zvukthat
TV-a
sa spoljne audio
opreme for
spojene
You canIsključuje
also turn on
the connected
equipment
is compatible
with Control
4na audio
/ izlazne
–HDMI,
Inputpriključnice
select
/ Enter
nathe
TVappropriate
prijemniku.settings of Control for HDMI.
after
making
• Displays
the uključiti
connectedspojenu
equipment
list and
selects
Takođe
možete
opremu
koja
je kompatibilna sa funkcijom Control for
the input
source (page
13). using an external audio system, volume output from audio out can
Audio Out
“Variable”:
When
HDMI,
po
pravljenju
odgovarajućih
podešenja
• In TV be
menu:
Selects using
the menu
option,
and funkcije Control for HDMI.
controlled
the or
TV’s
remote.
confirms
the
setting.
audio
outputaudio
of thesistem,
TV is fixed.
Use your
audio
receiver’s
volume
Audio Out
“Variable”:“Fixed”:
Kada se The
koristi
eksterni
emitovanje
zvuka
iz audio
izlaza
može control
5se kontrolisati
to adjust
the volume
(andupravljača
other audio
through your audio system.
pomoću
daljinskog
TVsettings)
prijemnika.
DisplaysAudio
or cancels
the
menu.
“Fixed”:
izlazthe
TVTV’s
prijemnika
nepromenljiv.
Koristite
jačine zvukatovašeg
audio
Headphone Speaker
Switches
internaljespeakers
on/off when
youkontrolu
connect headphones
the TV.
6prijemnika
– Remote
sensor
/ Light
da biste
podesili
jačinusensor
zvuka (i druga zvučna podešenja) preko vašeg audio sistema.
Link
Dual Sound
Dual Sound
Receives IR signals from the remote.
Senses room
lightthe
level
and adjusts
screen
Headphone Volume
Adjusts
volume
of thethe
headphones.
Headphone
Uključuje/isključuje
unutrašnje
zvučnike
brightness accordingly.
Do not put
anythingTV-a
overkada
the spojite slušalice na TV.
HDMI/DVI
Audio sensor, doing
Switches
theaffect
audioitssignal
for HDMI input when a DVI device is connected. Select from
Speaker
Link
so may
function.
“Auto”, “HDMI Audio” and “PC Audio”.
Source
7Podešava
/ – jačinu
Picture
Offslušalica.
/ Timer indicator
Headphone
zvuka
Advanced Settings
Range”:
Compensates
for differences in the audio level between different
Lights up“Dynamic
in green when
you select
“Picture Off”
Volume
(page 30).channels (only for Dolby Digital audio).
• The
effect
not ulaz
function
vary
depending
on the
programme
HDMI/DVI Audio8Prebacuje
audio
signal
za may
HDMI
kadaorjemay
DVI
uređaj
spojen.
Izaberite
iz regardless of the
1 – Standby
indicator
Lights up
in red“Dynamic
when theiliRange”
TV
is Audio”.
insetting.
standby mode.
Source
“Auto”,
“HDMI
Audio”
“PC
buttons and indicators
“Optical Out”: Sets the audio signal that is GB
output from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
11
9“Dynamic
" – Power
indicator
(OPTICAL)
jack of the razlike
TV. Setutonivou
“Auto”,
when
connecting
equipment
compatible with
Advanced
Range”:
Kompenzuje
zvuka
između
različitih
kanala (samo
1 1
– Power
• Lights
up in green
when
the
is turned
on.connecting equipment not compatible with Dolby
Dolby
to TV
“PCM”,
when
Settings
zaPress
Digital
zvuk).
to turn
the Digital.
TV
on
orSet
to is
switch
standby
mode.
• Dolby
Flashes
while
the
remote
beingtooperated.
• Efekat možda
• To Digital.
disconnect
the TV neće
from funkcionisati
the AC power ili se može razlikovati u zavisnosti od programa bez
“Downmix
Mode”:
Set the
theAC
downmix
completely,
the
plug from
power method of multi-channel to two-channel sound.
obzira
napull
podešenje
“Dynamic
Range”.
•
Make
sure
that
the
TV
is
completely
turned
•
“Surround”:
Select
to
get
best
surround
performance,
or whileAUDIO
using external
outlet.
“Optical
Out”:the
Podešava audio signal koji off
se before
emituje
iz DIGITAL
OUT products with Pro
unplugging
Logic.AC power cord. Unplugging the AC
(OPTICAL)
priključnice
TV-a.
Podesite
na
“Auto”,
kada
spajate
opremu
kompatibilnu
sa Dolby
TV istoturned
on may
cause the
2 CHpower
+/–/ cord
/ while the
• “Stereo”:
Select
get a stereo
output.
indicator
to next
remain
litororprevious
maykada
cause
the
TVopremu
to
• Selects
the
(–)
channel.
Digital.
Podesite
na(+)
“PCM”,
spajate
koja nije kompatibilna sa Dolby Digital.
malfunction.
• In
TV menu:
Moves
throughdownmix
the options
up ( višekanalnog
) or
Mode”:
Podesite
metodu
na dvokanalni zvuk.
z“Downmix
• down
The CH
( +).button has a tactile dot. Use it as a
• “Surround”:
Izaberite
da
biste
dobili
najbolje
surround
performanse ili dok koristite spoljne
reference when operating the TV.
3proizvode
2 +/–/ sa/ Pro Logic.
Increases (+) or decreases (–) the volume.
• ••“Stereo”:
Izaberite da biste dobili stereo izlaz.
In TV menu: Moves through the options right ( )
/
).
– Input select / Enter
• Displays the connected equipment list and selects
the input source (page 13).
• In TV menu: Selects the menu or option, and
confirms the setting.
5
Displays or cancels the menu.
6
Operating the TV
or left (
4
– Remote sensor / Light sensor
Receives IR signals from the remote.
Senses room light level and adjusts the screen
brightness accordingly. Do not put anything over the
sensor, doing so may affect its function.
7
/
– Picture Off / Timer indicator
Lights up in green when you select “Picture Off”
(page 30).
8 1 – Standby indicator
Lights up in red when the TV is in standby mode.
9 " – Power indicator
11 GB
• Lights up in green when the TV is turned on.
• Flashes while the remote is being operated.
23 SRP
GB
23
Using Menu Functions
Operating the TV
V
7
7
/
– Picture Off / Timer indicator
Lights up in green when you select “Picture Off”
(page 30).
TV buttons and indicators
8 1 – Standby indicator
Lights up in red when the TV is in standby mode.
1 1 – Power
9 "Press
– Power
to turnindicator
the TV on or to switch to standby mode.
Screen
Ekran
Screen
• Lights
up in greenthe
when
the TV
turned
• To disconnect
TV from
theisAC
poweron.
• Flashes
while the
is from
beingthe
operated.
completely,
pullremote
the plug
AC power
V buttons
and
indicators
Wide
Mode
Za detalje For
ooutlet.
modu
širokog
prikaza,
pogledajte
stranu
10.
Wide
Mode
details
about
wide
mode,
seesee
page
10.10.
Wide
Mode
For
details
about
wide
mode,
page
Operating the TV
“Vertical
Shift”
“Vertical
Shift”
Adjusts
the
vertical
position
of the
picture.
Adjusts the
vertical
position
of the
picture.
11 GB
SRP
24 GB
2424 GB
GB
Operating the TV
Auto Wide
Automatski
menja
mod
širokog
prikazaturned
u skladu
sa ulaznim signalom iz spoljne opreme. Da biste
• Power
Make
sure/that
the TV
is completely
off before
2 –CH
+/–/
1
Auto
Wide
Automatically
changes
thethe
wide
mode
according
to the
input
signal
from
an an
external
Auto
Wide1 zadržali
Automatically
changes
wide
mode
according
to the
input
signal
from
external
vaše
podešenje,
izaberite
“Off”.
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord.
Unplugging
the AC
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
Press• toSelects
turn
the
TV
on
or
to
switch
to
standby
mode.
equipment.
To
keep
your
setting,
select
“Off”.
power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
cause
the
equipment.
To
keep
your
setting,
“Off”.
In disconnect
TV
menu:Wide”
Moves
the
options
upselect
( gledate
) or
• “Auto
jethrough
dostupan
samo
kada
programe sa video ulaza, HDMI i ulaza
•• To
the
TV
from
the
AC
power
Wide”
only
available
when
programmes
from
video
input,
HDMI
andand
indicator
remain
lit
orismay
cause
the TV
to watching
“Auto
Wide”
is 480i
only
available
watching
programmes
from
video
input,
HDMI
down
( • to“Auto
).•pull
completely,
the
from
AC
power
komponente
u plug
formatu
ili 480i
576i.orwhen
component
input
in the
format
576i.
malfunction.
component
input
in
format
480i
or
576i.
• /+Even
ifje“Auto
Wide”
is set
toit“On”
or “On”
“Off”,
you
cancan
always
modify
the
format
of
the
z
• outlet.
The
has
a tactile
dot.
Use
ana
•zCH
Čak
i•button
ako
Wide”
podešen
ili
“Off”,
uvek
možete
izmeniti
format
3 2
+/–/
z
Even
if“Auto
“Auto
Wide”
is set
toas“On”
or “Off”,
you
always
modify
the
format
of the
screen
by
pressing
repeatedly.
reference
when
operating
the(–)
TV.
•
Increases
(+)
or
decreases
the
volume.
screen
by
pressing
repeatedly.
ekrana
pritiskom
na
tipku
više
puta.
2 CH +/–/ /
• In TV
Moves
through
the
options
right
( ) 4:3 broadcasts.
4:3Default
Default
Selects
the
default
screen
mode
for4:3
useemitovanjem.
with
• Selects
themenu:
next
(+)
or default
previous
(–)
channel.
4:3
standardni
mod
prikaza
za upotrebu
sa
4:3
Default Bira
screen
mode
for
use
with 4:3 broadcasts.
ormenu:
leftSelects
( Moves
). the
•
In
TV
through
the
options
up
(
)
or
“Wide
Zoom”:
Enlarges
the
4:3
picture
to
the
16:9
screen,
keeping
the
original
image
as as
“Wide Zoom”:
Uvećava
sliku
4:3 formata
kako
bifill
sefill
popunio
prikaz
formata
16:9,
čuvajući
origi
“Wide
Zoom”:
Enlarges
the
4:3
picture
to
the
16:9
screen,
keeping
the
original
image
).
4down
/( much
– Input
select
/ Enter
as
possible.
nalne
slike
koliko
god
je
moguće.
much
possible.equipment list and selects
• Displays
theas
connected
“Normal”:
Displays
conventional
4:3u4:3
broadcasts
in the
correct
proportions.
3 “Normal”:
2 +/–/
/Prikaz
uobičajenog
4:3conventional
emitovanja
tačnim
proporcijama.
“Normal”:
Displays
broadcasts
in the
correct
proportions.
the
input
source
(page
13).the
• Increases
(+) ortrenutno
decreases
(–)
volume.
“Off”:
Keeps
thepodešenje
current
“Wide
Mode”
setting
theilithe
channel
or input
is changed.
“Off”:
Zadržava
“Wide
Mode”
kada
sewhen
kanal
ulaz
promene.
•
In
TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
option,
and
“Off”:
Keeps
the
current
“Wide
Mode”
setting
when
channel
or input
is changed.
• In TV menu: Moves through the options right ( )
confirms
the
setting.
Auto
Display
Area
“On”:
Automatski
prilagođava
oblast
prikaza
u
skladu
sa
sadržajem.
Auto
Display
Area
Automatically
adjusts
thethe
display
area
based
upon
thethe
content.
or left (“On”:
).“On”:
Auto
Display
Area
Automatically
adjusts
display
area
based
upon
content.
“Off”: Isključuje
“Auto
Display
Area”.
Izaberite
jednu
iz opcija
“Display
Area”.
Turns
off
thethe
“Auto
Display
Area”.
Choose
oneone
from
thethe
“Display
Area”
options.
“Off”:
Turns
off
“Auto
Display
Area”.
Choose
from
“Display
Area”
options.
4 5 / – “Off”:
Input
select
/ Enter
Displays
or
cancels
the
menu.
Display
Area
Prilagođava
oblast
prikaza
slike.
•
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
Display
Area
Adjusts
the
picture
display
area.
Display Area “Full Pixel”:Adjusts
thesliku
picture display
area.
Prikazuje
1080/50i,
1080/60i,
1080/50p
i 1080/60p
izvore
HDMI ili
source
(page
13). /za
6the input
– “Full
Remote
sensor
Light
sensor
Pixel”:
Displays
thethe
picture
forfor
1080/50i,
1080/60i,
1080/50p
and(samo
1080/60p
“Full
Pixel”:
Displays
picture
1080/50i,
1080/60i,
1080/50p
and
1080/60p
• Inkomponente)
TV menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
option,
andHDMI
ulaz
ili
1080/24p
izvore
(samo
ulaz)
u
originalnoj
veličini.
(Dostupno
u in
Receives
IR
signals
from
the
remote.
sources
(HDMI or component
input
only)
or 1080/24p
sources
(HDMI
input
only)
sources
or adjusts
component
input
only)
or 1080/24p
sources
(HDMI
input
only)
in
confirms
the
setting.
Sensesod
room
light(HDMI
level and
the screen
zavisnosti
modela
TV-a.)
thethe
original
size.
(Available
depending
onthe
thethe
TVTV
model.)
original
size.
depending
on
model.)
accordingly.
Do(Available
not put anything
over
5 “+1”:brightness
Prikazuje
slike
u njihovoj
veličini.
“+1”:
Displays
pictures
in their
original
size.
sensor,
soDisplays
may
affect
itsoriginalnoj
function.
“+1”:
pictures
in their
original
size.
Displays
or doing
cancels
the
menu.
“Normal”:
Prikazuje
slike
u njihovoj
preporučenoj
veličini. size.
“Normal”:
Displays
pictures
in
their
recommended
“Normal”:
Displays
pictures
in their recommended
size.
7
/
–
Picture
Off
/
Timer
indicator
sliku
tako/the
da
su
njene
van
vidljive
prikaza.
6 “-1”:– Uvećava
Remote
sensor
Light
sensor
“-1”:
picture
soivice
that
thethe
edges
areoblasti
outside
thethe
visible
display
area.
LightsIR
upsignals
inEnlarges
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
“-1”:
Enlarges
the
picture
so that
edges
are
outside
visible
display
area.
Receives
from
the
remote.
Horizontal Shift Prilagođava
horizontalni položaj slike kada je “Wide Mode” podešen na “Wide Zoom”
(page
30).
Horizontal
Shift
Adjusts
the
horizontal
position
of
the
picture
when
“Wide
Mode”
is
set
to
“Wide
Zoom”
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
Horizontal Shift
Adjusts the horizontal position of the picture when “Wide Mode” is set to “Wide
Zoom”
ilibrightness
“Zoom”.accordingly.
Do not put anything over the
or “Zoom”.
8 1 – Standby
indicator
or
“Zoom”.
Vertical Shift
Prilagođava
vertikalni
položaj
slike
kad
je
“Wide
Mode”
podešen
na
“Wide
Zoom”
sensor,
doing
affectthe
its TV
function.
Lights
up so
in may
red when
is in standby mode.
Vertical
Shift
Adjusts
thethe
vertical
position
of the
picture
when
“Wide
Mode”
is set
to “Wide
Zoom”
ili “Zoom”.
Vertical
Shift
Adjusts
vertical
position
of the
picture
when
“Wide
Mode”
is set
to “Wide
Zoom”
7 9 / " ––Power
Picture
Off
/
Timer
indicator
indicator
or “Zoom”.
PC Settings
“Wide
Mode”
or
“Zoom”.
Lights
up
in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
• Lights up in green when the TV is turned on.
11 GB pogledajte stranu 10.
moda
prikaza
za remote
prikaz is
ulaza
saoperated.
vašeg računara;
PCPC
Settings
(page
• 30).
Flashes
while
the
being
“Wide
Mode”
Settings Odabir
“Wide
Mode”
Selects
a screen
mode
forfor
displaying
input
from
your
PC,PC,
seesee
page
10.10.
8 “Reset”
1 – Standby
indicator
Selects
a screen
mode
displaying
input
from
your
page
Resetuje
podešenja
računara
podešenja
Lights
upsva
in sure
red
when
the
TV is inosim
standby
mode. “Wide Mode” na fabrička podešenja.
• Make
that the TV is completely turned off before
“Reset”
“Reset”
Adjustment”
unplugging
the AC power cord. Unplugging the AC
9 “Auto
" – Power
indicator
Resets
all
thethe
“PC
Settings”
except
“Wide
Mode”
toslike
the
factory
Resets
all
“PC
Settings”
except
“Wide
Mode”
to the
factory
settings.
power
cord
while
the
TV
is
turned
on
may
the
Automatski
prilagođava
položaj
prikaza,
vidljivost
i veličinu
kada
TVsettings.
• Lights up in
green
when
the
TV
is turned
on.cause
indicator
to
remain
lit
or
may
cause
the
TV
to
prima
ulazni
signal
sa
spojenog
računara.
• Flashes
while
the
remote
is being
operated.
“Auto
Adjustment”
“Auto Adjustment”
malfunction.
•Automatically
“Auto
Adjustment”
možda
nećeit position,
raditi
dobro
sa određenim
signalima.
U tom
adjusts
thedot.
display
phase
andand
pitch
ofulaznim
the
picture
when
the
TVTV
z • The
CH
+ button
has
aadjusts
tactile
Use
as aposition,
Automatically
the
display
phase
pitch
of the
picture
when
the
reference
when
operating
the “Phase”,
TV.
slučaju,
ručno
podesite
“Pitch”,
“Horizontal
Shift”
i
“Vertical
Shift”.
receives
an
input
signal
from
the
connected
PC.
• Make sure that
the TVanis input
completely
receives
signalturned
fromoff
thebefore
connected PC.
“Phase”
unplugging
the
AC
power
cord. Unplugging
thework
AC
zz
• “Auto
Adjustment”
maymay
not not
work
wellwell
withwith
certain
input
signals.
In such
cases,
manually
• “Auto
Adjustment”
certain
input
signals.
In such
cases,
manually
power cordekrana
while
the
TV“Phase”,
is turned
on may
cause
adjust
“Phase”,
“Pitch”,
“Horizontal
and
“Vertical
Shift”.
Podešavanje
kada
deo
prikazanog
tekstathe
iliShift”
slike
nije
jasno
vidljiv.
adjust
“Pitch”,
“Horizontal
Shift”
and
“Vertical
Shift”.
indicator to remain lit or may cause the TV to
“Pitch”
“Phase”
malfunction.
“Phase”
povećavanje
iliwhen
sužavanje
slike.
z Horizontalno
• The CHAdjusts
+ button
hasphase
a tactile
dot. the
Use screen
it veličine
as a flickers.
the
Adjusts
the
phase
when
the
screen flickers.
reference when
operating
the TV.
“Horizontal
Shift”
“Pitch”
“Pitch”
Podešavanje
horizontalnog položaja slike.
thethe
pitch
when
thethe
picture
hashas
unwanted
vertical
stripes.
Adjusts
pitch
when
picture
unwanted
vertical
stripes.
“Vertical Adjusts
Shift”
Podešavanje
vertikalnog
položaja
slike.
“Horizontal
Shift”
“Horizontal Shift”
Adjusts
thethe
horizontal
position
of the
picture.
Adjusts
horizontal
position
of the
picture.
PC
input
signal
reference
chart
forfor
and
HDMI
IN1,
1, 22
PC
input
signal
reference
chart
PC
HDMI
IN
1, 2
Tabela
ulaznih
signala
računara
za PCPC
iand
HDMI
IN
ZaFor
For
KDL-32BX320/KDL-26BX320/KDL-22BX320
KDL-32BX320/KDL-26BX320/KDL-22BX320
Horizontalna
Vertikalna
Vertikalno
Horizontalno
Horizontal
Horizontal
Vertical
Standard
Horizontal
Horizontal
Vertical
Signali
Signals
Vertical
(Line)
Standard
Signals
Vertical
Standard
(Pixel)
frequency
(kHz)
frequency
(Hz)
(kHz)
(Hz)
(Linija)(Line) frekvencija
(Pikseli)
(Pixel)
frequency
(kHz) frekvencija
frequency
(Hz)
VGA
640640
480480
31.5
60 60
VGA
VGA
31.5
VGA
SVGA
SVGA
XGA
XGA
800800
1024
1024
600600
768768
37.9
37.9
48.4
48.4
60 60
WXGA
WXGA
WXGA
WXGA
1280
1280
1280
1280
768768
768768
47.4
47.4
47.8
47.8
60 60
60 60
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
WXGA
WXGA
1360
1360
768768
47.7
47.7
60 60
VESA
VESA
For
KDL-40BX420
ZaFor
KDL-40BX420
Horizontalno
Horizontal
Horizontal
Signali
Signals
Signals
(Pixel)
(Pikseli)
(Pixel)
VGA
640640
VGA
800800
1024
1024
WXGA
WXGA
WXGA
WXGA
1280
1280
1280
1280
WXGA
WXGA
SXGA
SXGA
1360
1360
1280
1280
HDTV
HDTV
1920
1920
••
••
•
•
Horizontalna
Vertikalna
Vertikalno
Horizontal
Vertical
Standard
Horizontal
Vertical
Vertical
(Line)
Standard
Vertical
(Line) frekvencija
Standard
(kHz)
frekvencija
(Hz)
frequency
(kHz)
frequency
(Hz)
(Linija)
frequency (kHz) frequency
(Hz)
480480
600600
31.5
31.5
37.9
37.9
60 60
768768
768768
48.4
48.4
47.4
47.4
768768
768768
47.8
47.8
47.7
47.7
60 60
1024
1024
1080
1080
64 64
60 60
67.5
67.5
60 60
60 60
60 60
60 60
60 60
VGA
VGA
VESA
Guidelines
VESA Guidelines
VESA
Guidelines
VESA
Guidelines
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
EIA
EIA
Using Menu Functions
Using Menu Functions
SVGA
SVGA
XGA
XGA
60 60
VESA
Guidelines
VESA
Guidelines
VESA
Guidelines
VESA Guidelines
This
TV’s
PCPC
input
does
not
support
Sync
on
Green
oriliComposite
Sync.
PC
ulaz
ovog
TV-a
ne
podržava
Sync
on on
Green
Sync.
• This
TV’s
input
does
not
support
Sync
Green
orComposite
Composite
Sync.
This
TV’s
PCPC
input
does
not
support
interlaced
signals.
PC
ulaz
ovog
TV-a
ne
podržava
isprepletane
signale.
• This
TV’s
input
does
not
support
interlaced
signals.
This
TV’s PCPC
input
supports
signals
in the
above
chart
with a 60
HzHz
vertical
frequency.
• This
input
supports
signals
in uthe
above
chart
a 60
vertical
frequency.
PC
ulazTV’s
ovog TV-a
podržava
signale
gornjoj
tabeliwith
sa 60
Hz vertikalne
frekvencije.
25 SRP
GB GB
2525
Channel Set-up kanala
Podešavanje
qh
qj
/
Operating the TV
– Item select / Enter
– Info / Text reveal
F/f/G/g/
qh
qj
/
– Info / Text reveal
– Item select / Ente
• Displays information. Press once to
input you are viewing. Press again to
• In Text mode: Reveals hidden inform
F/f/G/g/
• Selects or adjusts items.
• Confirms selected items.
• When playing a photo file: Press G t
the next file.
When playing a music/video file: Pre
hold G/g to fast forward/fast reverse
you want to resume playback.
qk OPTIONS
Press to display a list that contains sho
The listed options vary depending on t
– Subtitle setting
When the coloured buttons are availabl
ql Coloured buttons
w;
/
Press to change the subtitle language (
– Previous channel
• Selects the next (+) or previous (–) c
• In Text mode: Selects the next ( )
Returns to the previous channel or inpu
wa PROG/CH +/–/
ws
PC or HDM
Normal
Full 1
Full 2
• Some o
PC inpu
• You cannot select “Normal” or “14:9” for HD signal
To change the Wide Mode
Wide Zoom*
For TV, Video, Component or HDMI (except
PC input)
Enlarges the centre portion of the
picture. The left and right edges of
the picture are stretched to fill the
16:9 screen.
Normalabout the programme/
Displays the 4:3 picture in its original
• Displays information. Press once to display information
input you are viewing. Press again to remove the display from the screen.
size. Side bars are shown to fill the
• In Text mode: Reveals hidden information (e.g. answers to a quiz). 16:9 screen.
• Selects or adjusts items.
• Confirms selected items.
Full
Stretches the 4:3 picture horizontally
• When playing a photo file: Press G to select the previous file. Press to
g fill
to select
the 16:9 screen.
the next file.
When playing a music/video file: Press
to pause/start the playback. Press and
hold G/g to fast forward/fast reverse, then release the button at the point where
you want to resume playback.
Zoom*
Displays cinemascopic (letter box
qk OPTIONS
Press to display a list that contains shortcuts to some setting menus. format) broadcasts in the correct
The listed options vary depending on the current input and content. proportions.
When the coloured buttons are available, an operation guide appears on the screen.
14:9*
Displays 14:9 broadcasts in the
– Subtitle setting
ql Coloured buttons
w;
Analogue
Set-up
“Analogue
Auto Tuning”:
Tunes
in all the
available
analogue
channels.
Usually you
Analogue
Set-up
“Analogue
Auto Tuning”:
Podešava sve
dostupne
analogne
kanale.
Obično
ne morate
do
not
need
to
do
this
operation
because
the
channels
are
already
tuned
when
the TV
da izvodite ovo podešavanje jer su kanali već podešeni kad se TV prvi put postavlja. Međutim,
was
first installed.
However, this option allows you to repeat the process (e.g., to retune
qh ova
/ opcija
– Info
/
Text
reveal
vam omogućava da ponovite proces (npr. da ponovo podesite TV posle selidbe ili da
the TV afterPress
moving
or toinformation
search for about
new channels
that have been launched by
• Displays information.
oncehouse,
to display
the programme/
tražite
nove
kanale
koje
su lansirali
prenosnici
signala).from the screen.
input you
are
viewing.
Press
again to remove
the display
broadcasters).
Programme
Preset”:
Menja podešenje
dostupnih
analognih kanala.
• “Manual
In Text mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to a quiz).
“Manual
Preset”:
Changes
analogue
channel setting.
qhizmenite.
/the –available
Info / Text
reveal
/odabir
–Programme
Info
/ Text
reveal
zaItem
programa
koji
želite da
qj FPritisnite
/f/G/gqh
/ –
select
/ Enter
Press
to
select
the
programme
you
want
to
modify.
•
Displays
information.
Press
once
to display information abou
•
Displays
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
the
programme/
– Info / Text reveal
• Programme/TV
Selects orqh
adjusts/ items.
System
input you
are
viewing.
Press
again to remove the display from
input
youinformation.
are viewing.Press
Press
again
to
remove
the
display
from
the
screen.
•
Displays
once
to
display
information
about
the
programme/
• Ručno
Confirms
selected
items.
qh
/ –•Info
/ Text
reveal
Programme/TV
System
podešavanje
kanala.
In Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information (e.g. answers to a
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
a quiz).
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
to remove
the
display
from
the
screen.
• When playing• aIn
photo
file:
Press
G to select
previous
Press
g
to to
select
• the
Displays
information.
once
to display
information about the prog
qh
/ /file.
–/g
Info
/–Press
Text
reveal
qh
/f
Info
Presets
programme
channels
manually.
1thePritisnite
odabir
“Programme”,
zatim
pritisnite
.
qj
F
/
f
G
/
Item
select
/
Enter
qj
F
/G–za
/g
/ /–Text
Itemreveal
select
/
Enter
• /In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
a
quiz).
next file.
inputtoyou
are viewing.
Pressabout
again
to programme/
remove
the display
from theabou
scre
•display
Displays
information.
Press
once
to display
information
•• a Displays
information.
Press
once
information
the
•
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
qh
/
–
Info
/
Text
reveal
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
playing
music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and
2When
Pritisnite
za
odabir
broja
programa
koji
želite
ručno
da
podesite
(ako
podešavate
1 Press
//f
“Programme”,
then
press
.display
F/input
f/F
Gyou
g/toareselect
qj
–viewing.
Item
select
• again
In/ Enter
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
answers
a quiz).from
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again(e.g.
to remove
thetodisplay
Press
to
remove
the
from
the
screen.
•
Confirms
selected
items.
Displays
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
the
programme/
•
Confirms
selected
items.
hold G/g to fast
forward/fast
reverse,
release
button
atmode:
the point
V buttons and indicators
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
videorekorder,
izaberite
program
0),then
zatim
.–(e.g.
F
finformation
qj
/pritisnite
/Gthe
/•number
/ Text
Item
select
/a file:
Enter
•gremove
In
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers to
a
Press
/f
to
the
programme
you
want
towhere
manually
tune
(if
tuning
a previous
2 resume
Fplayback.
••• In
Text
mode:
hidden
answers
to
quiz).
When
playing
aReveals
photo
to select
the
file.
input
you
areselect
viewing.
Press
again
theprevious
display
from
thePress
screen.
playing
aReveals
photo
file:
Press
G to
toor
select
the
file.
Press
g
toGselect
you want to
• When
Confirms
selected
items.
•then
Selects
adjusts
items.
3 Pritisnite
za
odabir
“TV
System”,
zatim
pritisnite
.
F
f
G
g
qj
/
/
/
/
–
Item
select
/
Enter
VCR,
select
programme
0),
press
.
qj
/
/
/
/
–
Item
select
/
Enter
F
f
G
g
the
next
file.
•
In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
a
quiz).
next
file. a photo file:•Press
1 – Power• the
When
playing
G–
to
select
the
previous
file. Press g to select
qk 1
OPTIONS
Confirms
selected
qh
/Enter
Info
/ playing
Text
reveal
• TV
Selects
oritems.
adjusts
items.
/ /When
Info
/ select
Text
reveal
•F
Selects
items.
When
a sistema,
music/video
file:
Press
to pause/start the pl
4Press
Pritisnite
odabir
najbolje
primljenih
emitovanih
zatim
pritisnite.
music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
andprevious
qj
/playing
/toadjusts
–a Item
/ mode.
fTV/–F
G
gor
toqh
turn
the
on
or
to
switch
toselect
standby
f
3• Press
/za
“TV
System”,
then
press
. file:
the
next
file.
Press
to display
aDisplays
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
•
When
playing
a
photo
Press
G to
to display
select
the
•
Displays
information.
Press
once
information
about
the g
pra
•
Confirms
selected
items.
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
•
Confirms
selected
items.
qh
–the
Info
/from
Text
reveal
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
releasefile.
the Press
button
G/g
toadjusts
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
atthe
theprogramme/
point
where
• / hold
Selects
or
items.
U
zavisnosti
od
zemlje/regije
izabrane
u “Country”,
ova
opcija
možda
neće
biti
dostupna.
When
playing
a music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the playback.
Press
and
•• To
disconnect
TV
the
ACbest
power
The listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
the
next
file.
F
f
Press
/
to
select
the
received
TV
broadcast
systems,
then
press
.
4
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
to
remove
the
display
from thefile.
sc
•
When
playing
a
photo
file:
Press
G
to
select
the previous
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
to
remove
the
display
from
the
screen.
•• Displays
When
playing
a
photo
file:
Press
G
to
select
previous
file.
Press
g
to
select
you
want
to
resume
playback.
•
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
programme/
you
want
to
resume
playback.
Confirms
selected
items.
hold
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the button
atinformation
the pointtowhere
completely,
pullG/g
the to
plug
from
thehidden
AC power
ql Coloured
buttons
Channel
playing
athe
music/video
file:
Press
pause/start
theto
playback.
•When
In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
(e.g.
answers
a quiz). P
the
next
file.
•
In
Text
mode:
Reveals
information
(e.g.
answers
to
a
quiz).
the
next
file.
•
Depending
on
the
country/region
selected
for
“Country”,
this
option
may
not
be
available.
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
to
remove
display
from
the
screen.
qk
OPTIONS
•
When
playing
a
photo
file:
Press
G
to
select
the
previous
file.
Press
g
to
select
qk OPTIONS
you
want
to “Channel”,
resume playback.
When
theoutlet.
coloured
buttons
are
anqj
operation
appears
on aselect
the
screen.
to/ fast
forward/fast
then
release
button at the
When
playing
music/video
file:
Press
to pause/start
thepoin
pl
1 Pritisnite
odabir
zatim
.display
/pritisnite
/G/g
/g
–pause/start
Item
/contains
Enter
F
fshortcuts
Gguide
playing
a list
music/video
file:
Press
to
the
playback.
Press
and the
qjqkF
/In
/za
/g
/ file.
–available,
select
/hold
Enter
fWhen
Gtonext
• Press
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
areverse,
quiz).
Press
to
a list
that
shortcuts
to
some setting
me
the
display
aItem
that
contains
toG/g
some
setting
menus.
OPTIONS
Channel
you
want
toiliadjusts
resume
playback.
w; 2 2CH
– Subtitle
setting
hold
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
a
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at
the
point
where
•
Selects
or
items.
•
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
Pritisnite
za
odabir
“S”
(za
kablovske
kanale)
“C”
(za
zemaljske
kanale),
zatim
pritisnite
qj
/
/
/
/
–
Item
select
/
Enter
F
f
G
g
Thecurrent
listed
options
vary
dependingPress
on the
current input and conte
+/–/
/
When
playing
a list
music/video
file:on
Press
to
pause/start
the
playback.
and
The
listed
options
vary
depending
the
input
and
content.
Press
to
display
a
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
Press to qh
change
the
language
(page
27)
(in
digital
mode
qk
OPTIONS
you
want
toitems.
resume
playback.
•reverse,
Confirms
selected
you
want
resume
playback.
F
foroptions
/or
select
“Channel”,
then
press
.only).
1the
•/Press
Confirms
selected
items.
–subtitle
Info
/to
Text
reveal
Selects
adjusts
items.
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
then
release
the
button
at the point where
• Selectsql
next
(+)
previous
(–)
channel.
ql
Coloured
buttons
Coloured
buttons
The
listed
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
Press
display
a list
that contains
shortcuts
to some
setting menus.
wa PROG/CH
+/–/
/F
• qh
When
playing
acoloured
photo
file:
Press
G available,
to
select
the
file.
Press
g
qk
OPTIONS
•Displays
When
playing
a photo
file:
Press
Gto
select
the
previous
file.
Press
g channels),
to
select
OPTIONS
Confirms
selected
items.
•2
Press
once
display
information
about
the
programme/
you
want
to select
resume
playback.
• Podesite
In TV qk
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
up
(to
)to
or
When
buttons
are
an previous
operation
guide
appe
f
Press
/information.
to
“S”
(for
cable
channels)
or
“C”
(for
terrestrial
then
/options
–the
Info
/ depending
Text
reveal
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
kanale
na
sledeći
način:
ql
Coloured
The
listed
vary
on
the
current
input
and
content.
• 3Selects
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
the
next
file.
Press
to
display
a from
listfile.
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
me
the
next
file.buttons
Press
to
display
a
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
•input
When
playing
a
photo
file:
Press
G
to
select
the
previous
Press
g
to
select
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
to
remove
the
display
the
screen.
downthe
(w;next
).
qk
OPTIONS
•
Displays
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
w;
–listed
Subtitle
setting
gthe
. kanala
press
–next
Subtitle
setting
When
coloured
buttons
areColoured
available,
an
guide
appears
onPress
the screen.
• Ako
In Text
Selects
the
next
((frekvenciju)
)hidden
or
previous
( the
) playing
page.
nemode:
znate
broj
When
a options
music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the playback.
ql
buttons
The
vary
depending
the
current
input
andfrom
cont
When
playing
aamusic/video
file:
Press
tooperation
playback.
and
listed
options
vary
depending
on
current
input
and
the
file.
• InThe
Text
mode:
Reveals
information
(e.g.
answers
tothe
acontent.
quiz).
Press
toSubtitle
display
list
that
contains
shortcuts
topause/start
some
setting
menus.
input
are
viewing.
Press
againon
to(page
remove
the
display
Press
toyou
change
the
subtitle
language
27)
(in
digital
mode
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
2
+/–/
/
w;
–
setting
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at to
the
Tune
the
channels
as
follows:
3
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
ona po
th
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at
the
point
where
ws 3 Pritisnite
– Previous
channel
ql
Coloured
buttons
za
odabir
sledećeg
dostupnog
kanala.
Kad
se
kanal
pronađe,
pretraživanje
se
When
playing
a
music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and
ql
Coloured
buttons
F
f
G
g
qj
/
/
/
/
–
Item
select
/
Enter
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
•
In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
q
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
/
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
/ playback.
• /Increases
(+)
orwant
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
you
want
to
resume
playback.
you
resume
to– the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
more
than
seconds).
qhReturns
Info
/you
Text
reveal
qh
/ (page
–./G
Info
/15
Text
reveal
w;
–(for
Subtitle
setting
When
the
coloured
buttons
arepoint
available,
an operation guide app
hold
G/g
tonot
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at the
where
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
If
do
know
the
channel
number
(frequency)
• Da
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
zaustavlja.
nastavite
sa
traženjem,
pritisnite
ql
Coloured
buttons
F
f
g
qj
/
/
/
–
Item
select
/
Enter
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
•PROG/CH
Selects
the
nextonce
(+)/playback.
or display
previous
(–)
channel.
In TV
menu:
Moves
through
the
options
right
(
)
wa
+/–/
qk
OPTIONS
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
• • Displays
information.
Press
to
information
•
Displays
about
information.
the
programme/
Press
once
to
display
information
about
the
qk
OPTIONS
you
want
to
resume
w;
–Text
Subtitle
setting
• Confirms
selected
items.
w;
–Text
Subtitle
setting
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on the
screen.
•)•channel.
Selects
ormode:
adjusts
items.
Press
Fthe
/f
tonext
search
for
the
next
available
channel.
When
a channel
been
found,
In
Selects
theagain
next
(has
)to
orsome
previous
( menus.
) from
page.the
Ako
broj
kanala
(frekvenciju)
•When
mode:
Selects
the
next
( (–)
or
previous
( the
)the
page.
or znate
left
).
• In
Selects
the
(+)
ortocontains
previous
Press
display
a(in
list
that
contains
shortcuts
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
remove
the
input
display
you
from
are
screen.
Press
remove
thesetting
display
to
display
list
that
to
setting
menus.
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
/viewing.
Press
tosome
change
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in digital
mode
qk
OPTIONS
•( Press
When
playing
a aphoto
file:
Press
Gshortcuts
to
select
the
previous
file.
Press
g to to
select
Press
toSubtitle
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
digital
mode
only).
nge the Wide Mode
•to
Confirms
selected
items.
w;
–
setting
F
/
f
.
the
search
will
stop.
To
continue
searching,
press
ws
–
Previous
channel
Pritisnite
brojčane
tipke
da
unesete
broj
kanala
koji
želite
ili
broj
kanala
vašeg
videorekordera.
ws
–
Previous
channel
•
In
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
(
)
or
previous
(
)
page.
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
•
In
answers
Text
mode:
to
a
quiz).
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
afile.
quizP
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
Press
to
display
a
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
the
next
file.
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
/
4 • In /Text–wa
Input
select
/
Enter
• (page
When
playing
amore
photo
file:
Press
Ginput
to select
the previous
PROG/CH
+/–/
/ channel
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
or
watched
(for
more
than
Returns
to
the
previous
or
input
watched
(for
than
15
seconds).
ws/The
–Item
Previous
channel
If• you
know
the
number
(frequency)
Video, Component orqj
HDMI
(except
4• Pritisnite
da
pređete
na
“Confirm”,
pritisnite.
ql
Coloured
buttons
/f
/Gql
/g
–Selects
select
/channel
Enter
qj
/the
/mode:
/ Selects
– Item
select
/) Enter
F
FText
f(PC
G
g
•zatim
In
the
next
or
previous
( ) page.
Coloured
buttons
listed
options
vary
depending
on
current
input
and
content.
When
playing
aequipment
music/video
file:
Press
to/next
pause/start
the(+)
playback.
Press
andchannel.
•the
Selects
the
next
or(previous
(–)
Displays
the
connected
and
selects
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
timing)
file.
the
next
(+)
or list
previous
(–)
channel.
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
/
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
than
15
seconds).
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
•
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
•
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
hold
G/g
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at
the
point
where
ws
–((–)
Previous
channel
•or
In
Text
mode:
Selects
next
) or want
previous
qlpostupak
Coloured
buttons
the input
source
(page
13).
ut)
Ponovite
prikazan
iznad
zathe
ručno
podešavanje
drugih
Press
the
number
buttons
tonext
enter
the
channel
number
of thethe
broadcast
you
or ( ) page.
When
playing
file: (Press
to pause/start
the play
•• In
Text
mode:
Selects
)channel.
previous
( akanala.
)music/video
page.
Selects
next
(+)
or
previous
•Mode
selected
items.
•ws
Confirms
selected
items.
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
you
want
tothe
resume
playback.
w;
–
Subtitle
setting
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
than
15
seco
To
change
the
Wide
• Confirms
In TV
menu:
Selects
the
menu
or
option,
and
w;
–
Subtitle
setting
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at
–
Previous
channel
your
VCR
channel
number.
ws
–
Previous
channel
• Ina photo
Text Normal
mode:
Selects
theselect
next the
(• When
)the
or previous
(aits
)original
page.
Displays
picture
insubtitle
oom* Enlarges the centre portion
of the
•Label
When
playing
file:previous
Press
G channel
to
previous
playing
file.
Press
photo
g
to
file:
select
Press
Gortoinput
select
the
previous
file.
Pres
Press
to
change
theto
language
(page
27) (in
digital
mode
only).
confirms
the
setting.
qkw;
OPTIONS
Press
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
you
want
resume
playback.
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
watched
(for
more
than
––toSubtitle
setting
To picture.
change
the Wide
Mode
Returns
totothe
or
input
watched
(for
more
than
15 seconds).
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
ws
Previous
channel
4
Press
jump
to
“Confirm”,
then
press
.
For
TV, Video,
or
HDMI
(except
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
at
the
top,
The leftComponent
and right
edges
of
the next
file.
the
next
file.
PC
HDMI PC Input (PC timi
PC
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
tothe
display
a list
that
contains
shortcuts
to27)
some
setting
menus.
wa or
PROG/CH
+/–/
/sedam
waPress
PROG/CH
+/–/
/ kanalu
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
(indo
digital
mode
only).
naziv
po
vašem
izboru
koji
ste
odabrali,
slova
ili or
brojeva.
qk
OPTIONS
To
change
Wide
Mode
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
than
15
seconds).
5 Dodeljuje
playing
a music/video
file:
Press
pause/start
When
playing
the
playback.
aand
music/video
Press
and
file:
Press
to pause/start
the playba
PC
input)
Forthe
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
Repeat
the
procedure
above
tobottom,
preset
other
channels
manually.
and
both
sides
for
small
PC
input)
picture
are stretched
toWhen
fill the
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
content.
•to
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–) channel.
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
Press
to
display
a
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to some setting
menu
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
/
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
Displays
orto
cancels
the
menu. reverse,
To
change
Wide AFT
Mode
hold
fast
forward/fast
then
hold
G/g
button
tooptions
fast
forward/fast
point
where
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at the
•release
In (except
mode:
Selects
the
next
(in
) or
previous
(Displays
)input
page.
For
TV,
Video,
Component
orNormal
HDMI
picture.
PC
input)
qlG/g
Coloured
buttons
In Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
((–)
)Text
orthe
previous
(at the
)the
page.
16:9
screen.the Enlarges
Normal
the
picture
The
listed
vary
depending
on
the
current
and
conten
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
channel.
Displays
picture
its
original
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
Wide
Zoom*
the
centre
portion
of
the
Label
you
want
to
resume
playback.
you
want
to
resume
playback.
To change
the Wide
Mode
precizno
ručnobuttons
podešavanje
odabranog
kanala
mislite
dashown
biste
malim
When
coloured
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
6 Omogućava
–centre
Remote
sensor
sensor
ws
–)Previous
channel
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
ws
Previous
channel
•portion
In–the
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
(ql
or
previous
(kad
)(PC
page.
PC
input)
Coloured
buttons
For
TV,
Video,
or
HDMI
(except
size.(PC
Barstimi
are
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
ororiginal
PCpixel
Input
Normal
Displays
the
picture
its
pixel
size.
Bars
arePC
atHDMI
the top,
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
theof/ Light
picture.
The
and
right
edges
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
timing)
Displays
the 4:3Component
picture
inthe
itsleft
original
qk OPTIONS
qk
OPTIONS
Assigns
aof
name
of1channel
your channel
choice,
upslike.
to When
seven
letters
ormore
numbers,
toininput
the
selected
Full
Stretches
the
original
picture
to
fillor
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
watched
(for
more guide
thanboth
15
sec
Receives
IR
signals
the
remote.
podešavanjem
da
poboljšate
kvalitet
w;
––mogli
Subtitle
setting
Returns
tofrom
the
previous
or
input
watched
(for
than
15
seconds).
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an channel.
operation
appea
ws
Previous
PC
input)
bottom,
and
si
PC
input)
Forsize.
TV,Side
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
at
the
top,
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
its
or
bottom,
and
both
sides
for
small
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
Press
to room
display
a list
thatand
contains
shortcuts
to HDMI
some
Press
setting
to
display
menus.
a list
thattiming)
contains
shortcuts to some setting menus.
PC
or
PC
(PC
bars are shown
to fill
the
Senses
light
level
adjusts
the
screen
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(pagevertically,
27)
(inInput
digital
mode
only).
the
screen
keeping
its
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
than
15
seconds).
w;
–
Subtitle
setting
AFT
picture.
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
The
input
listed
andDisplays
options
content.
vary
depending
onoriginal
thepixel
current
input
and
content.
16:9
screen.
Normal
Displays
the
picture
PC
input)
bottom,
and
both
sides
for
small
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
size.
Bars
are
shown
at
picture.
the picture
stretched
to
fill
the
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
16:9
screen.
Normal
the
picture
in
its
Wide
Zoom*
theare
centre
portion
of
the
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
Audio
Filter
16:9
screen. Enlarges
wachange
PROG/CH
+/–/
/Mode original Press
to change the subtitle
(page 27) (in digital mode o
horizontal-to-vertical
aspectlanguage
To
the
Wide
To change the Wide
Mode
Allows
you
to
fine-tune
the
selected
programme
number
manually
if you
feel
that
a both
qlscreen.
Coloured
buttons
ql
Coloured
buttons
pixel
size.
Barsforaresm
sensor,
doing
so
may
affect
its
function.
picture.
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
bottom,
and
sides
16:9
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
at
the
top,
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
its
original
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
Poboljšava
zvuk
za
pojedinačne
kanale
u
slučaju
distorzije
u
mono
emitovanju.
Ponekad
nestan
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
its
original
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/buttons
/the
Normal
Displays
the 4:3
picture
in buttons
its original
ratio.
To
change
the Component
Wide
Mode
Full
1 picture.
Stretches
the
origin
When
the
coloured
are
available,
an
operation
guide
the
appears
on both
screen.
are
available,
operation
guide
appears
Full
Stretches
the
original
picture
toanfill
slight
tuning
adjustment
will
improve
the
picture
quality.
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
bottom,
and
both
si
For
TV, Video,
or
HDMI
theizazvati
picture
are
stretched
totocoloured
fill
the
•Picture
Inright
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
( 1HDMI
)When
or
previous
(ili
)isprekidani
page.
16:9
screen.
bottom,
and
sides
for
small
picture
are
stretched
to(except
fill
the
pixel
size.
Bars
shown
the
top, mono
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC timing)
picture.
The
and
edges
•(except
Selects
the
next
(+)
orare
previous
(–)
channel.
PC
or
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
dardni
signal
emitovanja
može
izobličenje
zvuka
zvuk
priat
gledanju
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
fill
the
7
/–left
–picture
Off
/ofTimer
indicator
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
in
its
original
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
Stretches the 4:3the
picture
horizontally
w;
Subtitle
setting
w;
–
Subtitle
setting
the
screen
vertically
Full
1
Stretches
the
original
picture
to
fill
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
For
TV, Video, Component
or
HDMI
(except
ws
–
Previous
channel
picture.
PC
input)
16:9
screen.
•
In
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
(
)
or
previous
(
)
page.
PC input)
picture.
16:9
screen.
bottom,
and
both
sides
for
small
Lights
up
in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
16:9
screen.
programa.
Full
2 the 4:3(page
Stretches
the
1 picture
Audio
Filter
size. screen.
Side
bars
shown
to
fill
thelanguage
Normal
Displays
picture
inPress
itswatched
original
16:9
to fill the 16:9 screen.
Press
to are
change
theto
subtitle
(in
digital
to Full
change
mode
the
only).
subtitle
language
(page
27) (in
digitalhorizontalmode only
original
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
Full
115
Stretches
the
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
the
previous
channel
or27)
input
(for
more
than
seconds).
(page
30).Returns
channel
PC
input)
picture.
Normal
Displays
theoriginal
picture picture
in its o
16:9
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
theindividual
centre
portion
of –
the
Normal
Displays
theof
picture
inovu
itsinopciju
original
Wide
Zoom* Enlarges
the
portion
of
the
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
Ako
ne
bilo
kakvo
izobličenje
zvuka,
da
ostavite
na
fabričko
Normal
Displays
the
4:3ws
picture
inPrevious
its
original
16:9
screen.
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
topreporučujemo
fill
the
Improves
sound
for
channels
in
the
case
distortion
mono
broadcasts.
wascreen.
PROG/CH
+/–/in
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
/
Normal
Displays
thecentre
4:3iskusite
picture
its/the
original
ratio.
Full
1
Stretches
thekeeping
origin
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
the
screen
vertically,
ratio.
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
than 1
Full
1
Stretches
thepicture
original
picture
topixel
fill size. Bars are
shown
Normal
Displays
the
in its
original
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
Wide
Zoom* Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
pixel
size.
Bars
shown
at channel.
the
top,
•podešenjeSelects
the
nextin
(+)
or
previous
(–)Side
channel.
•picture
Selects
the
next
(+)
or are
previous
(–)
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
8
1
–
Standby
indicator
size.
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
“Off”.
Sometimes
a
non-standard
broadcast
signal
can
cause
sound
distortion
or
intermittent
16:9
screen.
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
its
original
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
horizontally
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
the
screen
vertically
ratio.
original
horizontal-to-vertica
To change
the Wide
Mode
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
Full
1
Stretches
the
original
picture
to
fill
• Lights
In
Text
mode:
the
next
( are
) stretched
or previous
•toprogrammes.
In
(fillText
) page.
mode:
Selects
the
next
( 2at
)the
or bottom,
previous
( both
) page.
up
inright
redtoSelects
when
the
TV
iswatching
in
standby
mode.
and
sides
for1
pixel
size.
are
top, Stretches
picture
the
picture.
The
left
and
edges
of
bottom,
andBars
both
sides
for
small
the
picture
are
stretched
fill
the
16:9
screen.
Full
the
Full
sound
muting
when
mono
16:9
screen.
Full
2screen.
Stretches
the
Full
1shown
picture
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to fill
the
to
fill
the
16:9
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
original horizontalratio.
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
the screen
vertically,
keeping
its
Skip
ws
– or
Previous
channel
ws distortion,
– Previous
channel
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
picture.
For TV,
Video,
Component
HDMI
(except
bottom,
and
both
sides
for
small
16:9
screen.
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
picture.
16:9
screen.
horizontally
to
fill
t
If
you
do
not
experience
any
sound
we
recommend
that
you
leave
this
option
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
9
"
–
Power
indicator
Full
2
Stretches
the
Full
1
picture
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
16:9
screen.
to fill
16:9
Fullscreen.
Stretches
the
4:3 picture
horizontally
Returns
toFor
theneupotrebljenih
previous
channel
or input
watched
Returns
(for more
to
the
than
previous
15horizontal-to-vertical
seconds).
channelPROG
or input+/–.
watched
(for more than 15
ratio.
original
aspect ratio.
Preskakanje
analognih
kanala
kod
biranja
kanala
tipkama
format) broadcasts
in the
the
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
picture.
PCNormal
input)
16:9
screen.
• correct
Lights
up
intoTV,
green
when
the
TV
is
turned
on.not
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timin
set
the
factory
setting
“Off”.
•
Some
options
may
be
available
depending
on
the
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
Full
2
Stretches
the
Full
1
picture
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
its
original
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
its
original
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
to fill the 16:9 pomoću
screen.
Full
the
4:3 picture
horizontally
Full 1 picture to fill
Stretches the original pictu
ratio. the original
Full
1 brojčanih Stretches
(Preskočeni
kanal
možete
tipki.)
proportions. Stretches
• centre
Flashes
while
the
remoteizabrati
isPCbeing
operated.
input
signal.
PC
input)
Normal
the picture
original
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
portion
Full
2 horizontally
Stretches
Full 1s
to fill the 16:9
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to fillDisplays
the
Normal
Displays
4:34:3
picture
inof
itsthe
original
Full
2screen.
Stretches
theoriginal
Fullin1 its
picture
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
to fill
the
16:9
to
fill
thethe
16:9
screen.
Full
Stretches
the
picture
horizontally
ange
the
Wide
Mode
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
the screen vertically,
keepi
Skip
Full
1
Stretches
the
picture
to
fill
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
Normal
the picture
pixel
size. Bars
are
shown
at thescreen.
top, Displays
qhshown
/edges
–
Info
Text
reveal
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
ofhorizontally
the
picture.
The
left
and
right
horizontally
to fill ti
16:9/ screen.
size.
Side
bars
are
to
fillof
the
Confirm
to
fill
the
16:9
16:9
screen.
Full
2
Stretches
the
Full
1
picture
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
original
horizontal-to-verti
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
Skips
unused
analogue
channels
when
you
press
PROG
+/–
tothe
select
channels.
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect (You
format)
broadcasts
in
the
correct
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
V, Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
format)
broadcasts
in
the
correct
•
Displays
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
programme/
pixel
Bars
are sh
bottom,
both
for
Info
/ Text
reveal
picture.
TheuPC
left
and
right
edges
or
HDMI
Input
(PC
timing)
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
the16:9
picture
are
stretched
to/ fill
the
Displays 14:9
broadcasts
theqh
qhofand
/be
–sides
Info
/ 16:9
Text
reveal
• in
Make
sure
that
the–
TV
isPC
completely
turned
before
•small
Some
options
maysize.
not be
available
screen.
Memoriše
promene
koje
napravili
podešenju
“Manual
Programme
Preset”.
• off
Some
options
may
not
available
depending
on
the
horizontally
to
fill
the
screen.
ratio.
original
horizontal-to-vertical
can
stillAC
select
asteskipped
channel
using
the
number
buttons.)
ratio.
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
todisplay
remove
the •display
from
the programme/
screen.
proportions.
format)
in
the
correct
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
put)
PC
input)
• Sorting”:
Displays
information.
Press
once
to
information
about
the
unplugging
power
cord.
Unplugging
the
AC
PC aspect
input
signal.
Displays
information.
Press
once to display
PC
input
signal.
bottom,
and bothinfor
side
picture.
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fillmay
the
16:9proportions.
screen.
correct proportions.
As“Programme
abroadcasts
result,
black
•
Some
options
not
be
available
depending
on
the
Menja
redosled
kojim
su
analogni
kanali
sačuvani
na
TV-u.
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
Full
Stretches
the
4:3 picture
•Zoom*
Inhorizontally
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
a quiz).
ratio.
power
cord
while
the
TV
isviewing.
turned
onPress
may
cause
the
input
you
are
to remove
the
display
from
theviewing.
screen. Press
input
you
are
again the
to remove
the
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
proportions.
format)
broadcasts
in again
the
correct
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
PC
input
signal.
picture.
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
its
original
Normal
Displays
picture
in i
16:9
screen.
Confirm
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
Wide
the
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
border
areas
are
visible
on
the
screen.
• mode:
may
not
available
Full
Stretches
the
Full 1dependi
picture
116:9
Pritisnite
koji
želite
da pomerite
naanswers
mesto,
pa options
pritisnite
. beinformation
Full
2 to
Stretches
the
Full
12quiz).
picture
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
its
original
indicator
litmode:
may
cause
the
TV
to
the
16:9
screen.
qj
/za
/odabir
/orfill
–kanala
Item
select
/information
Enter
F
f
G
g
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
•toin/remain
In
Text
Reveals
hidden
(e.g.
to
aSome
to fill the
screen.
•novo
Inoriginal
Text
Reveals
hidden
(e.g. a
Full
1
Stretches
the
picture
to
fill
format)
broadcasts
in
the
correct
proportions.
format)
broadcasts
in
the
correct
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
PC
input
signal.
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
at
the
top,
pixel
size.
Bars
are
show
picture. The
left
and
right
edges
of
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
of
Saves
changes
made
to
the
“Manual
Programme
Preset”
settings.
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
malfunction.
•
Some
options
may
not
be
availabl
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
•
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
Full
2
Stretches
the
Full
1
picture
2
Pritisnite
za
odabir
novog
položaja
za
vaš
kanal,
zatim
pritisnite
.
•
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
on
the
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
the 4:3/ picture
itsscreen
original
size.
Side
arescreen.
shown
qjNormal
/to
/G/g/ –Displays
Item
select
Enter inthe
Fbutton
ffill
to fill
thebars
16:9
qj Fvertically,
/f/G/g/keeping
Item
selectStretches
/ Enterthe original
Full–1channels
its input
proportions.
z broadcasts
• 14:9
The
CH
+
tactile
dot.
Use
itstretched
asbottom,
aPCthe
format)
in
correct
signal.
and
both
sides
forto
small
bottom,
and both sides f
••Asthe
Confirms
selected
items.
the picture16:9
areproportions.
stretched
to
fill
the
thesize.
picture
are
to
fill
the
input
signal.
“Programme
Sorting”:
Changes
order
in
which
the
analogue
stored
correct
proportions.
As
atoresult,
black
14:9*
Displays
broadcasts
in has
the
Selects
orablack
adjusts
items.
correct
a result,
horizontally
fillorthe
16:9 PC
screen.
• Selects
adjusts
items.
• are
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
onare
thethe
Side
bars
shown
fill
the
screen.proportions.
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
screen vertically,
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
•
When
playing
a
photo
file:
Press
G
to
select
the
previous
file.
Press
g
to
select
proportions.
picture.
picture.
the top and16:9
bottom
of the
picture
may
bevisible
cut
Confirms
selected
items.
screen.
16:9
screen.
•
Confirms
selected
items.
on•As
the
TV.
PC
input
signal.
border
areas
are
visible
on
the
screen.
correct
proportions.
aonresult,
black
14:9*
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
border
areas
are
theDisplays
screen.
16:9 screen.
the
next
file.
original
ratio.the previous
When
playing
a Displays
photo
file:14:9
Press
G to select
file.
Pressa g
to select
• When
playing
photo
file:press
Press
select the p
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
in
border
areas
are
visible
oninF
the
screen.
abroadcasts
result,
black
1•14:9*
Press
/correct
ffile.
toDisplays
select
the
you
tothe
move
to athe
new
position,
then
gG. tohorizontal-to
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
the
al
Displays
the
4:3
picture
inHD
its
Normal
original
the channel
4:3As
picture
inwant
its
When
playing
aproportions.
music/video
file:
Press
tooriginal
pause/start
playback.
Press
and
Full
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
u cannot
select
“Normal”
or
“14:9”
for
signal
the
next
the next
file.
ratio. the original pi
Full
1broadcasts
Stretches
theoriginal
picture
Full
to
fill1
Stretches
format)
in
the
correct
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
format)
broadcasts
in
the
correct
correct
proportions.
As
afill
result,
black
areas
visible
on
the
screen.
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
atSome
theapoint
correct
proportions.
As
a result,
black
•playback.
options
bePress
availabletodepend
14:9*
Displays
14:9
inF
the
size. Side to
bars
are
to broadcasts
fill 2
the
Sideare
bars
shown
to
the
Press
/border
tosize.
select
the
new
position
for
your
channel,
then
press
. where
fproportions.
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
onmay
the
rce pictures.
Full
Stretches
the
Full
1playing
picture
When
playing
aStretches
music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the
Press
and
When
music/video
file:
paus
Full
the2•are
4:3
picture
horizontally
fill
theshown
16:9
screen.
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
thenot
screen
vertically,
ke
broadcasts
in
the
correct
proportions.
* As
Parts
of
the
top
and
bottom
theinput
picture
may
cut
you
want
tocut
resume
playback.
PC
input
signal.
signal.
border
areas
are
visible
on
thebe
screen.
* Parts
of screen.
the topformat)
and
bottom
ofare
thevisible
picture
may
be
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at
the
point
where
border
areas
the
screen.
hold
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
reverse, then
release
correct
proportions.
aon
result,
black
•ofPC
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
on
the
16:9
16:9
screen.
Full
2
Stretches
the
Full
1p
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
original
horizontal-to-ve
proportions.
off.
qk
OPTIONS
off.
you
want
tocut
resume playback.PC input signal.
you want to resume playback.
* Parts of the top and
bottom
thevisible
picture
may
be
border
areasofare
thecannot
screen.
horizontally to fill the
• on
You
“Normal”
orshortcuts
“14:9” fortoHD
signal
ratio.
ratio.
• You cannot select “Normal”
or
for
signal
Press
toHD
display
aselect
listofthat
contains
some
setting menus.
qk“14:9”
OPTIONS
off.
qk
OPTIONS
*
Parts
of
the
top
and
bottom
the
picture
may
be
cut
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
source
pictures.
source
pictures.
theselect
4:3 picture
horizontally
Full
Stretches
thecontains
4:3 picture
horizontally
The listed
options
varythat
depending
on the
current
input
andtocontent.
• Stretches
YouSRP
cannot
“Normal”
or
“14:9”
for
HD
signal
tobox
display
list
to some
setting
menus. a list that contains shortcuts to som
Press
display
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
*Press
Parts
of
the
topa and
bottom
ofAs
theashortcuts
picture
may
cut
* Parts
of
the
top
and
bottom
the
picture
be
cut
correct
proportions.
black
14:9*
Displays
14:9ofoff.
broadcasts
inmay
the
correct
proportions.
As
a result,
black
Full
2
Stretches
the
Fullbe
1 The
picture
Full
2 vary depending
Stretches
1 pict
26
source
ql
Coloured
buttons
to
fillGB
thepictures.
16:9
screen.
to
fillvary
the depending
16:9
screen.
The
listed
options
onresult,
the signal
current
input
and
content.
listed
options
on the
the Full
current
inp
•
You
cannot
select
“Normal”
or
“14:9”
for
HD
off.
Zoom*
boxtheguide
format)
broadcasts
inpicture
the
26of the top
* off.
Parts
and bottom
of
may
be
cut Displays
border
areas
arecinemascopic
visible
on
the(letter
screen.
correct
proportions.
As
acorrect
result,
black
border
areas
arethe
visible
on
the
When
the screen.
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
appears
on theonscreen.
horizontally
toHD
fill
16:9 screen.
horizontally to fill the 1
•
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
the
ql
Coloured
buttons
source
pictures.
ql
Coloured
buttons
•
You
cannot
select
“Normal”
or
“14:9”
for
signal
• You cannot
select “Normal” or “14:9” for HD signalformat) broadcasts in the correct
proportions.
off.
input signal.
w; When
Subtitle
setting
border areas are visible
on–the
screen.
the
coloured
buttons arePC
available,
an operation
guide
appears
the screen.
When
the
coloured
buttons
are available,
operatio
source
pictures.
•onSome
options
may not beanavailable
source pictures.
Stretches the Full 1 pic
horizontally to fill the
Stretches the original p
the screen vertically, ke
original horizontal-to-v
ratio.
Displays the picture in
pixel size. Bars are sho
bottom, and both sides
picture.
PC or HDMI PC Input (PC timing
Returns to the previous channel or input watched (for more than 15
) page.
Press to change the subtitle language (page 27) (in digital mode onl
When the coloured buttons are available, an operation guide appears
Press to display a list that contains shortcuts to some setting menus.
The listed options vary depending on the current input and content.
• Selects or adjusts items.
• Confirms selected items.
• When playing a photo file: Press G to select the previous file. Pre
the next file.
When playing a music/video file: Press
to pause/start the playb
hold G/g to fast forward/fast reverse, then release the button at th
you want to resume playback.
• Displays information. Press once to display information about th
input you are viewing. Press again to remove the display from th
• In Text mode: Reveals hidden information (e.g. answers to a qui
To change the Wide Mode
Normal
Displays the 4:3 picture in its original
Full 1
Stretches the original picture to fill
For TV, Video, Component
or HDMI
size. Side
bars are(except
shown to fill the PC or HDMI PC Input (PC
timing)
the screen
vertically, keeping its
PC input)
16:9 screen.
original horizontal-to-vertical aspect
Normal
Displays the
picture in its original
Wide Zoom* Enlarges the centre portion of the
ratio.
pixel size. Bars are shown at the top,
picture. The
left andthe
right
ofhorizontally
Full
Stretches
4:3edges
picture
both sides
for small
Full 2 bottom, and
Stretches
the Full
1 picture
the picturetoare
to fill the
fillstretched
the 16:9 screen.
picture. horizontally to fill the 16:9 screen.
16:9 screen.
Normal
Full
Enlarges the centre portion of the
picture. The left and right edges of
the picture are stretched to fill the
16:9 screen.
Displays the 4:3 picture in its original
size. Side bars are shown to fill the
16:9 screen.
Stretches the 4:3 picture horizontally
to fill the 16:9 screen.
Wide Zoom*
Normal
Full
For TV, Video, Component or HDMI (except
PC input)
/
wa PROG/CH +/–/
Full 2
Full 1
Normal
– Previous channel
• Selects the next (+) or previous (–) channel.
• In Text mode: Selects the next ( ) or previous (
– Subtitle setting
w;
ql Coloured buttons
– Item select / Enter
F/f/G/g/
– Info / Text reveal
qk OPTIONS
ws
To change the Wide Mode
Using Menu Functions
– Item select / Enter
– Info / Text reveal
qj
/
F/f/G/g/
• Displays information. Press once to display information about the programme/
input you are viewing. Press again to remove the display from the screen.
• In Text mode: Reveals hidden information (e.g. answers to a quiz).
/
qh
qj
qh
• Selects or adjusts items.
• Confirms selected items.
• When playing a photo file: Press G to select the previous file. Press g to select
the next file.
qh
/ – Info
/ Text
reveal
When
playing
a music/video file: Press
to pause/start the playback. Press and
• Displays information.
Press
once to display
information
about
programme/
hold G/g to fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then release
thethe
button
at the point where
input you you
are viewing.
Press again
to remove the display from the screen.
want to resume
playback.
• In Text
mode: Reveals hidden information (e.g. answers to a quiz).
qk OPTIONS
qj F/f/G/g
/ to
– display
Item select
/ Enter
Press
a list that
contains shortcuts to some setting menus.
• Selects The
or adjusts
items.the
listed options
vary
Operating
TVdepending on the current input and content.
• Confirms
selected items.
ql Coloured
buttons
the TV
• When playing a photo file: Press G to select the previous file. PressOperating
g to select
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on the screen.
thew;
next file.– Subtitle setting
When playingtoa change
music/video
file: Press
to pause/start
thedigital
playback.
Press
and
Press
the subtitle
language
(page 27) (in
mode
only).
hold G/g to fast forward/fast reverse, then release the button at the point where
PROG/CH +/–/ /
youwa
want
to
resume
playback.
• Selects the next (+) or previous (–) channel.
qk OPTIONS
•
In
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next ( ) or previous ( ) page.
Press to display a list that contains shortcuts to some setting menus.
ws options
– Previous
channel
The listed
vary depending
on the current input and content.
Returns to the previous channel or input watched (for more than 15 seconds).
When the coloured buttons are available, an operation guide appears on the screen.
ql Coloured buttons
To change the Widew;
Mode – Subtitle setting
Wide Zoom*
Pressor
to HDMI
change (except
the subtitle language (page 27) (in digital mode only).
For TV, Video, Component
PC or HDMI PC Input (PC timing)
wa PROG/CH +/–/ /
PC input)
Full 1
Stretches the original picture to fill
the screen vertically, keeping its
original horizontal-to-vertical aspect
• Some options may not be available depending on the
PCratio.
input signal.
o fill the 16:9 screen.
• Selects the next (+) or previous (–) channel.
Enlarges the• centre
the the next ( Normal
In Textportion
mode:ofSelects
) or previous ( Displays
) page. the picture in its original
pixel size. Bars are shown at the top,
– and
Previous
channel
picture.ws
The left
right edges
of
to thetoprevious
more than
seconds).
and15both
sides for small
the picture Returns
are stretched
fill the channel or input watched (for bottom,
picture.
16:9 screen.
Displays the 4:3 picture in its original
bars are shown
to fill the
Zoom* size. Side Displays
cinemascopic
(letter box
16:9 screen.
format) broadcasts in the correct
proportions.
Stretches the 4:3 picture horizontally
DigitalSet-up
Set-up “Digital Tuning”
Digital
“Digital Tuning”
qh Tuning”:
/ – Info / Text reveal
“Digital
Auto
• “Digital• Auto
Tuning”:
•
Displays
information.
Press once to display information about the programme/
Tunes
in
the
available
digital
channels.
Podešavanje dostupnih digitalnih
kanala.
input you are viewing. Press again to remove the display from the screen.
TV buttons and indicators
Thisomogućava
option allows
you
to
retune
the
afterinformation
movingili
house,
or tonove
search
for new
Ova opcija vam
da
ponovo
podesite
TV
posle
selidbe
da
tražite
koje su
• In Text mode: RevealsTV
hidden
(e.g.
answers
to kanale
a quiz).
channels
thatF
have
been
launched
byselect
broadcasters.
Press .
lansirali
prenosnici
signala.
Pritisnite
.
qj
/
f
/
G
/
g
/
–
Item
/
Enter
1 1 – Power
“Programme
Edit”:
Selects
orto
adjusts
items.
Pressqh
to• turn
on •or
to switch
standby
mode.
/ the
–TV
Info
/ List
Text
reveal
• “Programme
List
Edit”:
•TV
Confirms
selected
items.
Removes
any
unwanted
digital
channels
stored
on the TV,
the order of
Displays the
information.
Press
once
to display
information
aboutand
thechanges
programme/
• To•disconnect
from the
AC
power
Obrišite sve the
neželjene
digitalne
kanale
sačuvane
TV-u
i promenite
redosled
digitalnih
kanala
• viewing.
When
playing
athe
photo
file:
Press
Gdisplay
to select
the the
previous
file. Press
g to select
input
you
are
Press
again
to na
remove
the
from
screen.
digital
stored
TV.
completely,
pullchannels
the
plug
from
theon
AC
power
the next hidden
file. information (e.g. answers to a quiz).
sačuvanihoutlet.
na
• TV-u.
In Text mode: Reveals
1 Press F/f to select
the
channel
you
want
to
remove
or
move
to
a
new
position.
When
a/music/video
Press
tona
pause/start
the playback. Press and
1 Pritisnite
koji
želite
da obrišetefile:
ili prebacite
novo mesto.
qj F/f/za
G/odabir
gnumber
/ –kanala
Item playing
select
Enter
buttons
enter
the known
three-digit
programme
number
ofpoint
the where
hold
G/g totofast
forward/fast
reverse,
then release
the button
at the
+/–/
/ the
qh 2
/ CH
– Info
Text
reveal
•/Press
Selects
or adjusts
items.
Pritisnite
brojčane
tipke
za unos
poznatog
trocifrenog
broja
programa
željenog
kanala.
you items.
want
to channel.
resume
playback.
•Text
Selects
the
next (+)
or want.
previous
(–)
broadcast
you
• 2Displays
information.
Press
once
to
display
information
about
the
programme/
•
Confirms
selected
qh
/ – Info
/Obrišite
reveal
ilimenu:
promenite
redosled
digitalnih
kanala
na
sledeći
način:
• you
In TV
Moves
through
the
options
)select
or programme/
qk
OPTIONS
input
are
viewing.
Press
tofile:
remove
the
from
the screen.
• Remove
When
playing
aagain
photo
Press
G( display
to
the previous
file. Press g to select
• Displays information.
once
to
display
information
about
the
2Press
or
change
the
order
ofup
the
digital
channels
as follows:
down
(Press
). next
Za
brisanje
digitalnog
kanala
Press
to the
display
a(e.g.
listfrom
thatthe
contains
shortcuts to some setting menus.
• are
In Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
answers
to a quiz).
the
file.
input you
viewing.
again
to
remove
display
screen.
To
remove
the
digital
channel
qha /music/video
/ options
–zaInfo
/toPress
Text
reveal
The
listed
vary
on the
input“Yes”,
and
content.
Pritisnite
.–When
se
pojavi
poruka
potvrdu,
pritisnite
dacurrent
odaberete
zatim
playing
file:
to pause/start
the playback.
Press
and pritisnite
• In Text
Reveals
(e.g.
answers
a depending
quiz).
F3
G
qj mode:
/f/2
/g
/ hidden
Iteminformation
select
Enter
+/–/
/Pošto
Press
.ql
After
aforward/fast
message
press
G toatselect
“Yes”,
then press
•confirmation
Displays
information.
Press
once
tobutton
display
information
about
the programme/
Coloured
buttons
hold
G/g
to fast
reverse,
thenappears,
release
the
the
point
where
or adjusts
items.
qj F/f/G/g• / Selects
–• Item
select
/orEnter
Increases
(+)
decreases
(–)
the
volume.
input
you arebuttons
viewing.
Press
againan
tooperation
remove the
display
fromonthe
. want
When
coloured
are
available,
guide
appears
thescreen.
screen.
you
to through
resumethe
playback.
• Za
Confirms
selected
items.
• Selects or
adjusts
•promenu
Initems.
TV
menu:
Moves
the
options
right
(
)
redosleda
digitalnih
•–
Into
Text
mode:
Revealschannels
hidden
information
(e.g. answers to a quiz).
To
change
order
ofkanala
the
• selected
Whenor
playing
a ).photo
file:the
Press
G
select
thedigital
previous
file. Press
g to select
w;
Subtitle
setting
qk
OPTIONS
• Confirms
items.
left
(
Pritisnite
,
zatim
pritisnite
za
odabir
novog
položaja
za
kanal
i
pritisnite
.
Fto/that
fchange
qj
/G
/gselect
/the subtitle
–the
Item
select
/(page
Enter
the next
file.Press
language
27)
(in digitaland
mode
only).
togdisplay
a list
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
F
G.
, then
press
/f
to
new
position
for the
channel
press
Press
• When playing
a photo
file:
Press
G toPress
select
the
previous
file.
Press
g
to select
qh
/ – Info /
• Press
Selects
ortoadjusts
4
/ –The
Input
select
/ vary
Enter
3When
Pritisnite
RETURN.
playing
a music/video
file:
pause/start
the playback.
and
listed
options
depending
on
current
input andPress
content.
the next file.
wa PROG/CH
+/–/
/ theitems.
3
Press
RETURN.
• Displays info
•to Confirms
selected
items.
•a G/g
Displays
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
fastthe
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
button
at
point where
When playing
music/video
file:
Press
pause/start
the
Press
and
qltoManual
Coloured
buttons
• Selects
the
next
(+)playback.
ortheprevious
(–)the
channel.
•hold
“Digital
Tuning”:
input
you are
playing
a photo
file:
Gprevious
to appears
select(the
file. Press g
to select
• When
“Digital
Manual
Tuning”:
the input
source
(page
13).
you
to
resume
playback.
hold G/g to
fastwant
forward/fast
reverse,
release
button
at/the
the
point
where
qhWhen
/the
–Selects
Info
Text
reveal
•then
In•buttons
Text
mode:
next
(Press
) or
)previous
page.
the
coloured
are
available,
an
operation
guide
on
the screen.
Ručno
podešavanje
digitalnih
kanala.
• In Text mode
the•or
next
file. and
• Inw;
TV
menu:
Selects
thesetting
menu
option,
Tunes
thews
digital
channels
manually.
you qk
wantOPTIONS
to resume
playback.
Displays
information. Press once to display information about the programm
–
Previous
channel
–
Subtitle
1 Pritisnite
brojčanu
tipku
za odabir
kanala
koji
želitePress
ručno
da podesite,
zatim
pritisnite
Whenbroja
playing
aare
music/video
file:
Press
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
qj
/f
/screen.
Fthe
G/and
g/
display
a the
listtosetting.
that
contains
shortcuts
to you
some
setting
input
viewing.
again
toto
remove
the display
from
OPTIONSPress to confirms
Returns
to the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for to
more
15tune,
seconds).
change
the button
subtitle
language
(page
27)menus.
(innumber
digital
mode
only).
Press
the
number
to
select
the
channel
you
manually
1Press
hold
G/g
to fast
forward/fast
reverse,
thenwant
release
thethan
button
at
the
point
where
buttonsqkand
indicators
•
Selects
or adj
da
podesite
kanal.
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
•
In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
a
quiz).
Press to display
thatPROG/CH
contains
shortcuts
some
menus.playback.
5 a listwa
/f toto/tune
thesetting
channel.
F+/–/
then
press
you
want
to resume
• Confirms sele
2 Kad
su dostupni
kanali
pronađeni,
pritisnite
zaItem
memorisanje
programa.
Ponovite postupak
The listed
options
vary
depending
on
the
current
input
and
content.
ql
Coloured
buttons
qj
F
/
f
/
G
/
g
/
–
select
/
Enter
Displays
or
cancels
the
menu.
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
1 1the
–the
Power
To change
Wide
Mode
• When playing
qk
OPTIONS
the available
channels
areorfound,
press
to store
programmes.
2•When
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
the screen.
Selects
adjusts
items.
ql ColouredWhen
buttons
prikazan
iznad
ručno
podešavanje
drugih
kanala.
Inza
Text
mode:
Selects
next
(mode.
) or
previous
( on
) page.
Press
to–turn
the
TV
on
orabove
to
switch
to•the
standby
Press
to
display
a selected
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to some setting menus. the next file.
6
Remote
sensor
/ Light
sensor
Repeat
the
procedure
to
manually
tune
other
channels.
•
Confirms
items.
WhenTV,
theVideo,
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
w;
–••Subtitle
setting
For
Component
or
HDMI
(except
– Previous
channel
Nije
dostupno
zaTV
kablovsku
vezu.
PC
or HDMIon
PC
(PC
timing)
Whengplaying
Tows
disconnect
the
from
the
AC
power
The
listed
options vary
theGInput
current
input
content.
IR
from
the
remote.
• When
a depending
photo
Press
to 15
select
theand
previous
file. Press
to sele
• signals
Not
for
Cable
connection.
Press Receives
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)orplaying
(ininput
digital
mode file:
only).
w; PC input)
– Subtitle
setting
Returns
toavailable
theplug
previous
channel
watched
(for
more
than
seconds).
hold G/g to f
completely,
pull
the
from
the
AC
ql
Coloured
buttons
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
thepower
screen
the
next
file.
“Subtitle
Set-up”
Press to
theoutlet.
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
wachange
PROG/CH
+/–/
/
you
want
toar
“Subtitle
Set-up”
When
the
coloured
buttons
are available,Displays
an operation
guide appears
on the screen.
brightness
accordingly.
Do not
anything
over
the
the
picture
in its
Wide Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
ofput
the
When
playing
aOf
music/video
to pomoć
pause/start
theoriginal
playback.
Press
• •+/–/
Selects
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
“Subtitle
Setting”:
Kad
je odabrano
“For
Hard Normal
Hearing”, file:
nekaPress
vizuelna
takođe
wa the
PROG/CH
/the•doing
qk
OPTIONS
sensor,
so
may
affect
its
function.
To change
Wide
Mode
w;
–
Subtitle
setting
“Subtitle
Setting”:
When
“For
Hard
Of
Hearing”
is
selected,
some
visual
aids
may
hold
G/g (to fast
forward/fast reverse,
theshown
buttonatatthe
thetop,
point whe
pixel then
size. release
Bars are
picture.
The
leftsa
and
right( edges
• CH
In
Text
mode:
Selects
the
next
) orof
previous
) page.
2the
+/–/
/ previous
• Selects
next
(+)
or
(–)
channel.
može
biti
prikazana
titlovima
(ako
TV
kanal
takve
informacije).
Press to display
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27) such
(in
modefor
only).
you
want
toemituje
resume
playback.
also
be
displayed
with
the
subtitles
(if
TV channels
broadcast
information).
bottom,
anddigital
both
sides
small
the
are
stretched
to
fill
the
7
/orpicture
–the
Picture
Off
/
Timer
indicator
•• –“Primary
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
• InComponent
Text
Selects
next
(
)
or
previous
(
)
page.
ws mode:
Previous
channel
For TV, Video,
HDMI
(except
The
listed
optio
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
Preferred Language”:
Odabir
željenog
titla.
wa
PROG/CH
/morejezika
qk
OPTIONS
• InLights
TV
through
the
options
up +/–/
( (for
) or
inMoves
greenchannel
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
“Primary
Preferred
Language”:
Selects
preferred
language
are Coloured bu
Returns
to menu:
the•up
previous
or
input
watched
than
15 seconds).
picture. which subtitles ql
ws
– Previous
channel
16:9
screen.
PC input)
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
•
“Secondary
Preferred
Language”:
Odabir
drugog
preferiranog
jezika
titla.
Press
to
display
a
list
that
contains
shortcuts
to
some
setting
menus.
down
).displayed
(page( 30).
Returns to the previous
channel
or input
(for more
than
15 seconds).
in. watched The
When the colou
Text
mode:options
Selects
the next
(the)picture
oronprevious
(original
) page.and content.
listed
vary
depending
theincurrent
input
Normal
itsthe
Displays
the of
4:3the
picture in• itsInoriginal
Wide Zoom* Normal
Enlarges“Audio
the centre
portion
FullDisplays
1
Stretches
original which
picture
Set-up”
nge the Wide Modepicture.
•
“Secondary
Preferred
Language”:
Selects
preferred
language
w; to fill
– Subtitle
3 The
2 +/–/
/
8
1
–
Standby
indicator
ws to
– Coloured
Previous
channel
qlfill
buttons
pixelsecondary
size. Barsthe
arescreen
shownvertically,
at the top,keeping
size.
Side
bars
areofshown
the
left
and
right
edges
its on
Type”:
Prebacuje
na
emitovanje
za
osobechannel
sa oštećenim
sluhom
kada
jemore
izabrano
“For
Press
tothe
change
•• “Audio
Increases
(+)
(–)
the
Lights up
inor
reddecreases
when
the
TV
is volume.
in
standby
mode.
Wide
Mode
subtitles
are
displayed
in.
Returns
to
the
previous
or
input
watched
(for
than
15
seconds).
When
the
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
scree
Video, Componentthe
orpicture
HDMI
(except
sides horizontal-to-vertical
for small
16:9
screen.
are
stretched
to fill the
PC or the
HDMI
PCright
Input
(PC bottom,
timing)and both
•Hard
In
TV
menu:
Moves
through
options
(
)
original
aspect
wa
PROG/CH
+/–
Of
Hearing”.
w;
–
Subtitle
setting
9
"
–
Power
indicator
omponent or HDMI
(except
picture.
ut)
“Audio
Set-up”
16:9 screen.or left ( PC
).Preferred
or HDMI
PC Input
(PC
timing)
• only).
Selects the ne
ratio.
Press
to change
language
(page
(in digital
mode
• “Primary
Language”:
željenog
jezika programa.
Neki27)
digitalni
kanali
mogu
• the
Lights
up inMode
green when
the TV
isOdabir
turned
on. the subtitle
To change
Wide
• In Text mode
• “Audio
Type”:
Switches
toDisplays
broadcast
impaired when “For Hard Of
Normal
thefor
picture
in its original
oom*Normal
Enlarges the
centre
portion
ofStretches
the
Full
the
picture
horizontally
Displays
the•/4:3
picture
in
its4:3
original
4
–
Input
select
/ jezika
Enter
PROG/CH
+/–/
/ the hearing
Flashes
while
the
remote
iswaza
being
operated.
emitovati
nekoliko
audio
jedan
Full
1program.
Stretches
the original
picture
to fill
ws
– Previou
For
TV,
Video,
Component
or
HDMI
(except
Hearing”
is
selected.
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
its
original
Full
2
Stretches
the
Full
1
picture
nlarges the
centreThe
portion
of
the
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
at
the
top,
picture.
left
and
right
edges
of
•
Displays
the
connected
equipment
list
and
selects
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
PC
or
HDMI
PC
Input
(PC
timing)
size. Side• bars
are shownPreferred
to fill the Language”: Odabir drugogthe
“Secondary
preferiranog
jezikakeeping
programa.
Neki digtalni
screen
vertically,
Returns to the p
thefillinput
source
(page Preferred
13). pixelLanguage”:
•size.
In Text
Selects
the
next
( horizontally
) or previous
( for
) page.
input)
Bars mode:
areSelects
shown
the
top,
to its
fill
the
16:9 screen.
icture. The
and right
edges
of to
•
“Primary
the
preferred
language
used
a
bottom,
and
bothat
sides
for small
theleft
picture
arePC
stretched
the
16:9
screen.
mogu
emitovati
nekoliko
audio
jezika
zabefore
jedanoriginal
program.
aspectfor a
Make
sure
that the the
TV
is completely
off
•kanali
In• TV
menu:
Selects
menu
or
option,
and
ws
–turned
Previous
bottom,
both
sides
for
small horizontal-to-vertical
programme.
Some
digital
channels
maychannel
broadcast
several audio
languages
he picture16:9
are stretched
fill the
picture.
screen. toWide
Normal
Displays
the TV
picture
in its
original
Zoom*
Enlarges
portion
ofand
the
• “Audio
Description”:
Pruža
audio
opis
(naraciju)
informacija
ukoliko
kanal
emi
unplugging
thethe
ACcentre
power
cord.
Unplugging
theprevious
AC vizuelnih
confirms
the setting.
ratio.
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
Returns
to
the
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
than
15- seconds).
programme.
picture.
6:9 screen.
pixel size. Bars are shown at the top,
picture.
The left
andisright
edges
of cause the
power
cord
while
the TV
turned
on may
4:3
picture
in
its
original
FullDisplays the
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
tuje
takve
informacije.
Zoom*5
Displays
cinemascopic
box
FullPreferred
Stretches
original
to fill
indicator
to
remain
or1(letter
may cause
the
to the
• “Secondary
Language”:
Selects
thepicture
secondary
preferred
For
TV,
Component
orused
HDMI
(except
andlanguage
both sides
for small
the
picture
arelitstretched
to fill
the2TVglavnog
Displays the
4:3Side
picture
its
original
Full
Stretches
theiVideo,
Full
1bottom,
picture
size.
barsintoare
to fill
the
fillshown
theDisplays
16:9
screen.
•change
“Mixing
Level”:
Podešava
izlazne
nivoe
zvuka
„Audio
Description“.
format)
broadcasts
in the Stretches
correct
orthe
cancels
the
menu.
Full
1programme.
the
original
picture
toTV-a
fill
To
Wide
Mode
malfunction.
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
for
a
Some
digital
channels
may
broadcast
several
audio
languages
for a on the
PC
input)
•
Some
options
maythe
not16:9
be available
depending
picture.
16:9
screen.
ze. Side bars
shown to fill the
horizontally
to
fill
screen.
16:9are
screen.
z •• Ova
The
CH
+
button
has
a
tactile
dot.
Use
it
as
a
opcija
je dostupna samo
kad jeoriginal
“Audiohorizontal-to-vertical
Description”
na “On”.
proportions.
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
aspect
PCits
inputpodešen
signal.
programme.
6
– Remote
sensor
/ Light
For TV,
Video,
Component
orsensor
HDMI
(except
reference
when
operating
the
TV.
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
centre
portion of the
PC
or
HDMI PC
Inputthe(PC
timing)
6:9 screen.
NormalReceives
Displays
the
4:3the
picture
in itsMPEG
original
• “MPEG
Audio
Level”:
Podešava
nivo audioFull
zvuka.
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
ratio.
IR
signals
from
remote.
1
Stretches
theinformation
original picture
to fill
•
“Audio
Description”:
Provides
audio
description
(narration)
ofpicture.
visual
if edges
PC input) size. Side bars are shown to fill the
The left and right
of
Senses
room
light
level
and
adjusts
the
screen
Stretches
the
4:3
picture
horizontally
ratio.
the screen vertically, keeping its
TV
channels
broadcast
such
information.
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in
the
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in
its
original
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
brightness
accordingly.
Do
not
put
anything
over
the
16:9
screen.
Full
2
Stretches
the
Full
1
picture
tretches the
4:3the
picture
to fill
16:9horizontally
screen. broadcasts in the correct
original horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
format)
• Full
“Mixing
Level”:
Adjusts
the
TV
audio
and
Audio
Description
output
levels.
proportions.
As
afunction.
result,
black
sensor,correct
doing
sopicture.
may
its
pixel
size.
Bars
are shown at the to
16:9
screen.
The
left
and right
2 affect
Stretches
the
Fullofmain
1options
picture
•edges
Some
not16:9
be
available
on the
horizontally
to may
fill the
screen. depending
proportions. border
z areas
•the
This
option
only
when
“Audio
is set ratio.
to “On”.
are
visible
theavailable
screen.
PC
input
signal.
bottom,the
and4:3
both
sidesinfor
picture
areison
stretched
to fill
the
horizontally
to
fill
the
16:9Description”
screen.
/ – Picture
Off
/4:3
Timer
indicator
Normal
Displays
picture
itssmall
origina
Full7
Stretches
theAudio
picture
horizontally
•
“MPEG
Level”:
Adjusts
the
MPEG
audio
sound
level.
picture.
16:9
screen.
Lights up in
green
when
you
select
“Picture
Off”
Full
2
Stretches
the
Full
1
picture
size.
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill the
to fill the 16:9 screen.
Displays cinemascopic
(letter
box
(page
30).
14:9*
Displays
14:9 broadcasts
in the the 4:3 picture in its original
horizontally
to fill the 16:9 screen.
16:9
screen.
Normal
Displays
Full 1
Stretches
the original picture to fill
* Parts
ofin
the
top
and bottom
of theblack
picture may be cut
Displays cinemascopic
(letter
box
format) broadcasts
the
correct
correct
proportions.
As asize.
result,
8
1
–
Standby
indicator
•
Some
options
may
not
be
available
depending
on
the
Side
bars
are
shown
to
fill
the
off.correct
the
screen
vertically, keeping its
ormat) broadcasts
in the
proportions.
Lights
up
in“Normal”
redon
when
the
TV PC
is
standby
input
signal.
areas
are
visible
• the
Some
options
may
not
be mode.
available depending
on the
16:9
screen.
•border
You cannot
select
orscreen.
“14:9”
forin
HD
signal
Full
Stretches
4:3 picture horizontally
originalthe
horizontal-to-vertical
aspe
roportions.
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
PC
input
signal.
source
9 "pictures.
– Power indicator
toratio.
fill the 16:9 screen.
broadcasts
inTV
theiscorrect
• Lights
in green
whenthe
the4:3
turned
on.
Displays 14:9 broadcasts
in the upformat)
• Some options may not be available depending on the
Full
Stretches
picture
horizontally
proportions.
Flashes
while
the
* Parts
of
the
top and
bottom
of the black
picture
mayremote
be cut is being operated.
PC input
Displays
14:9
broadcasts
in the
correct
proportions.
As•a result,
Full
2 signal. Stretches the Full 1 picture
to
fill
the
16:9
screen.
off.border areas
orrect proportions.
As aare
result,
black
visible
on the screen.
horizontally to fill the 16:9 screen.
• You cannot select “Normal” or “14:9” for HD signal
Zoom*
Displays cinemascopic (letter box
order areas source
are visible
on14:9*
the screen.
• Make sure
that the TV
completely turned
Displays
14:9is broadcasts
in the off before
pictures.
format) broadcasts in the correct
unplugging
the AC
power cord.
the AC
correct
proportions.
AsUnplugging
a result, black
power
cord
while
the TVcinemascopic
is turned on may
cause
proportions.
Zoom*
Displays
(letter
boxthe
the top and bottom of the picture
may
be
cut
border
areas
are
visible
on
the
screen.
indicator to remain lit or may cause the TV to
d bottom of the picture may be cutmalfunction. format) broadcasts in the correct
• Some options may not be available depending on t
u cannot select “Normal” or “14:9”
HDCH
signal
Continued
proportions.
z • for
The
+ button
has a tactile dot. Use it as a
signal.
14:9* PC inputNastavlja
Displaysse
14:9 broadcasts
in the
rce
ect pictures.
“Normal” or “14:9” for HD signalreference when operating the TV.
27AsSRP
* Parts of the top and bottom of the picture may be cut
GB
correct proportions.
a result, black
.
27
border areas are visible on the screen
14:9*
Displays 14:9 broadcasts in the
10 GB off.
• You cannot select “Normal” or “14:9” for HD signal
correct proportions. As a result, black GB
f the TV buttons and
“Technical Set-up”
• “Auto Service Update”: Omogućava TV prijemniku da pronađe i memoriše nove
digitalne usluge kad postanu dostupne.
• “System Update”: Ovaj TV prijemnik može da prima nadogradnju softvera
“Technical
Set-up”signala. Kako bi primio nadogradnju, opcija „System Update“
putem emitovanog
• “Auto
Service
Update”:
Enables
thebude
TV to
detect and
services as
u meniju
„Technical
Setup“
treba da
podešena
na store
“On”.new
Kaddigital
se nadogradnja
they
become
available.
pronađe
korisnik
će biti informisan nizom prikaza na ekranu o tome kako da nastavi
• “System
Update”:Molimo
This TVnemojte
set is capable
of receiving
upgrades
via the
sa nadogradnjom.
odspajati
prijemnik software
iz struje dok
traje proces
broadcast
signal. In order to receive upgrades the System Update option in the
instaliranja.
Technical
menu should
be set totrenutnu
“On”. When
ansoftvera
upgradei is
detected
the user
• “SystemSetup
Information”:
Prikazuje
verziju
nivo
signala.
will
be informed
a series da
of on
screen
displays on
how to
proceed sa
with
the upgrade.
• “Auto
DST”: by
Podešava
li da
se automatski
vreme
prebacuje
letnjeg
na zimPlease
do not disconnect the set from the mains during the installation procedure.
sko i obrnuto.
• “System
Information”:
Displays
the current
software
version
and theprema
signalkalenlevel.
indicators
“On”: Automatski
prebacuje
sa letnjeg
vremena
na zimsko
i obrnuto
• “Auto
DST”: Sets whether or not to automatically switch between summer time and
daru.
1 winter
1 – Power
time.
“Off”:
Vreme
je TV
prikazano
razlici podešenoj po “Time Zone”.
Press to
turn the
on or toprema
switch vremenskoj
to standby mode.
“On”:• •Automatically
switches
summermožda
time and
winter
time according
to the
To
disconnect
the
TV
frombetween
theova
ACfunkcija
power
Kad
je odabrano
“Cable”
neće
biti dostupna
u nekim
calendar.
completely, pull the plug from the AC power
zemljama.
“Off”: outlet.
The time is displayed according to the time difference set by “Time Zone”.
• •“Service
Replacement”:
Odabirom
“On”
kanal kada prenosWhen “Cable”
is selected this
function may
notautomatski
be availableseinmenja
some countries.
nik
promeni
prenosSelect
gledanog
na drugichange
kanal. the channel when
2
CHsignala
+/–/Replacement”:
/
• “Service
“On”programa
to automatically
• Selects the
next (+)transmission
or previous (–)
channel.
broadcaster
changes
of the
viewing programme to a different channel.
• In TV menu: Moves through the options up ( ) or
down (
3 2 +/–/
Parental Lock
).
/
• Increases (+) or decreases (–) the volume.
• In TV menu: Moves through the options right (
or left ( ).
)
Omogućava
podešenje
TV-achannel
tako da or
blokirate
ili spoljni
Koristite
Allows
you tovam
set up
TV to block
externalprogram
input. Use
0-9 on ulaz.
the remote
to
4
brojeve
od–0 Input
do 9PIN
naselect
daljinskom
upravljaču za unos četvorocifrenog PIN koda.
enter
a /four-digit
code. / Enter
Change PIN Code
Izaberite
za
promenu
vašeg
PIN koda.
Selects
change
your(page
PIN 13).
code.
thetoinput
source
28 SRP
• Displays the connected equipment list and selects
Operating the TV
PIN Code
Viewing pictures from the connected equ
Viewing
pictures
Locks
an gledanja
external input
from
beingfrom
watched. the connected equipment
Blokiranje
spoljnog
ulaza.
Turn on the connected equipment, then press
/
to display the connec
view a blocked
external
input,
select
“Unblocked”.
ZaTogledanje
blokiranog
spoljnog
ulaza,
izaberite
“Unblocked”. . (The highlighted item is selected if
theequipment,
desired input
Turn on the connected
thensource,
press then/ press
to display the connected equipment list. P
F/privremeno
f. .)(The
pressing
When
the
input item
source
is set Lock”
to “Skip”
in thepass
“Video
L
• • Unos
Entering
the correct
fordesired
blockedprogram
channel
oriliafter
external
input
will
temporarily
deactivates
the funkciju
“Parental
tačnog
PIN PIN
kodacode
zathe
blokirani
spoljni
ulaz
će
deaktivirati
input source,
then
press
highlighted
is selected
if 2feature.
seconds
witho
To reactivate
the “Parental
Lock”
settings,
off
on
the
(page
29),
thatLock”,
input
is
greyed
in the
after
pressingturn
/f
.) and
When
theTV.
input
source
is
set toout
“Skip”
inlist.
the
“Video Labels” under the “AV
F
“Parental
Lock”.
Za ponovnu
aktivaciju
podešenja
“Parental
isključite
i
uključite
TV.
Viewing
the connected equipment
z • If you lost your PIN code, see
page 29),
35.
that
input35.
is pictures
greyed out in thefrom
list.
• Ako izgubite vaš PIN kod,(page
pogledajte
stranu
z • Press
/ on the TV to display the connected equipment list and select th
Turn on/the on
connected
then
press
/ list
to
display
the
equipmen
to selectthe
theconnected
desired
input
source.
Then
for
2 connected
seconds
display
the
z • Press
the TVF/f
toequipment,
display
equipment
andwait
select
the
desired to
input
source.
the todesired
input
source,
press
. (The
is the
selected
if 2input
seconds
pa
F/f
select the
desired
inputthen
source.
Then wait
forhighlighted
2 seconds to item
display
selected
source.
Set-up
Podešavanje
after pressingJacks/
to “Skip” in the “Video Labels” under
F/f.) When the input source is set
Description
input is greyed
out in the list.
Jacks/ (page 29), thatInput
Description
symbol
on screen
Automatski
prikazuje
listu
poslednje
reprodukovane
fotografije/muzike/video
snUSB Auto Start
Automatically
enters
the
thumbnail
view
of
the last
Photo/Music/Video
Input symbol
on screen
z • Press
on theIN
TV1toordisplay
theplayed
connected
equipment
list
andwhen
select1the
the
desired
input
A/ HDMI
2source.
Connect
to
the
HDMI
orselected
2 jackinput
if
thes
imka
se TV
aselect
USB
uređaj
spoji
na USB
priključnicu,
zatim
uključi.
TV
is kad
turned
onuključi
and
device
is
connected
to the
USB
turned
on. IN the
F/f atoUSB
the desired
input
Then
waitaport
for
2then
seconds
to display
A HDMI IN 1 or 2
Connect to the HDMIdigital
IN 1 or
2 jack
the equipment
an H
video
andifaudio
signals arehas
input
fr
Podesite
vreme
minutama
(“Off”,
“15”,
“30”,
“45”, “60”,
“90”,
koliko
Sleep Timer
Set
the time
in uminutes
(“Off”,
“15”,
“30”,
“60”,
“90”,
or“120”),
“120”)
that
you
would
HDMI
1 or“45”,
digital
video
and audio
signals
are
inputyou
from
the equipment.
In ili
addition,
when
connect
the equipm
Jacks/
Description
želite
TVHDMI
ostane
uključen
pre nego
što
isključi.
1
oron before
like
thedaTV
to
remain
shutting
off automatically.
HDMI
2automatski
Inseaddition,
when
youHDMI,
connect
the equipmentwith
that the
is compatibl
communication
connected
Input
symbol
on screen
HDMI
2
HDMI,
communication
the
connected
equipment
is suppo
set with
up
this
communication.
Pokretanje
postupka
početnog
podešavanja
(str.
6).
Ova
opcija
vam
omogućava
da the
ponovo
Auto Start-up
Starts the initial set-up procedure (page 6). This option
allows
you
to retune
TV
after
set up
this
communication.
the
equipment
a DVI
connecth
A
HDMI
IN ili
1 or
2new nove
Connect
theIfHDMI
IN 1bysignala.
orbroadcasters.
2has
jack
if thejack,
equipment
podesitehouse,
TV
posle
da
kanale
koje
sutolansirali
prenosnici
moving
or selidbe
to search
fortražite
channels
that
have
been
launched
If the equipment
hasand
a DVI
jack,
connect
DVI
jack
to equip
the H(
through
a DVI
- HDMI
adaptor
interface
digital video
audio
signals
arethe
input
from
the
Izbor jezika
prikaza HDMI
menija.
Language
Selects
the language
in which
areInadisplayed.
1 orthe menus
through
DVI - HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied),
and
co
equipment’s
audiothe
out
jack
to thethat
PC/HDM
addition,
when
you connect
equipment
is com
HDMI
Izaberite
“On”
reprodukciju
zvuka
TVturned
uključen.
Izaberite
“Off”
za
isključenje.
equipment’s
audio
out
jack
to to
the
PC/HDMI
AUDIO
jackis
(the
PC/HDMI
1 AUDIO
jack
isINused
HDMI,
communication
with
the
connected
equipment
Start-up Sound
Select
“On”
tozaplay
sound2when
thekad
TVje is
on.
Select
“Off”
disable
it. 1 IN
(the PC/HDMI
1/ AUDIO
IN
jackINis
as the audio in jack f
qh
/ – Info / Text reveal
–and
Info
/ Text
reveal
HDMI
1used
jacks).
setqhup this
communication.
AV Set-up
“Video
Labels”
“Video
• Displays
information.
Press
display
information
about
the
programme/
Press
once
display
qhLabels”
/ – Info
/ Text reveal
qhIftothe
/•equipment
–jacks).
Info
/information.
reveal
andonce
HDMI
IN
1Displays
has
a DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
jack
•Text
The
HDMI
jacks
only to
support
theinform
follow
Dodeljujea naziv
opremi
spojenoj
na priključnice
sa
strane
i pozadi.
Naziv
će
biti
prikazan
are
viewing.
Pressonce
remove
the
from
screen.
input
you
are
viewing.
Press
again
to
remove
the d
Assigns
name
to you
anyinformation.
equipment
connected
the
side
and
rear
jacks.
The
name
will
• input
Displays
Press
to•to
display
information
about
the
programme/
720p,
1080i,
1080p
and
1080/24p.
Displays
information.
Press
once
tona
display
informatio
•again
The
HDMI
only
support
the
following
video
inputs:
480i,
through
ajacks
DVI
- display
HDMI
adaptor
interface
(not
supplied)
kratko
na ekranu
kadyou
se
oprema
izabere.
• In
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
to
aPress
quiz).
• Inyou
Text
mode:
Reveals
hidden
(e.g.
ani
input
are
Press
again
toinput
remove
display
from
the
screen.
are
again
to
remove
the
disp
•viewing.
The
HDMI
jacks
caninformation
support
PCAUDIO
timing
be
displayed
briefly
on
theviewing.
screen
when
the
equipment
isthe
selected.
720p,
1080i,
1080p
and
1080/24p.
equipment’s
audio
out
jack
to
the
PC/HDMI
1
Pritisnite
odabir
izvora,
zatim
pritisnite
.– Item
•f/In
Reveals
hidden
information
(e.g.
answers
toPC
ahidden
quiz).
•HDMI
InFText
mode:
Reveals
information
(e.g.
answe
PC
input
signal.
f
G
qjF/F
/za
/gmode:
/ theželjenog
–desired
Itemulaznog
select
/The
Enter
g
qj
/f
/G
/can
/support
select
/ Enter
•source,
jacks
timing
in
HDMI
PC
mode.
See
11 Press
toText
select
input
then
press
.
(the
PC/HDMI
1 .•AUDIO
IN
jack is used
as the audio in
or/ adjusts
items.
• /signal.
Selects
adjusts
items.
Be sure
to use only
an authorized HDM
2 Pritisnite
željene
opcije
ispod,
zatim
pritisnite
f
Godabir
qj •F/Selects
/za
/g
– Item
select
/qj
Enter
PC
input
/f
/g/ or–
Item
select
/ Enter
F
Gpress
Press opreme:
toKoristi
select
the
desired
option below,
then
. authorized
2Oznake
F/•fConfirms
and
HDMI
1 an
jacks).
recommend
that you
usebearing
a Sonythe
HDMI
items.
•to
Confirms
selected
items.
Selects
or selected
adjusts
• za
Selects
or
adjusts
items.
jednu
oditems.
podešenih •oznaka
dodelu
naziva
spojenoj
opremi.
Be
sure
useIN
only
HDMI
cable
HDM
Equipment
labels:
Uses
one
of file:
the
preset
to3that
assign
ause
name
tosupport
connected
The
HDMI
jacks
the
video
inpu
• When
playing
aoznaku.
photo
Press
Glabels
theyou
previous
file.
Press
tofollowing
select
playing
photo
file: g
Press
G
to select
the
pr
Confirms
selected
items.
recommend
aaonly
Sony
HDMI
cable
(high
speed
type)
• to•Confirms
selected
items.
“Edit”:
Pravi
vašu
sopstvenu
Pratite
korake
2•select
doWhen
koraka
“Label”
(str.
26).
720p,
1080i,
1080p
and
1080/24p.
DIGITAL
OUT
Use
an
optical
audio
next
file.Baulazne
theplaying
next
file.
• the
When
playing
photoizvore.
file:AUDIO
Press G• to
select
the
previous
file.
Press
gcable.
to
select
equipment.
When
a photo
file:
Press
G to
select the previo
“Skip”:
Preskače
nepotrebne
•the
jacks can
support
timing
in HDMI
mo
When
playing
a(OPTICAL)
music/video
Press
to
pause/start
playback.
Press
and
When
playing
athe
music/video
Press
to PC
pause
the next
file.own
B DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
Usefile:
ansteps
optical
audio
cable.
next
file.
“Edit”:
Creates
your
label. Follow
2The
to
3HDMI
of
“Label”
(page
26).PC file:
PC
input
signal.
hold
G/g
to fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
the
button
at thefile:
point
where
hold
G/g
toa fast
forward/fast
reverse,
then
release
“Video
1/Component
Input”
When
playing
a music/video
file:
Press
to
pause/start
the
playback.
Press
and
When
playing
music/video
Press
to pause/sta
Viewing pictures
from
the
connected
equipment
(OPTICAL)
Viewing
pictures
from
the
connect
“Skip”:
Skips
an
unnecessary
input
source.
•hold
Be
sure
to use
only
authorized
cable
you
resume
playback.
you
want
to video
resume
playback.
hold
G/g
fast
forward/fast
then
release
the
button
at
thereverse,
pointHDMI
where
G/g
to
fast
forward/fast
then
release
Izaberite “Auto”
dawant
bistetopronašli
TV
i izabrali
između
komponentne
ili
C
PC
IN
/ reverse,
Connect
toanpriključnice
the
PC
IN
jack
andbearing
thethe
au
recommend
that
you
use
a Sony
HDMI
spe
you want
resume
playback.
you
want
toequipment,
resume
playback.
qk
OPTIONS
qk
OPTIONS
“Video
1/Component
Input”
video
komponentna
video
ili
video
priključnica
1 to
Turn on the connected equipment,
then
press
tosudisplay
the connected
equipment
list.
Press
/fpress
tocore.
select
F
Cpriključnice
PC
IN
/ 1/ tokad
Connect
to priključnica
the
PC
INPC
jack
and
the
audio
jack/cable
.(high
Itdisplay
is rec
cable
with
ferrite
Turn
on
the
connected
then
to
display
a list
that
to
setting
Press
tosome
display
a press
listmenus.
that
shortcuts toitem
somei
qk .Press
OPTIONS
qkshortcuts
PC
the desired input source, then
press“Auto”
(The
highlighted
item
iscontains
selected
ifOPTIONS
2input
seconds
pass
without
anycontains
spojene.
the
desired
source,
then
.operation
(The
Select
to
have
theAUDIO
TV
detect
and
switch
between
the
component
video
jackhighlighted
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
B
DIGITAL
OUT
Use
an
optical
audio
cable.
The
listed
options
varythat
on
the
current
input
content.
The
listed
options
vary
depending
current
inp
Press
display
a list
contains
shortcuts
to
setting
menus.
Press
to/f
display
a and
list
that
contains
shortcuts
some in
sett
after pressing F/f.) When the
input
source
istoset
to
“Skip”
independing
the
“Video
Labels”
under
the
“AV
Set-up”
menu
PC
after
pressing
.)some
When
the
input
source
is on
setthe
to to
“Skip”
F
or
the
video
jack
1
when
component
video
jack
or
video
jack
1
is
Viewing
pictures
the
connected
equipment
(OPTICAL)
The
listed
options
depending
onql
the
current
input
and
content.
The
listed
options
vary
depending
on the current
input a
qltheColoured
buttons
Coloured
buttons
D vary from
You
can
listen
tothe
TVlist.
sound
on the connec
(page 29), that input is greyed
out
in
list.
(page
29),
that
input
is
greyed
out
in
connected.
the coloured
buttons You
are available,
antooperation
guide
on the
screen.
When
thebuttons
coloured
buttons
are
available,
an operation
Coloured
buttons
ql listen
Coloured
D ql When
can
TV
sound
on appears
the
connected
Hi-Fi audio
equip
••Ne
možete
koristiti
komponentnu
video
priključnicu
priključnicu
11jack
uat
isto
vreme.
C
PC
INcoloured
/ setting
Connect
to
the
PCsource.
INbuttons
and
the
audio
jack
.a
You
cannot
use
the
component
and
the
video
jack
the
same
time.
Turn
on
the
connected
equipment,
then
press
/i video
display
the
connected
equipment
list.the
Pres
z • Press
/ on the TV to
display
the
connected
equipment
and
the
desired
input
You
can
also
press
When
buttons
are
available,
an
operation
guide
appears
on
the
screen.
E
/listvideo
or select
1w;
Connect
todisplay
the
component
jacks
and
When
coloured
are
available,
an equipment
operation
gu
z
•jack
Press
/the
on
the
TV
to
the
connected
lis
w;
– the
Subtitle
–to
Subtitle
setting
theE
desired
source,
press
. (The
highlighted
item
is
selected
if language
2Then
seconds
pass
without
PC
cable
with
ferrite
core.
F/f to select the desired input
source.
Then
wait
for
seconds
toConnect
display
the
input
source.
F/f
toselected
select
the
desired
input
source.
wait
for
seconds
toSubtitle
change
the
subtitle
language
(page
27)
(in
digital
mode
only).
Press
to
change
the
subtitle
(page
w; Press
–or
setting
/ input
1 2then
to
the
jacks
and
the
audio
jacks
/ (in .dF
quality,
component
connection
is227)
recomm
w;
– component
Subtitle
setting
after pressing
/fPC
.) When
source component
iswa
setPROG/CH
toto27)
“Skip”
inthe
the
“Video
Labels”
under
“AV
Component
or
PressFto
change
thethe
subtitle
language
(page
(in
digital
mode
only).
Press
change
subtitle
language
27)the
(in
digita
wa PROG/CH
+/–/
/ input
+/–/
quality,
connection
is/video
recommended
if your
DVD
component
output.(page
When
using
thepS
(pageDescription
29),•PROG/CH
that
inputthe
is+/–/
greyed
inJacks/
the1 list.
Selects
next
or
previous
(–)
channel.
•
Selects
the
next
(+)
or
previous
(–)
channel.
Component
or (+)/ out
Video
Jacks/
wa
wa
PROG/CH
+/–/
/
Description
component
video
output.
When
using
the
component
video
jac
jack
1, select
“Video
1” in the
“Video
DIn
You
can
to
TV
sound
on
connected
Hi-Fi
aud
Text
mode:
next symbol
((–)
or
) page.
•previous
Inlisten
Text
mode:
Selects
thethe
next
(channel.
) or previous
(
Selects
the
nextSelects
(+) or the
previous
Selects
the (next
(+)
orcannot
previous
(–)
Input symbol on screen z • Press•Video
Input
on
screen
jack
1,•)channel.
select
“Video
in
“Video
1/Component
Input”
•1”
use desired
the
component
video
ja
/ 1on the TV to display
the connected
equipment
listYou
andthe
select
the
input source.
Yo
•to In
mode:
Selects
the
nextThen
( ws
or
( Selects
) to
page.
•)wait
Inprevious
Text
mode:
the the
nextselected
( ) orinput
previous
( )p
ws
– Text
Previous
channel
–
Previous
channel
time.
F/fE
select
the
desired
input
source.
for
2
seconds
display
source.
• ifYou
cannot
thecomponent
component
video
jack
and the
video ja
Connect
touse
the
jacks
and
the
audio
jacks
A HDMI IN 1 or 2
Connect
to
the/toHDMI
IN 11 or
2A
jack
theIN
equipment
has
an HDMI
The
theor
previous
channel
or
input
watched
than
15jack.
seconds).
Returns
themore
previous
channel
orthe
input
watched
HDMI
1Previous
or
2 to(for
Connect
to
HDMI
IN 1(fo
or
ws Returns
– Previous
channel
ws
–
channel
time.
quality,
component
connection
isvideo
recommended
if(for
your
to the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
(for
more
than
15
seconds).
digitalReturns
video and
audio
signals
are
input
from
the
equipment.
Returns
to
the
previous
channel
or
input
watched
m
digital
and
audio
signal
F
You
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
files
sto
Component
or
Jacks/
Description
component
video
output. In
When
usingwhen
the
component
vi
HDMI the
1 orWide Mode
HDMI
1 oris
In addition,
when
you
connect
the
equipment
that
compatible
with
Control
for
addition,
you
connec
F
You
can
enjoy
photo/music/video
files
stored
in
a
Sony
digital
camcorder
or
USB
storage
device
(page
1
To change
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
Input
symbol
onVideo
screen1 with the connected
jack
1, selectis “Video
1”
inSee
thepage
“Video
1/Componen
HDMI the
2 Wide Mode
HDMI
2
HDMI,
communication
equipment
supported.
30
to
HDMI,
communication
with
t
To change
camcorder or USB storage device (page 17).
To
change
the
Wide
Mode
For TV, Video, Componentset
orup
HDMI
(except
For
TV,
Video,
or •HDMI
(except
You Input
cannot
use
theto
component
video
jack 2PC
and
the
PC2or HDMI
PC
(PC
timing)
PC
or
HDMI
Input
G Component
2/Connect
Connect
the
video
jack
andan
the
au
this1communication.
set
up
this
communication.
A
HDMI
IN
or
2
to
the
HDMI
IN
1
or
2
jack
if
the
equipment
has
HDM
time.
For input)
TV, Video, Component
orFor
HDMI
(except
TV,input)
or
HDMI
(except
PC
PC
PC
orvideo
HDMI
Input
timing)
PC
or
(P
G
2/
2Video,
Connect
tothe
thePC
video
jack
2 and
the
audio
Ifjack
yo
equipment,
connect
tojack
thejacks
LPC
(MONO)
If the
equipment
has Component
a DVI jack,
connect
DVI
jack
to(PC
theare
HDMI
IN
1HDMI
If
the
equipment
hasInput
a 2.
DVI
ja
digital
and
audio
signals
input
from
the
equipment.
PC
input)
PC
input)
Video
2
equipment,
connect
tothe
thethe
L the
(MONO)
jack
2.is
Normal
Displays
picture
inNormal
its
original
HDMI
1
or
Wide Zoom* Enlarges the centre
portion
ofZoom*
the
Wide
Enlarges
the centre
portion
of
through
a DVI
- HDMI adaptor
interface
(not
and
connect
the
through
afiles
DVI
- HDMI
In addition,
when
you
connect
equipment
thatstored
compatible
F
You
cansupplied),
enjoy
photo/music/video
inDisplays
aadapto
Sonyw
Video
2theof out
Normal
Displays
the
picture
in its
Normal
Displays
the
Wide Zoom* picture.
EnlargesThe
the left
centre
portion
HDMI
2of
Wide
Zoom*
Enlarges
the
centre
portion
of
the
pixel
size.
Bars
are
shown
at
top,
pixel
siz
equipment’s
audio
jack
toHDMI,
the
PC/HDMI
1 AUDIO
IN
jack
in
the
PCoriginal
INthe
jacks
and
right
edges
picture.
The
left
and right
edges
of
equipment’s
audio
outsupporte
jack
to
communication
with
the
connected
is
camcorder
or You
USB
storage
device
(page
17).
H Headphones
can
listen
to TVequipment
sound
through
headp
pixel
Bars
are
shown
at
theIN
top,
pixel
size.
Bj
picture.
Theare
left
andPC/HDMI
righttoedges
of
picture.
The
left
and
right
edges
ofsize.
(the
1
AUDIO
IN
jack
is
used
as
the
audio
in
jack
for
both
the
PC
bottom,
and
both
sides
for
small
bottom,
(the
PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
IN
the
picture
stretched
fill
the
the
picture
are
stretched
to
fill
the
set
up
this
communication.
H Headphones
You can listen to TV sound through headphones.
G to IN
2 the 16:9
Connect
to
the
video
jack
2for
and
the
bottom,
and
both
sidesHDMI
small
bottom,
and
the picture
stretched
fill2/1the
HDMI
jacks).
picture
are equipment
stretched
tohas
fill
picture.
picture.
and
IN audio
1jack
jacks).
16:9
screen.are and
Ifscreen.
the
athe
DVI
jack,
connect
the
DVI
tojacks
the HD
connect
tointerface
the480p,
L (MONO)
jackjacks
2.
picture.
picture.
• The HDMI jacks16:9
onlyscreen.
support
the following
video
inputs:
480i,
16:9 screen.
• 576i,
The 576p,
HDMI
onlyconn
supp
through
a equipment,
DVI
- HDMI
adaptor
(not
supplied),
and
Normal
Displays the 4:3 picture
in its
original
Normal
Displays
the1 4:3
picture
in
its original
Video
2 and
720p,
1080i,
1080p
1080/24p.
Full
Stretches
thethe
original
picture
fill 1080p
Full
11 to
Stretche
720p,
1080i,
and 10
equipment’s
audio
out
jack
to
PC/HDMI
AUDIO
IN
jack
in
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
its
original
Normal
Displays
the
4:3
picture
in
its
original
size. Side bars are shown
to fill jacks
the can size.
Side
bars
toPC
fillmode.
thethe
• The HDMI
support
PC
timing
HDMI
See
page
25
supported
•picture
The
HDMI
can
Full
1 areinshown
Stretches
original
to
filljacks
Full
1for
Stretches
the
the
screen
vertically,
keeping
its
thesuppo
scree
(the
PC/HDMI
1
AUDIO
IN
jack
is
used
as
the
audio
in
jack
for
size. screen.
Side bars are shown
to fillsignal.
the size.16:9
H
can
sound through
headphones.
Sidescreen.
bars are You
shown
to listen
fill screen
theto TV
PC Headphones
input
PC input
signal.
16:9
the
vertically,
keeping
its
the original
screen v
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
and HDMI
IN cable
1 jacks).
• Be sure to use only
anscreen.
authorized
HDMI
bearing the HDMI logo.
• We
Be sure to use only an auth
16:9 screen.
16:9
External Input Lock
Using Menu Functions
Using Optional Equipment
original
horizontal-to-vertical
aspect
original
hor
ratio.
ratio.
• The
HDMI
only
support
video
inputs:
480i,
48
recommend that you use a Sony
HDMI
cablejacks
(high
speed
type).the following
recommend
that
you
use
a
720p,
and 1080/24p.
ratio.
Full
Stretches the 4:3 picture
horizontally Stretches the
Full
4:3 1080i,
picture1080p
horizontally
ratio.
Full
2 picture
Stretches
the Full
1 picture
Full
2
Stretche
• 16:9
The
HDMI
jacks
can support
PC timing
inoptical
HDMI
PC
mode.
See pag
Full
Stretches
the 4:3
picture
horizontally
Full
4:3
B
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT
Use
an optical
audio Stretches
cable.
to
fill
the 16:9
screen.
to fill the
screen.horizontally
B
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
Use
an
audio
cable.
PC
Full (OPTICAL)
2 input signal.
Stretches thetoFull
picture
2 screen. Stretches
the
horizontally
fill1Full
the
16:9
horizont
(OPTICAL) to fill the 16:9 screen.
to fill the 16:9
screen.
• Be sure to usehorizontally
only an authorized
cable
bearing
the HDMI
to fill HDMI
the 16:9
screen.
horizontally
C PC IN
/
Connect to the PC IN
recommend
that you use
a Sony
HDMI cableto(high
jackC
andPC
theIN
audio jack
. It is
recommended
usePC
aspeed
/
Connect
to the
IN type).jac
PC cable
with
ferrite
core.
Displays cinemascopic
(letter
box
Zoom*
Displays
cinemascopic
(letter
box
PC cable with ferrite core.
B DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
Use an
optical audio
cable.
PC in(letter
Displaysbroadcasts
cinemascopic
(letter
box Displays
Zoom*
cinemascopic
box
format)
in the
correct
format)
broadcasts
the correct
(OPTICAL)
• Some options may not be available depending
on options
the
• Some
may not
format) broadcasts in the correct
format)
broadcasts
in options
thesignal.
correct
proportions.
proportions.
PC
input
PCoptions
input
signal.
Some
mayaudio
not beequipment.
available
depending
on
theTV
•can
Some
may
not beona
Continued
You can listen to TV sound
on D
the• connected
Hi-Fi
You
listen
to
sound
proportions.
proportions.
C PC IN
/
Connect
the PC
IN
jack
and theseaudio
jack signal.
SRP. It is recom
PCtoinput
signal.
PC input
Nastavlja
Zoom*
PC
Zoom*
D
29
1
Connect
tointhe
jacksE
and
better picture
29component jac
/ audio
or jacks
Connect
to the
Displays
14:9 broadcasts
thecomponent
Displays
14:9the
broadcasts
in 1the / . For
PC14:9*
quality,
component
connection
is
recommended
if yourblack
DVD player
has component
a
quality,
connection
14:9*
Displays
14:9 broadcasts
in the black
14:9*
Displays
14:9
broadcastsAsinathe
correct
proportions.
As
a
result,
correct
proportions.
result,
Component or
E
14:9* /
or
PC cable with ferrite core.
Component or
GB
HDMI Set-up
Allows the TV
to communicate
equipment
thatsuiskompatibilnisa
compatible with
the Control
for
Omogućava
TV-u
komunikacijuwith
sa uređajima
koji
Control
for HDMI
andpriključnice
connected to
the HDMI
of the
TV.
Note that communication
iHDMI
spojenifunction,
na HDMI
TV-a.
Imajte jacks
na umu
da je
podešavanje
komunikacije
settings must
also be made
on the connected equipment.
potrebno
i na spojenoj
opremi.
“Control
“Control for
for HDMI”
HDMI”
Podešava
da liorželite
ne želite
da povežete
rukovanje
i spojenom
opremom
Sets whether
not toililink
the operations
of the
TV andTV-om
the connected
equipment
that
kompatibilnom
sa Control
podesite
na “On”,
sledeće are
is compatible with
Controlfor
forHDMI.
HDMI.Ako
When
set to “On”,
the dostupne
followingsu
functions
funkcije.
available.
Ako
spojenaSony
određena
Sony that
oprema
kompatibilna
Controlfor
forHDMI
HDMI,
ova postavka
If thejespecific
equipment
is compatible
withsaControl
is connected,
thisprimenjuje
setting is applied
to the
connected
equipment
automatically
the podešen
“Controlna
for
se
na spojenu
opremu
automatski
kad je
“Control forwhen
HDMI”
HDMI”
set to “On”
“On”
priisupotrebi
TV-a.using the TV.
“Auto Devices
Devices Off”
Off”
“Auto
Whenjethis
set to “On”,
the connected
that kompatibilan
is compatiblesa
with
Control
Ako
ovaispostavka
podešena
na “On”, equipment
spojeni uređaj
Control
forfor
HDMI isključuje
turns off when
you
turn offTV
the prijemnik
TV by remote.
HDMI
se kad
isključite
daljinskim upravljačem.
“Auto TV
TV On”
On”
“Auto
Whenjethis
set to “On”,
the TV
when
you turn kad
on the
connected
equipment
Ako
ovaispostavka
podešena
naturns
“On”,onTV
se uključuje
uključite
spojeni
uređaj
that is compatible
with Control
for HDMI.
kompatibilan
sa Control
for HDMI.
“HDMI Device
Device List”
List”
“HDMI
Displays alistu
list of
connected
equipment
that is compatible
withHDMI.
Control
for HDMI.
Prikazuje
spojenih
uređaja
kompatibilnih
sa Control for
Odabir
“Enable”
Selects
“Enable”
to update
theList”.
“HDMI Device List”.
za
ažuriranje
“HDMI
Device
“Device Control
Control Keys”
Keys”
“Device
Select button
functions
of the TV’supravljača
remote control
the connected
Izaberite
funkcije
tipki daljinskog
TV-a to
zaoperate
upravljanje
spojenom equipment.
opremom.
“Normal”:Za
For
basic operations,
as su
navigation
buttons
(up,
down,
leftlevo
or right,
“Normal”:
osnovne
operacije, such
kao što
navigacione
tipke
(gore,
dole,
ili desno
etc).
itd.).
“Tuning Keys”:
Keys”: For
basic operations
operationtipki
of channel-related
such
as
“Tuning
Za osnovne
operacijeand
i operacije
koje se odnosebuttons,
na kanale,
kao
PROG
+/– or+/–
(0-9),
etc. Useful
when you
control
a tuner or
set-top ili
box,
etc; via
što
su PROG
ili (0-9),
itd. Korisno
je kada
upravljate
tjunerom
set-top
boxthe
remote control.
uređajem,
itd. pomoću daljinskog upravljača.
“Menu Keys”:
Keys”: Za
Forosnovne
basic operations
operation
of the
HOME/OPTIONS
buttons.
“Menu
operacijeand
i operacije
tipki
HOME/OPTIONS.
Korisno
kod
Useful when
menus
of a BD daljinskog
player, etc;upravljača.
via the remote control.
biranja
menijayou
BDselect
uređaja,
itd pomoću
“Tuning and
and Menu
Menu Keys”:
Keys”: Za
Forosnovne
basic operations
operation
of channel-related
“Tuning
operacijeand
i operacije
tipki
koje se odnose na
buttons
and
HOME/OPTIONS
button.
kanale i HOME/OPTIONS tipku.
DivX(R) VOD
Ne cannot
možeteuse
kontrolisati
forifHDMI”
su TV operacije
sa
• •You
“Control “Control
for HDMI”
the TV ako
operations
are linkedpovezane
to the operations
of an
operacijama
koji jewith
kompatibilan
Control for HDMI.
audio systemaudio
that issistema
compatible
Control forsaHDMI.
Nekaequipment
oprema sawith
“Control
for HDMI”
ne podržava
“Device
Control”.
• •Some
“Control
for HDMI”
does notfunkciju
support the
“Device
Control” feature.
Izaberite
“DivX(R)VOD
VODRegistration
Registration Code”
vaš TV
zafor
reprodukciju
Select
“DivX(R)
Code”datoregistrujete
register your
TV
playback of DivX
DivX sadržaja.
“DivX(R)
Deregistration
Code”
brisanje
contents.
SelectIzaberite
“DivX(R)
VOD VOD
Deregistration
Code”
toza
delete
theregistracije.
registration.
registracioni
će will
se prikazati
u “DivX(R)
VOD Registration
Code” posle
•• Novi
A new
registrationkod
code
be displayed
in “DivX(R)
VOD Registration
Code” after
brisanja
registracije
putem
“DivX(R) VOD
deleting
registration
via “DivX(R)
VOD Deregistration
DeregistrationCode”.
Code”.
Product Information
Prikaz informacija
o proizvodu
TV-u.
Displays
your TV’s
product na
information.
Factory Settings
Resetujeallsva
podešenja
na fabrička.
Po završetku
ovog procesa,this
prikazuje
se početno
Resets
settings
to factory
settings.
After completing
process,
the initial set-up
podešenje.
screen
is displayed.
isključivati
TVTV
tokom
ovog perioda
(potrebno
je oko
30 30
sekundi)
nitior press any
•• Nemojte
Be sure not
to turn the
off during
this period
(it takes
about
seconds)
buttons.bilo koju tipku.
pritiskati
Eco
Eko
Reset
Resetuje
trenutna
Eko
podešenja
vrednosti.
Resets
the
current
Eco
settingsnatostandardne
the default
values.
Power Saving
Smanjuje power
potrošnju
energije TV-aofpodešavanjem
pozadinskog
Reduces
consumption
the TV by adjusting
theosvetljenja.
backlight.
Ako jeyou
odabrano
Off”,
slikathe
se isključuje
na prednjojoff,
strani
uređaja
When
select“Picture
“Picture
Off”,
picture isi switched
and
the svetli
(Picture Off)
zeleni indikator
Off).
Zvuklights
se ne up
menja.
indicator
on the (Picture
TV front
panel
in green. The sound remains unchanged.
Idle TV Standby
Isključuje
ne radi
nekobeen
prethodno
određeno
vreme.
Turns
the TV
TVpošto
off after
it has
kept idle
for the
preset length of time.
Light Sensor
Optimizujethe
postavke
slike
prema osvetljenju
Optimises
picture
settings
according sobe.
to the ambient lighting.
PC Power
Management
Switches
to standby
when
the TV
receives
no signal
the PC input
Isključujethe
TV TV
u pripravno
stanjemode
ako TV
ne prima
signal
iz računara
unutar from
30 sekundi.
source for 30 seconds.
SRP
30 GB
30
nd
Additional
Information
Dodatne
informacije
Additional
Information
Installing the
accessories
(Wall-Mount Bracket)
Instaliranje
pribora
(zidni nosač)
Installing the accessories (Wall-Mount Bracket)
Customers:
ZaTo
kupce:
For
product
protection
safety reasons,
Sony
strongly
recommends
that installing
your Sony
TV beserviseri
performed
Radi
proizvoda
i izand
sigurnosnih
razloga,
Sony
preporučuje
da postavljanje
TV-aof
izvedu
ili by
To zaštite
Customers:
Sony
dealers
or
licensed
contractors.
Do
not
attempt
to
install
it
yourself.
For product
protection
andpokušavati
safety reasons,
strongly
recommends that installing of your TV be performed by
ovlašćeni
partneri.
Nemojte
da gaSony
postavite
sami.
Sony dealers or licensed contractors. Do not attempt to install it yourself.
To Sony Dealers and Contractors:
ZaProvide
servisere
i partnere
kompanije
Sony:
fullDealers
attention
to
safety
during the
installation, periodic maintenance and examination of this product.
To Sony
and
Contractors:
Pobrinite
se
za
sigurnost
tokom
postavljanja,
redovnog održavanja
i provere ovog
proizvoda. of this product.
Provide full attention to safety during the installation,
periodic maintenance
and examination
Your TV can be installed using the Wall-Mount Bracket SU-WL50B or SU-WL100 (sold separately).
indicators
• Refer
to the
Instructions
with
the Wall-Mount
Bracket to properly
carry out(prodaje
the installation.
Ovaj
TVTV
se
može
pomoću
zidnog
nosačaBracket
SU-WL50B
ili SU-WL100
se odvojeno).
Your
can
be montirati
installedsupplied
using
the
Wall-Mount
SU-WL50B
or
SU-WL100
(sold
separately).
•
Refer
to
“Detaching
the
stand
from
the
TV”
(page
6).
•
Za
pravilnu
montažu
sa
zidnim
nosačem
pogledajte
pripadajuće
uputstvo
za
upotrebu.
•
Refer
to
the
Instructions
supplied
with
the
Wall-Mount
Bracket
to
properly
carry
out
the
installation.
1 1 – •Power
Place
the
TV
on
the
stand,
when
securing
the
Mounting
Hook.
• Pogledajte
Refer
to “Detaching
stand
fromod
TV” (page
6).
•Press
“Odvajanje
postolja
TV-a”
(str.
6).
to turn
the
TV on the
or to
switch
tothe
standby
mode.
the TV
on
the stand,
when
Mountingkuke.
Hook.
ToPlace
disconnect
TV
from
ACsecuring
power the
•• •Stavite
TV
nathe
postolje
kodthe
učvršćivanja
montažne
SU-WL100:
completely, pull the plug from the AC power
(KDL-26/22BX320)
outlet.
SU-WL100:
(KDL-26/22BX320)
2 CH +/–/
SU-WL50B:
(KDL-40BX420/KDL-32BX320)
SU-WL50B:
(KDL-40BX420/KDL-32BX320)
/
Screw
4Vijak
× 12)
(+PSW
• Increases (+) or decreases (–) the
4 × volume.
12)
3 2 +/–/
Screw
(+PSW
Vijak
Screw
6
× 16)
(+PSW
6 × 16)
/
• In TV menu: Moves through the options right (
or left ( ).
0
5
0
)
01
5
51
01
0
4
5
0
/
– Input select / Enter
01
5
51
01
02
51
02
• Displays the connected equipment list and selects
Hook13).
the inputMounting
source (page
• In TV menu:
Selects
the
menu or option, and
Mounting
Hook
Montažna
kuka
confirms the setting.
Operating the TV
02
51
02
Additional
Additional
Information
Information
• Selects the next (+) or previous (–) channel.
• In TV menu: Moves through theScrew
options up ( ) or
down ( ).
(+PSW
Mounting Hook
Mounting
Hook
Montažna
kuka
za installing
postavljanje
5 Napomena
Note when
Displays
or
cancels
the menu.
Pri
korišćenju
SU-WL50B
ili SU-WL100
zidnog
nosača, prostor
između
zidabetween
i TV će biti
6 cm.and
Iskoristite
ovaj be
prosWhen
using
theinstalling
SU-WL50B
or SU-WL100
Wall-Mount
Bracket,
the space
the wall
the TV will
6
Note
when
tor
za
dovođenje
kablova
do
TV-a.
cm.
Use
this
space
to
route
cables
to
the
TV.
6 When
– Remote
sensor
/ Light
using the
SU-WL50B
or sensor
SU-WL100 Wall-Mount Bracket, the space between the wall and the TV will be 6
Receives
the remote.
cm. UseIR
thissignals
spacefrom
to route
cables to the TV.
6 cm
Senses room light level and adjusts the screen
brightness accordingly. Do not put anything over the
sensor, doing so may affect its function.
7
/
6 cm
– Picture Off / Timer indicator
Lights up in green when you select “Picture Off”
(page 30).
8 1 – Standby indicator
Lights up in red when the TV is in standby mode.
9 " – Power indicator
• Lights up in green when the TV is turned on.
• Flashes while the remote is being operated.
• Make sure that the TV is completely turned off before
unplugging the AC power cord. Unplugging the AC
power cord while the TV is turned on may cause the
indicator to remain lit or may cause the TV to
malfunction.
Sufficient
isa required
forUse
installing
products,
especially
to bi
determine
the strength
thedovoljno
wall for čvrst
ovoghas
proizvoda
zahteva
stručnost,
posebno
kako
se ustanovilo
da li jeofzid
z •Postavljanje
The CH + expertise
button
tactile dot.
itdodatnu
as a these
withstanding
the
TV’s
weight.
to proizvoda
entrust
attachment
of these
to the
the strength
wall
to Sony
or
reference
when
operating
the TV.Be
daSufficient
izdrži težinu
TV-a.
ovog
na
zid poverite
Sony
serviserima
ili
licenciranim
partnerima
i
expertise
is Postavljanje
required
for sure
installing
thesethe
products,
especially
toproducts
determine
of thedealers
wall
for
licensed
contractors
and
pay
adequate
attention
tothe
safety
during
installation.
Sony
is not
forili
any
damage
or
obratite
dodatnu
na
sigurnost
postavljanja.
Sonythe
nethese
preuzima
odgovornost
za
ozlede
withstanding
thepažnju
TV’s
weight.
Be suretokom
to entrust
attachment
of
products
to the
wallliable
to štete
Sony
dealers
or uzrokoinjury caused
by mishandling
or improper
installation.
licensed
contractors
and pay adequate
attention
to safety
during the installation. Sony is not liable for any damage or
vane
nepravilnim
rukovanjem
ili neodgovarajućom
montažom.
injury caused by mishandling or improper installation.
31 SRP
GB
31
31 GB
TV
installation
dimensions
table
Tabela
dimenzija za
postavljanje TV-a
125
SU-WL100:
Položaj
središta
ekrana
Screen
centre
point
Jedinica:
Unit: mm
mm
Display
Dimenzije
ekrana
Model
name
Naziv modela
KDL-26BX320
KDL-22BX320
Screen središta
centre
Dimenzije
dimension
ekrana
dimensions
Dužina
ugla montaže
Length
forsvakog
each mounting
angle
Ugao (0°)
Ugao (20°)
Angle
(0°)
Angle
(20°)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
668
424
117
336
147
244
403
338
551
363
107
302
122
212
338
295
SU-WL50B:
a
b
c
c
b
a
Položaj
središta
ekrana
Screen
centre
point
Jedinica:
mm
Unit: mm
Naziv modela
Model
name
KDL-40BX420
KDL-32BX320
Dimenzije
ekrana
Display
dimensions
Screen centre
Dimenzije
središta
dimension
ekrana
Dužinafor
za montažu
Length
mounting
A
B
C
D
E
988
600
175
478
147
800
496
200
453
147
Figures in
above
tablemogu
may se
differ
depending
on od
thenačina
installation.
Vrednosti
iz the
gornje
tabele
maloslightly
razlikovati,
zavisno
postavljanja.
UPOZORENJE
WARNING
Zid
nawall
koji that
će sethe
TVTV
postaviti
da može
da podnese
masuofbarem
četiri puta
većuofodatovog
Masuthat
TV-a
The
will be treba
installed
on should
be capable
supporting
a weight
leastTV-a.
four times
of the
potražite
u poglavlju
“Tehnički podaci”.
TV. Refer
to “Specifications”
for its weight.
SRP
32 GB
32
Screw
and hook
locations
Dijagram/tabela
položaja
vijaka idiagram/table
kuke
Položaj
vijaka –- Kod
Screw location
Wheninstaliranja
installing themontažne
Mountingkuke
Hookna
on TV.
the TV.
SU-WL50B
Additional Information
Hook location
Whenpostavljanja
installing theTV-a
TV onto
the Base Bracket.
Položaj
kuke –- Kod
na postolje.
SU-WL50B
SU-WL100
a*
b
c
a
b
a
b
c
c
a
b
Base
Bracket
Postolje
Kuka
Hook
a
b
c
c
b
a
* Hook
location
“a” ne
cannot
bese
used
for
Položaj
kuke “a”
može
upotrebljavati
the
models u
intablici
the table
below.
za modele
ispod.
Položaj
vijka
Screw
location
SU-WL50B
d, i
e, h
Model
name
Naziv
modela
KDL-40BX420
KDL-32BX320
KDL-26BX320
KDL-22BX320
Položaj
kuke
Hook
location
SU-WL50B
b
c
SU-WL100
a
b
33 SRP
GB
33
indicator flashes between each three second
Troubleshooting
break.
•
example, the indicator flashes three times,
thentiny black po
Some
Check whether the 1For
(standby)
indicator is
N
there is a three second break, followed by another
on thethree
screen
flashing in red.
•
flashes, etc.
Some tiny black points and/or bright points •appear
The picture of a disp
Check whether the 1 (standby) indicator When
is
it
is
flashing
Some
tiny
black
points
and/or
bright
points
appear
Check
whether
the
1
(standby)
indicator
is
2 screen
Press
1pojava
on
theblack
TV to
turnsvetlih
it off, disconnect
Some
tiny
points
and/or
bright
points
Checkproblema
whether the 1 (standby) indicator is onMestimična
black
pointsappear
and/or N
b
crnih
i/ili
tačkica
the
flashing in red.
Rešavanje
The self-diagnosisna
function
is
activated.
the
screen
flashing
on
the
screen
the on
AC
cord,
informofyour
dealer
or a malfuf
Troubleshooting
not
indicate
flashingininred.
red.
• Theekranu
picture
of apower
display
unit isand
composed
pixels.
Tiny
When
it is flashing
The
picture
ofof
aaSitne
display
unit
isissvetle
composed
ofofpixels.
service
centre
of(pixels)
how
the
indicator
1 Count how many
times
the
1
(standby)
• and/or
Theod
picture
display
unit
composed
pixels.Tiny
Tinyar•
•black
EkranSony
se •sastoji
piksela.
crne
i/ili
tačkice
points
bright
points
on
the
screen
do
Troubleshooting
itit
is
Picture
contours
When
isflashing
flashing
Some
tiny
black
points
and/or
bright
points
appear
Proverite
da
liWhen
trepće
indikator
(pripravno
stanje)indicator
Check
whether
theis1
(standby) indicator
is
points
and/or
bright
points
(pixels)
on
screen
The self-diagnosis
function
activated.
flashes
(number
ofkvar
flashes).
black
points
and/or
bright
points
(pixels)
onthe
the
screendo
do
flashes
between
each
three
second
not indicate
ablack
malfunction.
(pikseli)
na ekranu
ne
znače
uređaja.
•
Change
the
current
s
oting crveno.
The
self-diagnosis
function
is
activated.
on the
screen
The many
self-diagnosis
function
is activated.
flashing
inthe
red.
not
indicate
malfunction.
Some tiny
black
pointsaaand/or
bright points appear
not
indicate
malfunction.
whether
1
(standby)
is break.
1 Check
Count
how
times
the
1 indicator
(standby)
Obrisi
slike
su
izobličeni
settings
(page
21).
When
it
is
not
flashing
Picture
contours
are
distorted
•
The
picture
of
a
display
unit
is
composed
of
pixels.
Tiny
1
Count
how
many
times
the
1
(standby)
on
the
screen
1red.
howSome
many
times
thesecond
1 (standby)
flashing
inis
Forand/or
example,
the
indicator
flashes
three
times, are
then
indicator
flashes
between
each
three
Kad
trepće
tiny
black
points
bright
points
appear
Picture
contours
distorted
When
itCount
is flashing
1 (standby)
indicator
• Promenite
trenutno
podešenje
“Cinema
Drive”
naondruga
Picture
contours
are
distorted
N
black
points
and/or
points
(pixels)
the
screen
• •second
Change
the
current
setting
ofbright
“Cinema
to No
other
Troubleshooting
1The Check
items
listed
below.
indicator
flashes
between
each
three
second
colour
ondo
progr
indicator
flashes
between
eachthere
three
second
picture
ofthe
a display
unit
is setting
composed
of pixels.
Tiny
is
a
three
break,
followed
by
another
threeDrive”
break.
on
the
screen
podešenja
(str.
21).
Uključena
je
funkcija
automatske
dijagnostike.
•
Change
the
current
ofof“Cinema
The
self-diagnosis
function
is
activated.
• indicate
Change
the
current setting
“CinemaDrive”
Drive”totoother
other o
When it is flashing
not
a
malfunction.
settings
(page
21).
break.
points
and/or bright
points
(pixels)
on the
break.
2black
Ifpixels.
the
problem
stillpoints
persists,
have
your
TVdo“Reset”
•screen
Select
For example,
the
indicator
threethe
times,
then flashes,
Slika
u boji
settings
(page
Some
tiny black
points
appear(page
•flashes
picture
of1
a display
unit is
isetc.
composed
ofnije
Tiny
1 Izbrojte
puta
indikator
(pripravno
stanje)
settings
(page21).
21). and/or bright
Check
whether
the
1
(standby)
indicator
1koliko
Count
how
many
times
(standby)
The
self-diagnosis
function
isThe
activated.
•
not indicate
a malfunction.
For
example,
the
indicator
flashes
three
times,
then
For
example,
the
indicator
flashes
three
times,
then
serviced
by
qualified
service personnel.
Picture
contours
are distorted
No
colour
on
programmes
there
isflashing
a indicator
three
second
break,
followed
by
another
three
•
Izaberite
“Reset”
(str.
21).
black
points
and/or
bright
points
(pixels)
on
the
screen
do
2
Press
1
on
the
TV
to
turn
it
off,
disconnect
on
the
screen
in
red.
No
colour
or irregul•
trepće
između
svakog
prekida
od
tri
sekunde.
flashes
between
each
three
second
No
colour
on
programmes
No
colour
on
programmes
1
Count
how
many
times
the
1
(standby)
there
is
a
three
second
break,
followed
by
another
three
nction is activated.
there is a three second
break,a followed
by another
three
Change
the
current
setting
of
Drive”
to other
• Picture
Select
(page
21).
not indicate
malfunction.
flashes,indikator
etc.
contours
are
Nema
boje
ili
nepravilna
boja
pri
gledanju
the
AC power
cord,•“Reset”
inform
your
dealer
or“Cinema
•
•and
picture
ofdistorted
a display
unit
is composed
of the
pixels.
Tiny
from
Y, P
B/CB, P
Na primer,
može
zatreptati
tri puta,
break.
•The
“Reset”
indicator
flashes
between
each
three second
flashes,
etc.
• Select
Select
“Reset”
(page21).
21).
When
it is
flashing
flashes,
etc.
settings
(page
21). (page
Picture
y times the 21 (standby)
Sony
service
centre
of
how
the
indicator
•
Change
the
current
setting
of
“Cinema
Drive”
to
other
black
points
and/or
bright
points
(pixels)
on
the
do
signala
sa
priključnica
Y,
P
B
/C
B
,
P
R
/C
R
Press
1
on
the
TV
to
turn
it
off,
disconnect
No colour or irregular colour when viewing a• signal
Check screen
the connectio
Picture
contours
are
distorted
For
example,
the
indicator
flashes
three
times,
then
isključiti
seThe
na
tri
sekunde
i
zatim
ponovo
zatreptati
break.
is
activated.
2power
Press
1
on
the
TV
turn
ititoff,
disconnect
Troubleshooting
between
eachthe
three
second
2 self-diagnosis
Press
1and
onfunction
the
TVto
to
turn
off,
disconnect
No
colour
or
irregular
aasignal
settings
(page
not
indicate
aor
malfunction.
No
colour
irregular
colour
when
viewing
signal
flashes
(number
of
flashes).
AC
inform
your
dealer
or
No
programmes
• Drive”
Proverite
da
li21).
priključci
Y,and
Pcolour
B/C
Pwhen
R/CR viewing
/
and
check •i
No
picture
(screen
dark)of
no
from
the
Y,
P
B/C
B, su
Pon
R/C
Ris
jacks
/ B,sound
there isthe
acord,
three
second
break,
followed
by
another
three
• flashes
Change
the
current
setting
of “Cinema
tocolour
other
tri puta,
itd.
For
example,
indicator
three
times,
then
the
AC
power
cord,
and
inform
your
dealer
or
the
AC
power
cord,
and
inform
your
dealer
or
from
the
Y,
P
B/C
B,
R/C
RRjacks
of
/
1service
Count
how
many
times
the
1
(standby)
from
the
Y,
P
B/C
B,P
P
R/C
jacks
of
/
respective
jacks.
Sony
centre
of
how
the
indicator
•the
Select
“Reset”
21).
priključnica
(page
21).When
• colour
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection.
flashes,
etc.
B/CB
, PR/CR jacks of
Check
connection
of(page
the points
Y,
Pdistorted
No
on
programmes
Picture
contours
are
Some
points
and/or
bright
appear
Check
whether
the is1then
(standby)
indicator
is biste
2 three
Pritisnite
TV
prijemniku
kako
ga
there
ana
three
second
break,settings
followed
another
three
itsecond
istiny
not•black
flashing
•
Sony
service
centre
ofofby
how
the
indicator
dicator
flashes
times,
Sony
service
centre
how
the
indicator
indicator
flashes
between
each
three
B ,B ,PP
R/C
jacks
ofof
•pravilno
connection
the
Y,
Pand
B/C
R/C
jacks
• Check
Check
the
connection
the
Y,
PB/C
flashes
(number
of
flashes).
Connect
the
TV
to
the
ACspojeni
power
outlet,
press
1R Rto
on
/ No
and
check
ifthe
each
jacks
areofof
firmly
seated
in their
•Select
iirregular
čvrsto
sa
pripadajućim
on the the
screen
•
Change
the
current
setting
of
“Cinema
Drive”
other
•
“Reset”
(page
21).
No
picture
from
the
flashing
in
red.
2
Press
1
on
the
TV
to
turn
it
off,
disconnect
flashes,
etc.
isključili,
odspojite
mrežni
kabl,
pa
obavestite
colour
or
colour
when
viewing
a signal
No
colour
on
programmes
1
Check
items
listed
below.
flashes
(number
of
flashes).
nd break, followed by anotherbreak.
three
flashes (number of flashes).
/ / and
check
ififeach
jacks
are
firmly
seated
inintheir
and
check
each
jacks
are
firmly
seated
their
the
TV.
respective
jacks.
settings
(page
21).
priključnicama.
on
the screen
the
AC
power
cord,
and
inform
or No
The picture
of acolour
display
unit
isY,composed
of
pixels.
Tiny
itiliisSony
not
flashing
from
the
PB/C
B, P R
/C
R jacks
of
/a signal
servis
o treptanju
indikatora
(broj
2flashing
Press
1
on
the
TV
to
turn
it“Reset”
off,
disconnect
• indicator
Select
(page
21).
respective
jacks.
or
irregular
colour
whenup
viewing
respective
jacks.
2your
If• dealer
the
problem
persists,
have
your
TV
For
example,
the
flashes
three
times,
then
When it prodavca
isWhen
•still
If the
1
(standby)
indicator
lights
in red, press
"/1.
When
ititis
not
flashing
When
is
not
flashing
black points
and/or
bright
points
(pixels)
on of
thethe
screen
do
Slika
iz
priključene
opreme
se
ne
prikazuje
Sony
service
centre
of
how
the
indicator
No
picture
from
the
connected
equipment
appears
•
Turn
theofconnected•
treptaja).
B
/C
B
,
P
R
/C
R
jacks
•
Check
the
connection
Y,
P
the
AC
power
cord,
and
inform
your
dealer
or
No
colour
on
programmes
the
items
listed
below.
from
the Y,
P
B/CB, P
R/C R jacks of
/
there
isactivated.
a three
second
break,orfollowed
byserviced
another
three
by
qualified
service
personnel.
TV
turn it1 off,Check
disconnect
Thetoself-diagnosis
function
is
No
colour
irregular
colour
when
viewing
a
signal
No
picture
from
the
connected
equipment
appears
not indicate
athe
malfunction.
No/ or
picture
from
the
connected
equipment
No
picture
no
menu
information
from
equipment
1service
Check
the
items
listed
below.
• Check
the
cable con
flashes
(number
of
flashes).
onna
screen
ekranu
1
Check
the
items
listed
below.
and
check
if
each
jacks
are
firmly
seated
in appears
their
Sony
centre
of
how
the
indicator
•
Select
“Reset”
(page
21).
flashes,
etc.
B
/C
B
,
P
R
/C
R
jacks
of
•
Check
the
connection
of
the
Y,
P
2howne
If
the
problem
still1
persists,
have
your
rd,
inform
your
dealer
orthe
from the
Y, P
B/CB,TV
PR/CR jacks of • Uključite
/
on
screen
1 and
Count
many
times
(standby)
onthe
thethe
screen
• Press
Kad
trepće
connected
to
video input
jack appears
on the to display
spojeni
uređaj.
respective
jacks.
•
Turn
the
connected
equipment
on.
2
If
the
problem
still
persists,
have
your
TV
Picture
contours
are
distorted
flashes
(number
of
flashes).
2
If
the
problem
still
persists,
have
your
TV
/
and check if each jacks are firmly seated in their
When
is 1
not
serviced
byit qualified
service
ntre of
how
indicator
2 between
Press
onflashing
the
TVsecond
topersonnel.
it off,Picture
disconnect
No•cable
orconnected
irregularequipment
colour when
a signal
PProverite
R/CR jacks
of
• ispod.
Check
theturn
connection
of the Y, P B/C•B,•Check
select the
desired inC
indicator
flashes
each
three
Turn
the
on.
screen
•colour
Turn
the
connected
equipment
on. viewing
1 the
Proverite
opcije
navedene
spajanje
kablova.
the
serviced
by
service
personnel.
respective
jacks.
serviced
byqualified
qualified
service
personnel.
• dealer
Change
the
current
setting
ofconnection.
“Cinema
Drive”
to other equipment
No
picture
from
the
connected
appears
of flashes).
the
AC
power
cord,
and
inform
your
or
/
and
check
if
each
jacks
are
firmly
seated
inCheck
their
• /list,
Correctly
1
Check
the
items
listed
below.
•
the
connection.
When
it
is
not
flashing
from
the
Y,
PBcable
/C
B, spojene
P
R/C R jacks
of zatim
break.
•and
Check
the
cable
connection.
picture
(screen
isPress
dark)to
sound
Pritisnite
za
prikaz
liste
opreme,
izaber• •Press
display
the
connected
equipment
list,
then
•21).
tono
display
the
connected
equipment
then insert them
2 Ukoliko je problem i dalje prisutan, odnesiteNoTV
settings
(page
on •the
screen
respective
jacks.
in the digital
still
Press
totodisplay
list,
Sony
service
centre
of how
the
indicator
No
picture
theconnection
connected
equipment
appears
•from
Press
display
the
connected
list,then
thenca
the
three
times,
then
select
the
desired
input.
Pequipment
R/CR jacks of
• ulaz.
Check
the
ofthe
theconnected
Y, P B/CB, equipment
select
the
desired
input.
2indicator
Ifthe
theflashes
problem
still
persists,
have
your
TV
ite
željeni
1Picture
Check
items
listed
below.
• Check
the antenna/cable
connection.
hing For example,
prijemnik
u ovlašćeni
servis
na
popravku.
Picture
Picture
• device
Use
a and
digital
still ca•
select
the
desired
input.
•
Turn
the
connected
equipment
on.
No
colour
on
programmes
select
the
desired
input.
flashes
(number
of
flashes).
on
the
screen
•
Correctly
insert
the
memory
card
or
other
storage
/
and
check
if
each
jacks
are
firmly
seated
in
their
there is aNo
three
second
break,
followed
by
another
three
•
Check
the
connection
between
the
optional
equipment
•
Pravilno
umetnite
memorijsku
karticu
ili
drugi
memorijski
serviced
by
qualified
service
personnel.
• TV
Connect
the TV
to the AC power
outlet, and press 1 on
No
picture
from
the
connected
equipment
appears
(screen
isstill
dark)
and
nohave
sound
If the problem
persists,
your
listed below.2 picture
device
that has
been
•connected
insert
the
memory
storage
device
Check
the
cable
connection.
• Correctly
Correctly
insert
theon.
memorycard
cardororother
other
storage
device
inTurn
the
still
camera.
No
(screen
isisdark)
and
sound
respective
jacks.
thedigital
TV.
• TV.
Select “Reset”
(page
21).
•uređaj
equipment
Nopicture
picture
(screen
dark)
andno
nothe
sound
flashes, etc.Check
u•the
fotoaparat.
on
the
screen
the
antenna/cable
connection.
When
itqualified
is not
flashing
serviced
by
service
personnel.
manual
in
the
digital
still
camera.
•
Press
to red,
display
the
connected
equipment
list,supplied
then wit
in
the
digital
still
camera.
ill persists, •have
your
TV
•
Use
a
digital
still
camera
memory
card
or
other
storage
•
Check
the
cable
connection.
•
If
the
1
(standby)
indicator
lights
up
in
press
"/1.
•
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection.
•
Upotrebite
memorijsku
karticu
iz
fotoaparata
ili
drugi
•
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection.
2 Press Slika
on the1Picture
TVCheck
to to
turn
itAC
off,
•1Connect
the
TV
thethe
power
outlet,
and press 1
on
No
from
theaccording
connected
equipment
appears
•disconnect
Turn
the connected
equipment
on. or device
Double
or
ghosting
No colour
irregular
colour
viewing
a signal
• Operations
are not g
•images
Use
digital
still
camera
memory
card
storage
select
theaawhen
desired
input.
•picture
Use
digital
still
camera
memory
card
orother
other
storage
items
listed
below.
ified service
personnel.
has
been
formatted
to the
instruction
Press that
to
display
thepravilno
connected
equipment
list,or
then
•• Connect
the
the
AC
power
and
1
on•memorijski
N
uređaj
koji
je
formiran
u skladu
sa
Connect
theTV
TV
the
AC
power
outlet,
andpress
press
1
the
TV.cord,
• toto
Check
the
cable
connection.
the AC power
and
inform
your
dealer
ornooutlet,
on
screen
operations
differ dep
device
that
has
formatted
according
totothe
instruction
from
the
Y, on
P
No picture
or no
menu
information
from
equipment
B/C
B
,P
/C
Rthe
jacks
of
/been
• Rthe
Correctly
insert
the
memory
card
or
other
storage
device
Picture
•
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection,
location
or
direction.
device
that
has
been
formatted
according
the
instruction
manual
supplied
with
the
digital
still
camera.
No
picture
(screen
is
dark)
and
sound
select
desired
input.
2
If
the
problem
still
persists,
have
your
TV
the
TV.
the
TV.
uputstvom
za
upotrebu
digitalnog
fotoaparata.
•
•
If
the
1
(standby)
indicator
lights
up
in
red,
press
"/1.
•
Press
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list,
then
device
and the video
SonyNema
service
centre
of how the
indicator
manual
supplied
with
the
digital
still
the
digital
still
camera.
manual
supplied
with
the
digital
stillcamera.
camera.
connected
tothe
the
video
input
jack
appears
the
• inofTurn
the
connected
equipment
on.
Bmemory
/C
B, P
R/Con
R
jacks
of
•red,
Check
the
Y,the
Pnoise
• connection
are
not
guaranteed
for
all
USB
devices.
Also,
slike
ekran)
ni
zvuka
••Operations
Correctly
insert
card
or
other
storage
device
•(zatamnjen
IfIfthe
(standby)
indicator
lights
ininred,
press
• Check
antenna/cable
connection.
serviced
by
qualified
service
personnel.
•(screen
the1
1
(standby)
indicator
lightsup
up
press"/1.
"/1.
Only
snow
and
appear
on
the
screen
No
picture
is
dark)
and
no
sound
Postupci
nisu
garantovani
za
sve
USB
uređaje.
Takođe,
•
select
the
desired
input.
Troubleshooting
•
Operations
are
not
guaranteed
for
all
USB
devices.
Also,
•
Use
a
digital
still
camera
memory
card
or
other
storage
flashes
(number
of
flashes).
•
Operations
are
not
guaranteed
for
all
USB
devices.
Also,
•
Check
the
cable
connection.
/ on andoperations
check
each
jacks
are firmly
in theirof theCannot
screen
differ
depending
onseated
the features
USB select the c
No picture
or no menu
from
equipment
in theifdigital
still
camera.
• Proverite
antene/kablovskog
sistema.
• spajanje
Connect
the TVinformation
toconnection.
the
AC power
outlet,
and
press 1
postupci
se
mogu
razlikovati
zavisno
od
funkcije
USB
•
Correctly
insert
the
memory
card
or
other
storage
device
•
Check
if
the
antenna
is
broken
or
bent.
•
Check
the
antenna/cable
operations
differ
depending
on
the
features
of
the
USB
device
that
has
been
formatted
according
to
the
instruction
No
picture
or
no
menu
information
from
equipment
differ
depending
the
features
of
thethen
USB N
dark) and no
sound the
No
picture
orinput
no menu
information
fromrespective
equipment
• Press
to display
the
connected
equipment
list,
jacks.
and
theoperations
video
being
played.
• device
Use ais
digital
still
camera
memory
card
oronother
storage
connected
to
the
video
appears
on
the
•camera.
Press
to indicator
display
connected
equipment
list,
then
TV.
Some
tiny
black
points
and/or
bright poi
or cannot
sw
TV Picture
prijemnik
nato
napajanje
idigital
pritisnite
na
Check
whether
the
1appears
(standby)
When it •isSpojite
flashing
injack
the
still
i video
sadržaja
koji
se
reprodukuje.
• the
Check
if the
antenna
has
reached
the
end
ofcamera.
itsmenu
serviceable
•not
Connect
the
TV to the
AC
power
outlet,
and
press
1 on on
device
and
the
video
being
played.
manual
supplied
with
the
digital
still
device
and
the
video
being
played.
connected
video
input
jack
select
the
desired
input.
connected
tothe
the
video
input
jack
appears
onthe
theuređaja
ble connection.
device
that
has
been
formatted
according
to the
instruction
Troubleshooting
select
the
desired
input.
•
If
the
1
(standby)
indicator
lights
up
in
red,
press
"/1.
screen
on
the
screen
No
picture
from
the
connected
equipment
appears
flashing
in
red.
Cannot
select
the
connected
equipment
on
the
•
Use
a
digital
still
camera
memory
card
or
other
storage
•
Check
the
cable
con•
life
(three
to
five
years
in
normal
use,
one
to
two
years
at
TV-u.
the
TV. screen
•
Operations
are
not
guaranteed
for
all
USB
devices.
Also,
1
Check
the
items
listed
below.
•
Correctly
insert
the
memory
card
or
other
storage
device
e AC power outlet,
and press
1
on (screen
Ne
može
se
spojeni
u menijuon
manual
supplied
with
the
digital
still
camera.
screen
Noto
picture
is
dark)
and
no
•sound
Check
the according
connection
theodabrati
optional
equipment
anduređaj
Cannot
select
the
connected
equipment
Cannot
select
the
connected
equipment
onthe
the of
• • Press
display
the
connected
equipment
list,
then
device
hasindicator
been
formatted
tobetween
theseaside).
instruction
the
onisthe
screen
Ifsvetli
the
1crveno
(standby)
indicator
lights
upthat
in red,
press
"/1.
menu
or
cannot
switch
input
•the
The
picture
ofbright
a display
unit
is
composed
operations
differ
depending
the
features
of
the
USB
No
or
no
menu
information
from
equipment
Ako
indikator
(pripravno
stanje),
intiny
the not
digital
still
camera.
black
points
and/or
points
appear
Check
whether
the
1
(standby)
•iliOperations
are
guaranteed
for
allon
USB
devices.
Also,
2 If the•problem
still
have
your
TV
thethe
TV.
When
it
is
flashing
•picture
Press
to
the
connected
equipment
list,
then
seSome
nedevice
može
promeniti
ulaz
•persists,
Press
todisplay
display
the
connected
equipment
list,still
then
menu
or
cannot
switch
the
input
• desired
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection.
select the
input.
menu
or
cannot
switch
the
input
manual
supplied
with
digital
camera.
black
points
and/or
bright
points
(pixels)
and
the
video
being
played.
Sound
• Turn
the connected
equipment
on. (dotted
• Check
cable
•the
Use
a connection.
digital
still camera
card
other storage on
connected
to
the
video
inputfrom
jackequipment
appears
on the
tipku
.red.
onthe
screen
icatorserviced
lightspritisnite
up
in
press
"/1.
flashing
in
operations
differ
depending
onlines
the memory
features
of
theorUSB
Distorted
picture
or stripes)
picture
or
no
menu
information
select
the
desired
input.
byred,
qualified
service
personnel.
select
the
desired
input.
• Proverite
spajanje
kabla.
• connection
Connect
the
TV
to• self-diagnosis
the
AC
power
and
press
1
on
The
function
isCheck
activated.
• No
Check
the
between
the
optional
equipment
and
Operations
areoutlet,
notDouble
guaranteed
forthe
allor
USB
devices.
Also,
•device
Check
the
cable
connection.
not
indicate a according
malfunction.
images
ghosting
• the
Check
the
cable
connection.
•
cable
connection.
that
has
been
formatted
to
the
screen
T
device
and
video
being
played.
Na connected
ekranu
se •the
ne
prikazuje
slika operations
ilijack
meni
izdiffer
uređaja
Check
the
between
the
equipment
and
•ofCannot
The
of a from
display
unit is composed
of pixels.
Tiny
the video
appears
on the
the
connected
equipment
oninstruction
the
•to
theconnection
connection
between
theoptional
optional
equipment
and• Keep
thepicture
TVselect
away
electrical
noise
sources
such
as
No
sound,
but good
TV.
the
TV.
depending
on antenna/cable
the
the
USB
u information
from
equipment
1 input
Count
how
many
the
1 features
(standby)
When
itCheck
isTV.
flashing
• list,
Press
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list,
then
manual
supplied
with
the
digital
still
camera.
• times
Check
the
connection,
location
or
direction.
Sound
the
Picture
contours
are
distorted
black
points
and/or
bright
points
(pixels)
on
the
screen
do
•
Press
to
display
the
connected
equipment
then
the
TV.
cars,
motorcycles,
hair-dryers
or
optional
equipment.
screen
•
If
the
1
(standby)
indicator
lights
up
in
red,
press
"/1.
spojenog
na
video
ulaznu
priključnicu
menu
or
cannot
switch
the
input
Zvuk
device
the video
beingselect
played.
• the
Press
2 +/–
or % •(
Cannot
the connected
equipment
eo Picture
input jack
appears
on the
Sound
the desired
input.
indicator
flashes
between
each
three
second
•select
Operations
are not guaranteed
for allon
USB
devices.
Also,
Sound
The
self-diagnosis
function
is and
activated.
Double
images
or ghosting
not
indicate
acable
malfunction.
select
the
desired
input.
•sound,
When
installing
optional
equipment,
leave setting
some
space
•
Change
the
current
of
“Cinema
Drive
Only
snow
and
noise
appear
on
the
screen
• Pritisnite
za
prikaz
liste
spojene
opreme,
zatim
•
Check
if
the
“Speake
• Press No
to
display
the
connected
equipment
list,
then
•
Check
the
connection.
No
but
good
picture
Double
images
or
ghosting
menu
or
cannot
switch
the
input
• equipment
Correctly
insert the on
memory
card or
other
storage device
Double
images
or
ghosting
operations
differ
depending
on the features of the USB
picture
orno
no
menu
information
from
break.
No picture•(screen
isCount
dark)
and
sound
Cannot
select
the
connected
equipment
the
•the
Check
the
connection
between
the 1
optional
equipment
and
Check
antenna/cable
connection,
location
or
direction.
1željeni
how
many
times
the
(standby)
the
optional
equipment
and the
No
sound,
but
good
picture
Slika
je +/–
dobra
ali
nema
zvuka
settings
(page
21).TV.
No
sound,
but
good
picture
select
the
desired
input.
• location
Check
if
the
antenna
isbetween
broken
or
bent.
izaberite
ulaz.
Picture
contours
are
distorted
in
the
digital
still
camera.
device
and
the
video
being
played.
•
Press
2
or
%
(Mute).
•
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection,
or
direction.
•
Check
the
cable
connection.
connected
to
the
video
input
jack
appears
on
the
the
connected
equipment
list,
then
For
example,
the
indicator
flashes
three
times,
then
•
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection,
location
or
direction.
No sound or noisyS
menu
or cannot
switch
the input • Pritisnite
theconnection
TV. flashes
• Check the antenna/cable
connection.
• has
Check
antenna/cable
connection.
indicator
between
each
three
second
• Check
the
between
the
optional
equipment
ili
(isključenje
zvuka).
•the
Press
2
+/–
or
%
(Mute).
• Check
if the
antenna
reached
the
end
of+/–
its
serviceable
•tipku
Press
2card
or
%“TV
(Mute).
Only
snow
andizmeđu
noise appear
on
the
screen
• and
Use
a digital
still
memory
or
other
Sound
• by
Check
ifChange
the
“Speakers”
isNo
set
to
Speakers”
(page 23).
colour
on
programmes
Proverite
vezu
spoljnog
uređaja
i TV-a.
•camera
the
current
setting
ofstorage
“Cinema
Drive”
to on
otherthe TV sys•
ut.• Connect• the
screen
there
is
a
three
second
break,
followed
another
three
TV
to
the
AC
power
outlet,
and
press
1
on
•
Keep
the
antenna
cable
away
from
other
connecting
• Speakers”
Check
Cannot
select
the
connected
equipment
•
Check
the
cable
connection.
break.
Only
snow
and
noise
appear
screen
the TV.
•• da
Check
ifone
the
“Speakers”
isat
“TV
(page
Only
snow
and
noise
appearon
onthe
the
screen
life
(three
tothat
fivehas
insettings
normal
use,
two
years
Check
if21).
theto
“Speakers”
isset
settoto
“TV
Speakers”
(page23).
23).
Double
images
or ghosting
device
been
formatted
according
to “Speakers”
the
instruction
•years
Proverite
li
je
funkcija
podešena
na ifthe
(page
• Check
if• the
antenna
is
broken
or
bent.
between
thePojava
optional
equipment
and
dvostruke
slike
ili
senke
•
Select
“Reset”
(page
21).
Sound
flashes,
etc.
the TV.
cables.
tothe
display
theis connected
equipment
list, then
No
sound,
but
good
picture
No sound
or
noisy
sound
menu
or cannot
switch
the input
For
example,
indicator
three
times,
then
the or
seaside).
•Press
Check
ifghosting
antenna
broken
ororserviceable
bent.
manual
supplied
with
the
digital
still
camera.
• antenna
Check
ifthe
the
antenna
isflashes
broken
bent.
•
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection,
location
direction.
“TV
Speakers”
(str.
23).
•
Check
if
the
has
reached
the
end
of
its
•
Double
images
or
No
sound
or
noisy
sound
• If the 1• (standby)
upsecond
in red,
press
"/1.
No
sound
or
noisy
select
input.
Proveriteindicator
spajanja,
lokaciju
ili
smer
antene/
No
on
programmes
Channels
Press
ontothe
TV
to
turn
it off,
disconnect
Sound
•guaranteed
Press
2
+/–
or
%
(Mute).
• No
Check
if•colour
the
TV
system
setting
is sound
appropriate
(page
26). when viewi•
•to
ifdesired
has
reached
the
end
of
there
islights
athe
three
break,
followed
by
another
three
No
colour
orAlso,
irregular
Check
the
cable
connection.
sound,
but
good
picture
•ofatits
Operations
are
not
for
all
USB
devices.
• Check
Check
ifthe
the
antenna
has1
reached
the
end
itsserviceable
serviceable
Picture
or
sound
noise
when
viewing
a TVcolour
channel
life
(three
five
years
in2antenna
normal
use,
one
two
years
Distorted
picture
(dotted
lines
or
stripes)
•
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection,
location
or
direction.
•
Check
the
connection
between
the
optional
equipment
and
•
Check
if
the
TV
system
setting
is
appropriate
(page
26).
Nema
zvuka
ili
ima
šuma
•
Check
if
the
TV
system
setting
is
appropriate
(page
26).
Only
snow
and
noise
appear
on
the
screen
kablovskog
sistema.
osting
•Select
Check
if %
the
“Speakers”
setUSB
toB/C
“TV
Speakers”
(page 23). /
the
ACininpower
cord,
and
inform
your
dealer
or“Reset”
life
years
normal
use,
toto
two
•depending
(page
21).
operations
differ
on
the(Mute).
features
ofisthe
flashes,
etc.
No picture
orthe
noseaside).
menu
information
from
equipment
life(three
(threetotofive
five
normal
use,one
one
twoyears
years
from
the
Y,
P
B, P
R/C R jacks
•atat•Press
2
+/–
or
Adjust
“AFT”
(Automatic
Tuning)
obtain
betterof channe
The desired
Noyears
sound,
but good
picture
the
TV.the samo
• Keep
the
TVthe
away
from
electrical
sources Fine
such
assistematoispravna
D
• Proverite
da“Speakers”
linoise
su
podešenja
the
• or
Check
antenna
is broken
orscreen
bent.
Nato
ekranu
sePress
prikazuje
snežna
slika
ilioff,
šumovi
and
video
being
played.
ble
connection,
location
direction.
Sony
service
centre
ofdevice
how
indicator
theifseaside).
seaside).
Channels
Only
and
noise
appear
on
the
connected
the2snow
video
input
jack
appears
on
the
Sound
•the
Check
if
the
isCheck
set
toTV
“TV
Speakers”
(page
23).
B/CB, PR/CR
•
the
connection
of
the
Y,
P
picture
reception
(page
26).
1
on
the
TV
to
turn
it
disconnect
No
sound
or
noisy
sound
No
colour
or
irregular
colour
when
viewing
a
• Switchsignal
between
digi•
• has
Press
2 +/–
%of(Mute).
cars,
motorcycles,(str.
hair-dryers
or
optional equipment.
Distorted
picture
(dotted
lines
or
stripes)
Channels
Channels
• Double
Check
ifantena
the antenna
reached
theor
end
its
serviceable
images
or
ghosting
26).
flashes
(number
of
flashes).
•
Proverite
da
li
je
slomljena
ili
savijena.
/
and
check
if
each
jacks
are
firmly
s
screen
•
Check
if
the
antenna
is
broken
or
bent.
Distorted
picture
lines
or
the
AC power
cord,
and
your
dealer
Cannot
select
connected
equipment
on
theofis appropriate
e appear on •the
screen
Distorted
picture
(dotted
lines
or
stripes)
digital/analo
• equipment,
Check
if the
TV
system
setting
(page
26).
from
the
Y,
Pleave
Bbut
/C
B, some
P
R/C R
jacks
/ desired
• (dotted
Check
ifinform
the
“Speakers”
is set
toor
“TV
Speakers”
(page
23).
• stripes)
When
installing
optional
space
desired
channel
cannot
be
selected
No
sound,
good
picture
Nothe
sound
or
noisy
sound
life
(three
toantenna/cable
five
years
inthe
normal
use,
to as
two
at The
the•da
TV
away
from
electrical
noise
sources
such
respective
jacks. be
• Keep
Check
ifSony
antenna
has
reached
end
of
its one
serviceable
Check
the
connection,
location
or years
direction.
Proverite
liKeep
je
antena
na
krajufrom
roka
trajanja
The
desired
channel
cannot
selected
Press or •bent.
to
display
the
equipment
list,
then
The
desired
channel
cannot
beselect
selected
service
centre
of
how
the
indicator
menu
or
cannot
switch
the
input
between
the
optional
equipment
and
the
TV.
•the
the
away
electrical
noise
sources
such
asas
s •broken
When
it
is
not
flashing
• connected
Keep
theTV
TV
away
from
electrical
noise
sources
such
B/Cand
B, PR(page
/C
R jacks
of
•
Check
the
connection
of
the
Y,
P
•
Switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode
the
the
seaside).
cars,
motorcycles,
hair-dryers
or
optional
equipment.
•
Check
if
the
TV
system
setting
is
appropriate
26).
•
Press
2
+/–
or
%
(Mute).
Some
channels
are•
No sound
or noisy
sound
life
(three
tocars,
five
years in upotrebe,
normal
use,jedna
one
todo
two
years
atthe antenna/cable connection.
select the
desired
input.
(tri
do
pet
godina
normalne
dve
•Check
between
digital
analogue
mode
select
the
•space
Check
flashes
(number
ofhair-dryers
flashes).
motorcycles,
or
as reached
the
of
its
serviceable
•/ Switch
Switch
between
digital
and
analogue
modeand
and
select
the
Noif picture
from
theSpeakers”
connected
equipme
cars,
motorcycles,
hair-dryers
oroptional
optional
equipment.
Kanali
and
check
each
jacks
are
firmly
seated
in
their
•equipment.
Check
the cable
connection.
Only
snow
and
noise
appear
on
the
screen
desired
digital/analogue
channel.
• end
When
installing
optional
leave
some
•Channels
if the
“Speakers”
isand
set
to
“TV
(page
23).
1equipment,
Check
the
items
listed
below.
the seaside).
•
The
channel
is
for
s
•
Check
if
the
TV
system
setting
is
appropriate
(page
26).
•
Check
the
connection
between
the
optional
equipment
and
Distorted
picture
(dotted
lines
or
stripes)
desired
digital/analogue
channel.
• leave
Keepsome
the antenna
away
from
other
connecting
•Check
When
optional
equipment,
space
morskoj
obali).
s in normal godine
use, between
onena
to two
at installing
desired
digital/analogue
channel.
•years
When
installing
optional
equipment,
leave
some
space cable
respective
jacks.
on the screen
optional
equipment
the
TV.
•the
the
antenna
isand
broken
or bent.
Channels
When
itbetween
isifTV
not
flashing
Subscribe to a pay T
2
If
the
problem
still
persists,
have
your
TV
The
desired
channel
cannot
be
selected
Some
channels
are
blank
the TV. Distorted
No
sound
or
noisy
sound
cables.
between
the
optional
equipment
and
the
TV.
•
Keep
the
away
from
electrical
noise
sources
such
as
the
optional
equipment
and
the
TV.
Ne
može
se
odabrati
željeni
kanal
lines
or
stripes)
Slika
je izobličena
sehas
crtkane
linije
ili of itsSound
• Check
the
antenna/cable
connection.
• picture
Check(prikazuju
if (dotted
the antenna
reached
the end
serviceable
• Turn
the
connected
equipment
on.is used only
Some
channels
are
blank
Some
channels
are
blank
• only.
Channel
No
from
the
connected
equipment
appears
serviced
by
qualified
service
personnel.
Channels
• •picture
Switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode
and
select
the
channel
is
for
service
1the
Check
the
listed
below.
•life
the
antenna/cable
connection.
cars,
motorcycles,
hair-dryers
or
optional
equipment.
Check
ifscrambled/subscription
thedigitalnog
TV
system
setting
appropriate
(page
26).
desired
channel
cannot
be
selected
• Check
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection.
antenna
cable
away
from
connecting
Double
or
ghosting
•The
Odaberite
između
ithe
analognog
moda
pa
(three
toitems
five
years
inother
normal
use, Picture
one
to as
two
at• The
• Keep
Keep
the
TV
away
from
electrical
noise
sources
such
Check
cableisconnection.
pruge)
oryears
sound
noise
when
viewing
a• isTV
channel
tted
linesimages
or• stripes)
•
Contact
the only.
broadca
•
The
channel
for
scrambled/subscription
service
on
the
screen
•
The
channel
is
for
scrambled/subscription
service
only.
desired
digital/analogue
channel.
Subscribe
to
a
pay
TV
service.
•
Keep
the
antenna
cable
away
from
other
connecting
No
sound,
but
good
picture
•
When
installing
optional
equipment,
leave
some
space
•
Keep
the
antenna
cable
away
from
other
connecting
cables.
2
If
the
problem
still
persists,
have
your
TV
•
Switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode
and
select
the
the
seaside).
cars, motorcycles,
hair-dryers
optional
equipment.
•obtain
tokanal.
display the connected equipme
odaberite
željeni
digitalni/analogni
• electrical
Check the
antenna/cable
connection,
location
direction.
Theoror
desired
channel
cannot
be selected
• noise
Odmaknite
TV
od
izvora
električnih
smetnji
kao
Subscribe
toto
aaPress
pay
TV
service.
• TV.
Adjust
“AFT”
(Automatic
Fine
Tuning)
to
better
Subscribe
pay
TV
service.
om
sourcesbetween
such
as the
•
Channel
is
used
only
for
data
(no
picture
or
sound).
cables.
•
Turn
the
connected
equipment
on.
optional
equipment
and
the
Picture
cables.
•
Press
2
+/–
or
%
(Mute).
Digital
channels
are
Channels
desired
digital/analogue
channel.
• Whenorinstalling
optional
equipment,
leave
some
space
serviced
byfenovi
qualified
service
personnel.
select
input.
Some
channels
are
blank
GB
••broadcaster
Channel
is used
only
for
data
(no
picture
picture
reception
(page
26).
•(dotted
Switch
between
digital
analogue
select
the
sound
noise
when
viewing
TV
channel
used
onlythe
fordesired
data
(no
pictureororsound).
sound).
r-dryers
or optional
equipment.
štoPicture
su vozila,
motocikli,
za
kosu
iliadodatna
picture
lines
or stripes)
• mode
Contact
the
for
transmission
details.
•and
Check
the
• Distorted
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection.
34
Neki
kanali
su
prazni
Only snow
and
noise
appear
on
the
screen
•and
Check
if the
“Speakers”
is Channel
set
tocable
“TVisconnection.
Speakers”
(page
23).
between
the
optional
equipment
and
the
TV.
•
Contact
a
local
insta
•
Correctly
insert
the
memory
card
or
other
st
Picture
or
sound
noise
when
viewing
a
TV
channel
Picture
or sound
noise
when
viewing
aand
TV channel
•• Contact
the
broadcaster
for
details.
NoFine
picture
(screen
is dark)
no sound
•Press
The
channel
is
for
scrambled/subscription
service
only.
desired
digital/analogue
channel.
Contact
the
broadcaster
fortransmission
transmission
details.
nal equipment,
some
space
Some
are
blank
The
desired
channel
cannot
be selected
• channels
to ili
display
the
connected
then
•“AFT”
Keep
the
antenna
cable
away
from
other
connecting
• •leave
Adjust
(Automatic
Tuning)
to obtain
•the
Keep
theor
TV
away
from
electrical
noisebetter
sources
such asDigital
• Kanal
je
kodiran
treba
platiti
pretplatu.
Pretpla• Check ifoprema.
the
antenna
is
broken
bent.
Check
antenna/cable
connection.
arelist,
provided
in your
inTV
the
digital
stillequipment
camera.
channels
are
not
displayed
Picture
Subscribe
to
a
pay
service.
•
Adjust
“AFT”
(Automatic
Fine
Tuning)
to
obtain
better
No
sound
or
noisy
sound
equipment and
the
TV.
•
Adjust
“AFT”
(Automatic
Fine
Tuning)
to
obtain
better
•away
Check
the
antenna/cable
connection.
select
the
desired
cables.
reception
(page
26).
•tite
The
is for
scrambled/subscription
service
only.
• plaćenu
Switch
between
digital
and
analogue
mode
and select
cars,
motorcycles,
hair-dryers
orconnecting
optional
equipment.
Kod
postavljanja
dodatne
opreme,
ostavite
razmak
Digital
channels
not
displayed
• Check if• the
antenna
has
reached
the
end
of
its
serviceable
Some
channels
are blank
• picture
Keep
the
antenna
cable
from
other
Digital
channels
are
not
displayed
• orUpgrade
tocard
a the
higher
•input.
Useare
a digital
stillpicture
camera
memory
or ot
sechannel
na
TV
uslugu.
Channel
isdigital/analogue
only
for
data
(no
sound).
• and
Contact
a1
local
to
find
out
ifchannel.
digital
transmissions
picture
reception
(page
26).
ble connection.
picture
reception
(page
26).
• one
Connect
the
TVno
the
AC some
outlet,
press
on
•power
Check
if the
TV
system
setting
isused
appropriate
(page
26).
• •Correctly
insert
the
memory
card
orbeen
other
storage
device
Subscribe
to
ainstaller
pay
TV
service.
desired
•picture
When
installing
optional
equipment,
leave
space
No
(screen
is• to
dark)
and
sound
life (three
to five
years
in inormal
use,
two
years
atto
cables.
device
that
has
formatted
according
to th
između
uređaja
TV
prijemnika.
•
Contact
a
local
installer
to
find
out
if
digital
transmissions
The
channel
is
for
scrambled/subscription
service
only.
Picture
or
sound
noise
when
viewing
a
TV
channel
•
Contact
a
local
installer
to
find
out
if
digital
transmissions
•
Kanal
služi
samo
za
prenos
podataka
(bez
slike
i
•
Contact
the
broadcaster
for
transmission
details.
are
provided
in
your
area.
e away from other connecting
the
TV.
in
the
digital
still
camera.
•
Channel
is
used
only
for
data
(no
picture
or
sound).
between
the optionalSubscribe
equipment
theTV
TV.service.
the seaside).
manual
supplied with the digital still camera
are
provided
inin
your
area.
• •Check
the“AFT”
antenna/cable
connection.
toand
a TV
pay
are
provided
your
area.
• Proverite
spajanje
antene/kablovskog
sistema.
Some
channels
are
blank
•
Upgrade
to
a
higher
gain
aerial.
Adjust
(Automatic
Fine
Tuning)
to
obtain
better
zvuka).
Picture
or
sound
noise
when
viewing
a
channel
•
If
the
1
(standby)
indicator
lights
up
in
red,
press
"/1.
•
Use
a
digital
still
camera
memory
card
or
other
storage
• Contact
theUpgrade
broadcaster
transmission
details.
• Checkthe
theTV
antenna/cable
connection.
Digital
channels
are
not
displayed
•aafor
Operations
are
not
guaranteed for all USB d
toto
higher
gain
aerial.
• (dotted
Connect
to
the
power
and press
1 (no
on picture
• AC
Channel
isoutlet,
used
only
for Channels
data
or sound).
• Upgrade
higher
gain
aerial.
picture
reception
(page
26).
Odmaknite
kabl
antene
ostalih
spojnih
kablova.
Distorted• picture
lines
or od
stripes)
• •The
channel
isusluge
for
scrambled/subscription
only.
device
that
has been
formatted
according
to theservice
instruction
• Obratite
se
davaocu
za
detalje
odepending
prenosu.
• Adjust
Tuning)
tobroadcaster
obtain
better
•“AFT”
Keep
the
antenna
away
from
other information
connecting
se when viewing
a TV
channel
operations
differ
on the features o
No Fine
picture
orthe
no
menu
from
equipment
•
Contact
a
local
installer
to
find
out
if
digital
the
TV. (Automatic
•cable
Contact
for
transmission
details.
Digital
channels
are
not
displayed
The desired channel
cannot
betoselected
Subscribe
awith
pay the
TV digital
service.still camera. transmissions
manual
supplied
TV
kanala
nema
slike
ili
zvuka
• Keep theKod
TV gledanja
away
from
electrical
noise
sources
such
as
picture
reception
(page
26).
cables.
device
and the
video being played.
provided
in your
area.
If thebetter
1 (standby)connected
indicator lights
up in
red, press
"/1.
moguće
gledati
digitalne
kanale
matic Fine Tuning) to •obtain
to the
video
input
jack between
appears
the
•Nije
Contact
aChannel
local
installer
toguaranteed
find
outselect
if for
digital
transmissions
• are
is used
only
for
data
(no
or sound).
• on
Operations
are
notmode
all
USB
devices.
Also,
• Switch
digital
and
analogue
and
thepicture
cars, motorcycles,
or optionalDigital
equipment.
channels
are not
displayed
• Podesitehair-dryers
“AFT”
(Automatic
Fine
Tuning)
kako
• • Upgrade
tothea area.
higher
gain aerial.
e 26).
Picture
or
sound
noise
when
viewing
a
TV
channel
screen
•
Obratite
se
lokalnom
davaocu
usluga
zaconnected
informacije
GB
are
provided
in
your
Contact
broadcaster
for
transmission
details.
Cannot
select
the
equipmen
operations
differ
depending
on
the
features
of
the USB
channel.
No picture
or no menu
information
• When installing
optional
equipment,
leave
space
34 equipment
• some
Contact
a localfrom
installer
todesired
find outdigital/analogue
if digital transmissions
biste ostvarili
bolji
prijem
slike
(str.
26).
•daUpgrade
to a and
higher
gain
aerial.
• equipment
Adjust to
“AFT”
(Automatic
Fine
Tuning)
obtain
better
•video
Press
tojack
display
thetoarea.
connected
equipment
list,
then
li su
digitalni
programi
dostupni
kod
vas.
device
the
video
being
played.
menu
or
cannot
switch
the
input
between the optional
and
TV.are
connected
thethe
input
appears
on
the
provided
in
your
Some channels are Digital
blank channels are not displayed
picture
receptionselect
(page
26).desired
the
input. gain
• Check the
connection.
GB screen
• Nabavite
antenu
sathe
većim
pojačanjem.
• Upgrade
to a higher
aerial.
• installer
Check
the
cable
34antenna/cable
Cannot
select
connected
equipment
the
• Contact
a local
to find
outconnection.
if digitalon
transmissions
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
• The
channel is
for scrambled/subscription
service only.
GB
• Check
the connection between
the optional
equipment
and
GB from other
• Keep the antenna•cable
away
connecting
34
34
Press
to displaythe
theTV.
connected equipment list,
then
are
your area.
menu
orprovided
cannot in
switch
the input
Subscribe
to a pay
TV service.
cables.
select the desired input.
Sound
• for
Upgrade
topicture
a connection.
higher
aerial.
• Channel is used only
data
or gain
sound).
• Check
the (no
cable
SRP
Double
images
or ghosting
Check
the connection
between
the optional
equipment
and the broadcaster for transmission details.
Picture or sound•noise
• Contact
GB when viewing a TV channel
No
sound,
but good picture
34
the TV.Fine Tuning)
• Check
the better
antenna/cable connection, location or direction.
• Adjust “AFT”GB
(Automatic
to obtain
Sound
•
Press
2
+/–
or % (Mute).
Digital
channels
are
not
displayed
34 Double
picture reception
(page 26).
images orOnly
ghosting
snow and noise appear on the screen
• Check if the “Speakers” is set to “TV Speake
34
Opšte
General
TV prijemnik se automatski isključuje (TV
The TV turns
off automatically
(the TVstanje)
enters
prijemnik
se isključuje
u pripravno
standby
mode)
• Proverite da li je aktivirana opcija “Sleep Timer”
• Check
(str.
29). if the “Sleep Timer” is activated (page 29).
• Check if the “Idle TV Standby” is activated (page 30).
•Proverite da li je aktivirana opcija “Idle TV
Some input
sources cannot be selected
Standby”
(str. 30).
• Select “Video Labels” and cancel “Skip” of the input
Nekisource
izvori
signala se ne mogu odabrati
(page 29).
• Izaberite “Video Labels” i isključite postavku
The remote
does
not function
“Skip”
na izvoru
ulaznog
signala (str. 29).
• Replace
the batteries.
Daljinski
upravljač
ne radi
HDMI equipment
• Zamenite
baterije.does not appear on “HDMI Device
List” oprema se ne prikazuje u “HDMI
HDMI
• CheckList”
that your equipment is compatible with Control for
Device
HDMI.
• Proverite da li je vaša oprema kompatibilna sa
Cannot
“Off” in “Control for HDMI”
Control
forselect
HDMI.
• If you have connected any audio system that is compatible
Additional Information
Ne možete
odabrati “Off” u “Control za
with Control for HDMI, you cannot select “Off” in this
HDMI”
menu. To change the audio output to the TV speaker,
• Ako
ste spojili
audio sistem
koji je kompatibilan
select
“TV Speakers”
in the “Speakers”
menu (page 23).
saLost
Control
for
HDMI,
ne
može
se
odabrati
“Off” u
password
ovom
meniju.
Ako
želite
da
promenite
audio
izlaz
• Select the “PIN Code” settings on the “Parental
Lock”
TV zvučnika,
odaberite
Speakers”
meniju 9999.
settings, then
enter the“TV
following
master upassword:
“Speakers”
(str. 23).
This password
clears your previous password and allows
you to enter a new password (page 28).
Izgubljena
lozinka
• Izaberite podešenje “PIN Code” u “Parental Lock”,
zatim unesite sledeću lozinku: 9999. Ova lozinka
briše vašu prethodnu lozinku i omogućava vam
unošenje nove lozinke (str. 28).
35 SRP
GB
35
Teh
hniþki pod
daci
Naziv modela
em
Siste
Sistem
m ekrana
TV sisstem
Sistem
m boje/video signala
Pokriv
venost kanala
KDL-40
0BX420
KDL
L-32BX320
KDL-26BX320
KDL-22BX320
0
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) ekrann
G, I, D/K
Analogni: B/G
Digitalni: DV
VB-T
Analogni: PA
AL, PAL60 (samo videoo ulaz), SECAM, NTSC
C3.58, NTSC4.43 (samo video ulaz)
Digitalni: MP
PEG-2 MP@ML/HL (aaustralijski model), MPE
EG-2 MP@ML/HL, H..264/MPEG-4 AVC MP
P/
HP
P@L4 (novozelandski i singapurski model)
Analogni: B/G
G: VHF: E2–E12/UHF: E21–E69/CATV: S001–S03, S1–S41
A/UHF: 28–69/CATV: S01–S03, S1–S44 (sam
mo Australija i Singapuur)
VHF: 0–12, 5A, 9A
VHF: 1–11/UHF: 21–69/CATV:
2
S1–S41 (samo Novi Zeland i Singapur)
I:
UHF: B21–B69/CA
ATV: S01–S03, S1–S411 (samo Australija i Noovi Zeland)
D//K: VHF: C1–C12, R11–R12/UHF: C13–C577, R21–R60/CATV: S011–S03, S1–S41, Z1–Z339
(samo Australija i Novi Zeland)
Digitalni: VH
HF/UHF (samo Australiija i Singapur), UHF (saamo Novi Zeland)
Izlazn
na snaga zvuka
8W+8W
Ulazne/izlazne prikljuþnice
Anten
na
75-ohmska sp
poljna prikljuþnica za VHF/UHF
V
COMPO
ONENT IN
COMPONENT
C
IN/
Podržani form
mati: 1080p, 1080i, 7200p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 4880i
1
5W+5W
Y: 1 Vp-p, 75
5 ohma, 0.3V negativnaa sinhronizacija/PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohma/PR/C
/ R: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohmaa
1 Video
o ulaz (phono prikljuþniica)
COMPONENT
C
IN
2
2
HDMII IN 1, 2
DIGITAL AUDIO OU
UT
(OPTIICAL)
Audio ulaz (p
phono prikljuþnice)
Video ulaz (p
phono prikljuþnice)
Audio ulaz (p
phono prikljuþnice)
Video: 1080/2
24p, 1080p, 1080i, 7200p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 4880i
Audio: Dvokanalni linear PCM: 32, 44.1 i 48 kHz, 16, 20 i 24 bita
Analogn
ni audio ulaz (mini prikkljuþnica) (samo HDMI IN 2)
PC ulaz (pogledajte str. 25)
Digitalna optiiþka prikljuþnica (Dvokkanalni linear PCM, Doolby Digital)
Audio izlaz (p
phono prikljuþnice)
PC IN
N
PC IN
N
i
ajanje i ostalo
Napa
Napajanje
Veliþina
inþa
ekranaa (dijagonaalno) cm (pribl.)
Rezolu
ucija ekrana
Ulaz za raþu
unar (D-sub 15-pinski)) (pogledajte str. 25)
G: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohma, bez sinhronizzacije na zeleno/B: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohma/
R: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohma/HD: 1-5 Vp-pp/VD: 1-5 Vp-p
PC audio ulazz (mini prikljuþnica)
USB prikljuþnica
z slušalice
Prikljuþnica za
110-240 V AC
C, 50/60 Hz
40
0
32
26
22
101
1.6
80.0
66.1
54.8
1,920 taþaka (horizontalno)
× 1,080 linijja (vertikalno)
1,366 taþaka (hhorizontalno) × 768 liniija (vertikalno)
Potroššnja energije
Naznaþena naa zadnjoj strani TV-a.
988 × 63
32 × 250
800 × 528 × 220
Dimen
nzije Sa postoljem
m (mm)
(pribliižno) Bez postoljaa (mm)
988 × 60
00 × 94
8000 × 496 × 91
(š × v × d)
15.7
10.7
Masa
m (kg)
Sa postoljem
(pribliižno) Bez postoljaa (kg)
13.6
9.1
Zidni nosaþ
Dodattni
SU-WL50B
priborr
668 × 455 × 220
551 × 393 × 215
668 × 424 × 91
551 × 363 × 61
8.8
6.2
7.3
5.6
SU-WL
L100
Tehniþki podaci i dizajnn podložni su prom
meni bez najave. Proizvoÿaþ
P
ne preuuzima odgovornostt za eventualne
štamparske greške.
36 SRP
36
Customerkorisnicima
support
Podrška
Uputstvo za on
“Montiranje
nosača” nije
Instructions
“Installingzidnog
the Wall-Mount
Bracket” are
not
supplieduinobliku
the form
of a separate
with
this TV.
isporučeno
zasebne
brošureleaflet
sa ovim
TV-om.
These
installation
instructions
are included
this
Ovo uputstvo
za montažu
se nalazu
unutar within
uputstva
TV’s
instructions
manual.
za ovaj
TV.
© 2011 Sony Corporation Printed in China
OVLAŠĆENI SERVISI
Input
Milentija Popovića 18
Beograd
011 2132 877, 311 9431
TV Video Centar
Save Kovačevića 153
Podgorica
020 620 980
ETC Electronic
Ustanička 128b
Beograd
011 3473 530, 2894 508
V.T. Centar
Seljanovo bb
Tivat-Kotor
032 674 422
ETC Electronic
Pere Velimirovića 8
Beograd
011 3510 424, 3591 243
TV Digital Servis
Šukrije Međedovića
Bijelo Polje
050 431 399
SS Digit
Kraljice Marije 29
Beograd
011 3223 674, 3370 369
Predstavništvo Sony Central and
Southeast Europe Kft. Beograd
Omladinskih Brigada 88a
11 070 Novi Beograd
Republika Srbija
Sony Info Centar
+381 11 228 33 00
www.sony.rs
support.rs@eu.sony.com
Download PDF

advertising